Home

Report 2 - CSA Group

1. 40 Table 13 Ambient conditions at the field test sites expressed as daily averages 46 Table 14 Results Grubbs outlier test Reference 48 Table 15 Results Grubbs outlier test Reference 49 Table 16 Removed data pairs reference PM according to 49 Table 17 Removed data pairs reference PM according to 49 Table 18 Determination of availability without test related 56 Table 19 Determination of availability including test related outages 56 Table 20 Uncertainty between systems under test Ups for the candidates SN 20014 and SN 20116 measured component PMo essen 59 Table 21 Uncertainty between systems under test Ups for the candidates SN 20014 and SN 20116 measured component PMig eese esses sees 59 Table 22 Overview equivalence test TEOM 1405 DF Ambient Particulate Monitor for 5 69 Table 23 Overview equivalence test TEOM 1405 DF Ambient Particulate Monitor for PMjpo 70 Table 24 In between instrument uncertainty of the reference devices for 5
2. nnne 93 15 1 eue 93 15 2 Geometric Mean Calculations enne 94 15 3 Semi Volatile Wind Speed Ambient Temperature and Ambient Dew Point Calculations 95 15 4 en 3 n 97 CONCLUSIONS is 98 16 Discussion Relative to Data Quality Objectives sss 98 17 Overall Goncl slOns a re Rede DNE 99 APPENDICES 102 A Operating 102 Filter Weighing 107 B 1 German test sites Cologne and 107 B 2 UK test sites Teddington 111 15017025 1104 114 D Maintenance 120 Field Test Data tree de eee sete e eL eed eee iota ae QUE eie A 121 F Instrument Mantal lee eae 136 Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 5 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 BUREAU VERITAS le Thermo Fisher Sci
3. 66 Figure 45 Results of the parallel measurements with the candidates SN 20014 SN 20116 measured component PMi all sites values lt 30 66 Figure 46 Reference vs candidate SN 20014 amp SN 20116 measured component PM s all test tu uds tek ckn ANEA a Aa 73 Figure 47 Reference vs candidate SN 20014 measured component 5 all test sites 73 Figure 48 Reference vs candidate SN 20116 measured component 5 all test sites 74 Figure 49 Reference vs candidate SN 20014 measured component PM test site Teddington 74 50 Reference vs candidate SN 20116 measured component s test site Teddington I 75 Figure 51 Reference vs candidate SN 20014 measured component PM 5 Cologne Winter 75 Figure 52 Reference vs candidate SN 20116 measured component 5 Cologne Winter 76 Figure 53 Reference vs candidate SN 20014 measured component PM Bornheim Summer EE 76 Figure 54 Reference vs candidate SN 20116 measured component Bornheim Summer 77 Figure 55 Reference vs candidate SN 20014 measured component PM Bornheim
4. path and no more 0 60 l min from zero flow at the bypass path The tightness check includes the base path as well as the reference path The tightness check may only be performed using the tightness check assistant in order to avoid damages of the instrument This procedure has been carried out at the beginning of each field test site It is recommended to check the tightness of the TEOM 1405 DF once a month using the described procedure Evaluation The tightness check via the tightness check assistant was done at the beginning of each field test site The criteria for approving the tightness check implemented by the manufacturer a deviation of the flow values at a blocked inlet of no more than 0 15 l min from zero flow at the PM and PMeoarse path and no more 0 60 l min from zero flow at the bypass path were approved as appropriate parameters for the monitoring of the device tightness The tightness check may only be performed using the tightness check assistant to avoid damage to the instrument Assessment The criteria for passing the tightness check implemented by the manufacturer a deviation of the flow values at a blocked inlet of no more than 0 15 l min from zero flow at the PM and PMoarse path and no more than 0 60 l min from zero flow at the bypass path were approved by TUV Rheinland as appropriate parameters for the monitoring of the device tightness The tightness check may only be
5. c c A e A A zx A T pA alala R O o A A w N A A B 6 Operatine TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC APPENDIX SERIAL COMMUNICATION AK Protocol Enter Register Command EREG COM 2 WAY SETTINGS RS Para 1 ASCII code for the 1 digit Station Number for example 4 052 The Station Number is always 1 digit in length RS Para 2 75048 ASCII code representation of the 2 digit Channel Number for example KO 075 048 The Channel Number is always 2 digits in length RS Para 3 13010 Optional Up to 3 ASCII codes can be added to response from the instrument In this case CR and lt LF gt ASCII codes 013 and 010 are appended to the response Enter 0 if nothing is to be appended Tem Enter Register command 4 digit Enter Register command Tef K 2 digit Channel Number as defined o o tals condong EREA Program Register Code of the whose value was entered The PRC variable whose value is being may be 1 to 3 digits long and is not requested The PRC may be up to 3 right filled in the response digits long Do not right fill if the Up to 3 digits appended to the end of Le New value to be entered for variable the response transmission according to referenced by Program Register the entry for RS Para 3 Code in bytes 11 to 13 above fie
6. sr In the menu Settings the user has access to system data and advanced settings At this point e g date time can be set the password protection can be activated analogue and digital output can be parameterized or the calibration constant Ko can be displayed Figure 77 Menu Service CIENTIFIC w Fully operational Normal status Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 104 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the and 5 TEOM 1405 DF In the menu Service all implemented procedures for the instrument maintenance e g change of TEOM filter cleaning of the cooler etc instrument checking flow rate leak test check of the calibration constant Ko instrument calibration flow rate temperature and pressure sensors and other functionalities can be obtained By using the maintenance assistant of the software the user is lead step by step through maintenance and audit work via different screens Therefore no manual is needed at the test site for the performance of this work Besides the direct communication via operating keys display extensive possibilities exist to communicate via different analogue outputs RS232 interfaces USB interfaces as well as Ethernet interfaces The following possibilities are available 1 x 25 pin USER interface for analogue in and output and digital output 1 x RS232 interface for the communicatio
7. 0 20001 0 14 01 2009 0 20000 10 15 01 2009 0 20001 10 21 01 2009 0 20001 0 22 01 2009 N 0 20001 0 29 01 2009 Co 0 20001 0 30 01 2009 A 0 20000 10 04 02 2008 i 0 20001 10 05 02 2009 0 20001 0 11 02 2009 k N 0 20001 0 12 02 2009 0 20000 10 18 02 2009 c 0 20000 0 19 02 2009 N 0 20000 0 26 02 2009 N 0 20000 0 27 02 2009 N 0 19999 10 Highlighted yellow average value Highlighted green lowest value Highlighted blue highest value Figure 81 Stability of the control filters 0 09280 0 09260 0 09240 0 09220 0 09200 0 09180 0 09160 0 09140 0 09120 0 09100 Weight g xx yyyexyxwewet e ELLA ws Stability control filter Emfab e IM1 A TM2 x Mean TM1 a Mean TM2 TETES ESE T ua 4 4 4 6 4 e Mean TM3 i 5 10 15 20 25 0 No of weighing Bureau Veritas Air Quality AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Page 109 Thermo Fisher Scientific BUREAU UK Report on the Equivalence of the 5 TEOM 1405 DF Table 36 Stability of the control filters Control filter No Weighing No 1 2 1 0 09257 0 09155 0 09110 0 09258 0
8. 3 33 User I O GonbeCUOfSsuc niinc eii erret rer ed ee eo Fed oae 3 34 USER 1 O Pin 8 3 35 Section4 Screens and SettingS csssssescsscssssssessscssssssssssssssssseseseseseeseseeess 4 1 TEOM Data SORGE sinso etre a eb a vu 4 2 Operating T 4 6 Systemi Stats SCLC m 4 8 Instrument Conditions Screen sa iseatsesnsetscivenaecoisonondesesessoeedesannestanseasesivastas 4 10 Ambient Conditions CER 4 12 Flows 4 13 Flow Rates ore M 4 14 Flos Control SC GEB irsini esnan aiii i 4 15 Instrument Temperatures DOBBH 4 18 THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Operatine Guine TEOM 1405 DF IX Preface Analog Lanvin csv 4 19 amp uid 4 20 FDMS Cooler Temperature Setting sirsiran 4 21 SLIT o e e 4 22 Systeri 4 24 Analog amp Digital 4 26 Anao Outputs nen pen ener errr ere cer errr terete erate 4 27 Compact Closure Steet osised War weeds rivis ocu pa 4 28 DAE e 4 29 Settings Advabiced SCHeGR acaso qe orte
9. 72 Table 25 In between instrument uncertainty of the reference devices for 72 Table 26 Summary of the results of the equivalence check SN 20014 amp SN 20116 measuring gt after intercept 2 90 Table 27 Summary of the results of the equivalence check SN 20014 amp SN 20116 measuring alter int rCeDt saranin desea tite ceeds ANEA AN E ER 91 Table 28 Range of geometric mean concentrations for each site type in the UK calculated using 2007 2010 data with this data factored to estimate the PM geometric mean ranges 93 Table 29 Low and high thresholds and the requisite number of daily means for PM and 5 equivalence tests to be carried out outside these thresholds whichever is appropriate as a Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 6 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 BUREAU VERITAS Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the and 5 TEOM 1405 DF percentage of the number of measurements within one comparison for semi volatile PM mass concentrations and for selected meteorological conditions eese 94 Table 30 Site Name Country Site Classification number of days number of calendar days prescribed range and geometric mean for reference method measurements of made in each site e
10. si Terrnggens 12 18 Figure 5 50 Verification screen TEOM 1405 DF Service gt Verihcalion m ELI Ea Seong Benes a UC IESUS THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Operatinc TEOM 1405 DF 5 41 Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES Figure 5 51 Number entry keypad 5 42 Operatine Guine TEOM 1405 DF Users enter values into the calibration screens using a number keypad Figure 5 51 Whenever the uset is prompted to enter a value such as an externally measured temperature pressure or flow rate the calibration wizatd will automatically display a keypad Enter the value into the keypad as instructed by the wizatd then select the Enter button to set the value or press the Cancel button to exit the keypad screen and return to the wizatd Ambient temperature THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Auditing the System Figure 5 52 Instrument Audit screen THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES Users can instantly audit all of the instruments functions through a single software screen When the Verification screen select the Instrument Audit button to display the Instrument Audit screen Figure 5 52 The Instrument Audit screen shows the temperature flow and other values that can be audited by the user Placing a thermometer or barometer in the desired location allows users to audit those values compared to an external
11. TEOM 1405 DF Data dc ipe ki E i 1 laur kh 2 poe 23r Fiber loading Frequency VA STATUS BAR ment mode Lock mod Status conditions Current date time warning s The TEOM Data screen includes menu buttons allowing users to access the other main screens The status bar at the bottom of the screen displays operating information including the current operating mode lock mode and date and time as well as the current status Normal or Warning s Note Upon initial instrument start up the values in the mass concentration fields are the running averages that are accumulated until a 1 hour time period has passed The values are visible to provide the user with an indication that the instrument is functioning after instrument power up or reset These raw values are used for internal calculations only amp THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 4 SCREENS AND SETTINGS The TEOM Data screen contains the following information MC ug m This field contains the mass concentration values for the PM 2 5 and PM Coarse channels as well as the PM 10 average The unit calculates the mass concentration MC value by subtracting the Ref MC from the Base MC This is a one hour average updated every 6 minutes This value cannot be changed by the user 01 Hr MC ug m This field contains t
12. 1405DF FDMS ug m 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 PM Reference ug m Figure 69 Reference vs candidate SN 20116 measured component PM test site Bornheim Winter a SN 20116 Bornheim Winter PM 1405DF FDMS ug m 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Reference ug m Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 84 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the and PM TEOM 1405 DF VERITAS le Figure 70 Reference vs candidate SN 20014 measured component values gt 30 ug m 4 SN20014 1405DF FDMS ug m 50 60 70 80 90 Reference ug m Figure 71 Reference vs candidate SN 20116 measured component 0 values gt 30 ug m 4 SN20116 PM 1405DF FDMS ug m 40 50 60 70 80 90 PM Reference ug m Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 85 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the 5 TEOM 1405 DF Conclusion for UK Purposes As the intra instrument uncertainty of the reference method is less than 2 0 ug m for the all data dataset for both PM and 5 criterion is fulfilled Further the intra instrument uncertainty of the reference method is less than 2 0 g m for two sub datasets corresponding to all the data split greater than or equal to and lower than 30 g m for and 18 g m fo
13. 1 12 Section2 Setup and Installation 42 2 1 Installation 2 2 Standard System 2 3 Pamp Qc a1 ao 615 6 0 2 4 Adjusting the 2 6 Assembliuo the rb don n beni 2 8 Installing the Inlet and 2 9 Applying Power to the Instrument uite asiste iiinis 2 16 Turning Off the 2 18 th ictor mme 2 18 Using the Outdoor Shelter 2 19 Section3 Basic Operation eee ttt 3 1 Startno the Nig CIAL ese nest Sterben 3 2 Performing a Leak Check uecssenirisi eive prirta poii PREIS FH FUERIS ERE 3 4 suci DAP T 3 11 Downloading Data eee trie herb emperor pet rine 3 13 oo 3 14 Connecting to the TEOM 1405 DF 3 19 Finding Instruments On a Netwotle ence mee ient 3 23 Setting Up for Manual Data Downloads 2er 3 25 Setting Up for Automatic Data Downloads 3 27 Pertormine a Data Dosebloadusueesas irse dedic 3 29 Downloading Data To a Flash Ditive nunaeauaus uites ea iai rds 3 31 Viewing Downloaded Data retire rper
14. clage this wizard press Finish THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC TEOM 1405 DF 5 57 Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES Calibrating the The Analog Output Calibration Wizard allows users to calibrate the eight Analog Outputs analog output channels to either 0 1 VDC or 0 5 VDC Note Always wear appropriate anti static devices when working with the system electronics A To calibrate the analog outputs 1 Attach an antistatic wrist strap to your wrist Attach the other end of the wrist strap to the chassis of the control unit to discharge any static electricity while working on the unit Note Always wear appropriate anti static devices when working with the system electronics A 2 Open the door to the unit Figure 5 70 and locate the interface board mounted to the bottom of the unit Figure 5 70 1405 DF unit with left door open Interface board 5 58 Operatine Guine TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES 3 Locate the analog outputs jumpers and test points located at the front of the board and ensure that the jumper for the channel you are calibrating is set to the correct voltage limit Figures 5 71 and 5 72 Note Set the jumper on the right and middle posts pictured for 0 1 VDC and over the middle and left posts for 0 5 VDC Figure 5 71 Front of interface board with jumpers and testpoints highlighted 1
15. gt 15 4 18 2 25 6 21 3 19 8 13 9 13 9 30 8 22 0 10 1 3 0 4 7 3 6 5 0 6 1 6 3 2 8 4 2 6 4 9 6 11 1 15 5 22 4 6 5 5 7 11 6 19 7 1002 NS 27 5 26 3 26 3 42 6 29 5 26 4 22 8 41 7 30 7 16 4 6 4 10 0 7 7 10 4 10 4 15 0 7 0 7 8 12 9 16 4 16 1 20 4 30 9 13 4 11 3 19 5 29 7 OLINd 91102 NS 25 4 23 6 24 7 41 7 30 8 29 8 26 2 22 9 40 9 31 2 17 6 6 4 11 1 7 5 9 1 10 3 13 6 6 2 6 6 13 1 17 4 16 4 20 7 31 5 12 4 11 2 18 8 29 6 jusiquy 18 4 18 1 17 8 18 8 17 8 17 5 13 2 9 9 8 7 12 2 17 7 16 3 12 5 9 9 8 7 7 8 8 5 10 5 9 2 8 1 5 6 5 2 HH 68 3 70 6 75 4 65 9 72 4 70 8 71 2 81 6 85 5 84 5 74 4 77 4 91 1 76 3 69 6 68 8 73 8 78 5 82 0 74 4 79 8 79 3 25 m q 1ueiquy 12 5 12 7 13 4 12 3 12 8 12 1 8 1 6 9 6 4 9 7 13 1 12 3 11 1 5 9 3 4 2 4 4 1 6 9 6 3 3 8 2 4 1 9 SM ejejoA 1 7 1 3 1 0 1 3 3 4 3 6 1 9 1 2 1 2 0 5 1 5 0 3 3 7 0 8 3 8 1 6 1 3 12 2 0 2 3 1 3 3 6 0 5 21 0 9 1 4 2 0 3 2 0 9 3 6 1 0 0 9 0 1 0 6 0 6 1 0 1 5 1 2 2 0 1 5 2 2 0 8 4 8 1 2 2 3 1 5 0 6 1 0 2 0 1 1 41 Page 132 SOJON Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Nitrate is 2011 ion data on this date Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs
16. 15080000020 Audit 10000 00 Percent difference 0 0 Pp Coarse right 10000000000 Audit KO 10000 00 Percent difference 0 0 clage this wizard press Finish Completing the KO Verification Wizard Figure 5 90 Completing the KO Verification Wizard screen with a fail message The KO Verification Wizard has completed 252 wunsucesshully The nstrument will be put Run mode when this wizard is finished PE 2 5 lett 10000 000000 Audit 00 Percent ditterence 100 0 PM Coaree right 10000 000000 Audit KO 0 0 Percent ditference 100 0 close this wizard press Finish THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Operatinc TEOM1405 DF 5 73 Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES Notes 5 74 Operatine Guine TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC AppendixA Troubleshooting The current status condition is located in the status bar at the bottom of the TEOM Data screen Section 4 and most other instrument screens In data files however status codes are reported as decimal hexadecimal numbers The decimal number reported by the unit must be compared to the list of status codes Table A 1 If the exact decimal code does not appear in the list multiple status codes are present and the decimal must be converted to hexadecimal number in order to determine which codes are being reported by the unit
17. Operatinc TEOM 1405 DF 4 27 Section 4 SCREENS AND SETTINGS ContactClosureScreen Select the Contact Closure button to display the Contact Closure screen Figure 4 22 When in the Contact Closure screen use the buttons to select a variable operator and compare value for the desired contact closure channel 1 2 Figure 4 22 Contact Closure screen TEOM 1405 DF Sellings ooulpul gt Contwe Closure arith Compare Operator Compare Velie x Back Heeg elatus 181 4 28 TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 4 SCREENS AND SETTINGS RS232 Screen Select RS232 button to display the RS232 screen Figure 4 23 The RS232 screen allows users to set up the serial port for communication with the RP Comm software or AK protocol Figure 4 23 RS232 screen TEOM 1405 DF Settings olinalog amp Digital Oulpuls RE232 Cancel Mdn Heraa siaus THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Operatinc TEOM 1405 DF 4 29 Section 4 SCREENS AND SETTINGS Settings Advanced Screen Figure 4 24 Advanced Screen 4 30 Operatine TEOM 1405 DF Select the Advanced button to display the Advanced screen Figure 4 24 which allows users to adjust the advanced settings of the unit TEOM 1405 DF Sellings Advanced a operational inal sates DEIF When in the Adva
18. Cancel Note It may take several minutes to upload the new firmware depending on the speed of the uploading PC and the speed of the network During the upload the TEOM 1405 DF instrument touch screen will display a text message then a scrolling cursor to indicate progress A THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Operatinc TEOM 1405 DF 4 39 Section 4 SCREENS AND SETTINGS 9 The Software Upload Completed screen will display Figure 4 33 Select the Finish button Close ePort and return to normal operation Figure 4 33 Thermo 1405 Installer Joe Software Upload Completed screen Software Upload Completed 1405 Installer Transfer of software to the instrument has completed Setup will automatically continue on the instrument SCLEN TEP IC Thermo Hectron Corporation E Cancel Note The instrument will restart automatically after the firmware is uploaded 4 40 Operatine TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 4 SCREENS AND SETTINGS To install new firmware using a USB Flash Drive Note In order to update the instrument firmware via the USB port Current instrument firmware version 1 51 or later is required to be installed on the monitor Contact Thermo Fisher Scientific for further information if an earlier version is installed If updating the firmware using ePort this limitation does not apply A To perform a firmware upgrade using the US
19. System Status Irigtrusreent Conditions Settings Service s Hund Peo 5 2 Operatine TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES Figure 5 3 1405 Maintenance screen TEOM 1405 DF CIEMTIFIC Service gt Maintenance ESI Habing Mene elatus mi FDMS Dryer Thermo Fisher Scientific recommends an annual dryer replacement Re placement refurbishment for the dryers installed in the 1405 DF TEOM eries This refurbishment 75 010965 is to minimize sampling artifacts Refurbishment that could effect the measurement of total mass concentration over time The refurbishment consists of cleaning and any necessary replacement of parts Contact Thermo Fisher Scientific s Service Department THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Operatine Guine TEOM 1405 DF 5 3 Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES TEOM Filter Replacement Filter Loading Figure 5 4 TEOM Data screen 5 4 Operatine TEOM 1405 DF The 1405 DF TEOM filters for the PM 2 5 and PM Coarse flows need to be changed periodically before filter loading can affect the flow or at least every 30 days Change the PM 2 5 and PM Coarse filters at the same time Note Change the filters at least every 30 days The PM 2 5 and PM Coarse filters should be changed at the same time Change the FDMS filters at the same time you change t
20. Air tube Valve coupler Direct connection between weldment air tube and valve fitting Sorbothane isolator between weldment air tube and valve fitting Higher flexibility compensation of thermal stress in the material Improvement of the instrument performance due to increased operating reliability Table 5 contains a list of the most important device related characteristics of the particulate ambient air measuring device TEOM 1405 DF Ambient Particulate Monitor Table 5 manufacturer s information Device related characteristics TEOM 1405 DF Ambient Particulate Monitor Dimensions Weight TEOM 1405 DF Ambient Particulate Monitor Measuring device 432 x 483 x 1400 mm 33 kg without pump Sampling tube approx 0 3 m between Inlet and Flow Splitter 1 m between Flow Splitter and inlet of central unit Sampling inlet US Original Style not louvered Energy supply 100 115 230 V 50 60 Hz Power input Approx 100 130 W normal operation central unit Approx 550 600 W normal operation pump Bureau Veritas Air Quality AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Page 21 BUREAU Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the and PM25 TEOM 1405 DF Ambient conditions Temperature 48 425 Humidity Non condensing Sampling flow rate Inlet 16 67 l min 1 m3 h 3 l min 1 67 l min 12 l min
21. Benes Only qualified service personnel should attempt to adjust these settings Contact Thermo Scientific before adjusting any of these settings THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Operatinc TEOM 1405 DF 4 35 Section 4 SCREENS AND SETTINGS Installing New Firmware Figure 4 29 System Status screen IP address 4 36 Operatine TEOM 1405 DF If the instrument needs new firmware there two methods that can be used to update the instrument using the ePort software or by using a USB flash drive Refer to Section 3 for information on installing and starting the ePort software New versions of the TEOM 1405 DF instrument software periodically made available either on computer CD or in the online library on the company website at www thermo com agi The next section provides instructions on installing new firmware via ePort Refer to the following section for installing software via USB To install new firmware using ePort 1 Download the new firmware file onto a personal computer PC from the company website or locate the updated version on the software CD Note the file name 2 Ensure that the PC and the instrument ate connected to the same network using the Ethernet connection on the back of the instrument Refer to Section 3 for information on connecting the instrument to a network 3 In the System Status screen of the machine you want to update locate and record the IP address
22. tmoTEOMAHD tmoTEOMEHD tmoTEOMAReMCRsw 1 tmoTEOMAFreqSiat imoTEOMAFrequancy imoTEOMBFreqStan rmoTEOMEFrequ 265 50621 2 SUE 18 17 15918 42597 14406 26323 0 0 0 0 250 4 3 5 2006 18 17 15918 42690 14405 26323 0 0 0 266 50621 0 250 4 41650006 18 17 15918 42697 14406 26323 0 0 0 50621 0 250 4 5 6550006 1817 15918 42697 14405 26323 0 0 0 265 500901 0 250 4 1B 17 15918 42697 14406 26323 0 0 0 265 508008 0 250 4 506 18 18 15918 42090 14406 26323 0 0 0 265 50961 0 250 4 15918 4269 14406 26323 0 0 0 255 508593 0 250 4 9 652008 18 18 1591842697 14406 26323 0 0 0 265 50977 0 250 4 1818 15918 42697 14406 26323 0 0 0 255 908567 0 250 4 11165206 18 18 1591842697 14406 26323 0 0 0 265 509333 0 250 4 12 S572006 1B 18 15918 42597 14406 26323 0 0 255 510035 0 250 4 135 652006 18 19 15918 42697 14406 26323 0 0 0 205 500005 0 250 4 14 18 15918 42597 14406 26323 0 255 5089975 265 509975 250 440345 250 4 15 65 2006 18 19 1591842697 14406 26323 0 0 265 500075 2655 500661 250 440046 250 4 S572006 18 19 15918 42697 14406 26323 0 0 265 5089975 255 509882 250 440345 250 4 ASAMA 1819 15918 42697 14405 26323 0 0 265 500505 265 500965 250 447346 250 4 18 18 19 15918 42597 14406 26123 0 0 265 508875 255 510019 250 440346 250 4 19 65206 18 20 1591842697 14406 26323 0 0 205 500075 265 5
23. If the user chooses to set the unit to report the mass concentration levels to Actual conditions they must select the Active flow control button Figure 4 13 This will cause the monitor to use the actual ambient temperature and ambient pressure in its flow rate calculations If the user chooses to set the unit to report the mass concentration levels to Standard conditions they must set the standard temperatures and pressures to the appropriate standard regulatory values Operatinc TEOM 1405 DF 4 17 Section 4 SCREENS AND SETTINGS Instrument Instrument Temperatures screen Figure 4 14 shows the current Temperatures Screen Figure 4 14 Instrument Temperatures screen 4 18 Operatine TEOM 1405 DF temperatures of the unit TEOM 1405 DF ECIEMTIFIC Heey emen 122 The Instrument Temperatures screen contains the following control buttons Cap temperature This field contains the current value of the temperature of the mass transducer s cap The default setting is 30 C To view or adjust the setpoint select the button to display the keypad Figure 4 3 DO NOT adjust this value without contacting Thermo Scientific Case temperature This field contains the current value of the temperature C of the mass transducer case The default setting is 30 C To view or adjust the setpoint select the button to display the keypad Figure 4 3
24. OR 4 30 rc MM 4 32 Instrament Control Secrets succeed 4 34 Service AVANCE p Rhet 4 35 Installung New PIENE uos dritten cupi dV viter Ent niter M N 4 36 Section5 Maintenance and Calibration Procedures 5 1 Periodic amp nia 5 1 Maintenance EE AICI 52 ae eats opulentis 5 2 EDMS Dryer Replacement Refurbishment uuazansnira sik dbuieiokn 5 3 TEOM Filter Replace meit sssaaa sine a 5 4 ig coo TT 5 4 Changing the TEOM Filters 5 6 Filter 5 13 Conditioning the TEOM Filters soie tre tere rrr rr teh ier tete 5 15 Replacing the 47 mm uenerat 5 16 Cleaning the PNESTO 5 18 Cleaning the Virtual 5 22 TE iis Filters sesiis orines iini arisin iin 5 24 Cleaning the Air quie iere mener 5 28 AS OO LOIS 5 30 Neate the Switching ales 5 36 Audit Calibration Procedures eerte nene 5 40 PMA the Syste atacan ibn o EE 5 43 Calibrating the A
25. jeuueuo Boyeuy induj 6ojeuy Nd eqni einjejeduie deg ejnjejeduie ose sainjesodway Hu maq 1ueiquy ensseJg einjejeduie jusiquiy SUOHIPUOD jueiquiy A 4 4 suonipuo you ueppiu uoiuw suondo eAjoe pue pe ejdsip suondo 4 11 Operatine TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 4 SCREENS AND SETTINGS Ambient Conditions Ambient Conditions screen Figure 4 10 shows the current ambient Screen conditions for the monitor Figure 4 10 Ambient Conditions screen TEOM 1405 DF Instrument Cenditiong Ambient Conditions SCIENTIFIC Siena Hand chiles 154 The Ambient Conditions screen contains the following information Ambient Temperature This field contains the current ambient tempera ture C at the site This value cannot be edited and will be correct only when the ambient temperature humidity sensor is properly installed e Ambient Pressure This field contains the current ambient pressure atm at the site This value cannot be edited Ambient Dew Point This field contains the current ambient dew point C at the site This value cannot be edited and will be correct only when th
26. Flow rate Flow rate Bypass Filter material TEOM Pallflex TX40 MC 6 minutes 1 Hr MC Mass measured values PMG 12 Hr MC 24 moving 1h average updated every moving 1h average updated every 60 minutes on the full hour moving 8h average updated every 60 minutes on the full hour moving 12h average updated every 60 minutes on the full hour moving 24h average updated every 60 minutes on the full hour Detector Mass transducer Cont Noise lt Discont 0 1 ug Frequency in the range 150 400 Hz Check of the calibration constant Ko Parameter instrument temperatures Nominal value for the following instrument temperatures Mass transducer cap Mass transducer case Bureau Veritas Air Quality AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Page 22 BUREAU Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the and 5 TEOM 1405 DF Parameter FDMS Dryer type Temperature dryer normal conditions Dew point of the air flows normal conditions Pump vacuum NAFION Dryer Type C 46 at gt 2 Warning message gt 510 mm Hg Storage capacity data internal 500 000 Data set gt 2000d when storage in a 6 minute interval Device in and outputs 1 x 25 pin USER I O interface for analogue in and output and digital output 1 x RS232 interface for the communication via RP Comm Software or AK Protocol
27. PM10 Grubbs outlier Changing of TEOM 47mm Filter Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the PM25 TEOM 1405 DF eus Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter eu pue ojeq uelis Sun 20 Nov 11 07 00 Mon 21 Nov 11 07 00 Tue 22 Nov 11 07 00 Wed 23 Nov 11 07 00 Thu 24 Nov 11 07 00 Fri 25 Nov 11 07 00 Sat 26 Nov 11 07 00 Sun 27 Nov 11 07 00 Mon 28 Nov 11 07 00 Tue 29 Nov 11 07 00 Wed 30 Nov 11 07 00 Thu 01 Dec 11 07 00 Fri 02 Dec 11 07 00 Sat 03 Dec 11 07 00 Sun 04 Dec 11 07 00 Mon 05 Dec 11 07 00 Tue 06 Dec 11 07 00 Wed 07 Dec 11 07 00 Thu 08 Dec 11 07 00 Fri 09 Dec 11 07 00 Sat 10 Dec 11 07 00 Sun 11 Dec 11 07 00 Mon 12 Dec 11 07 00 Tue 13 Dec 11 07 00 Wed 14 Dec 11 07 00 Thu 15 Dec 11 07 00 Fri 16 Dec 11 07 00 Sat 17 Dec 11 07 00 Sun 18 Dec 11 07 00 Bureau Veritas Air Quality AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 gui Drl SA1 S ZNd 30 0 30 4 37 4 38 8 24 1 14 3 4 8 14 0 13 0 9 1 8 0 7 2 5 1 4 9 5 0 5 2 5 0 5 6 11 5 4 7 2 3 1 0 3 1
28. Placing the filter on the tapered element 5 8 Operatine TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES 12 The Seat Filters screen will display Gently press down on the TEOM filter to ensure that it is seated properly Figure 5 9 13 Remove the filter exchange tool by slowly retracting it until it clears the filter Figure 5 9 Do not disturb the filter 14 Place the bottom of the filter exchange tool on top of the TEOM filter Figures 5 9 and apply downward pressure approximately 0 5 kg or 1 Ib to seat the filter firmly in place Figure 5 9 Placing the filter on the tapered element 15 Repeat the installation procedure for the other new TEOM filter Select the Next gt button 16 The Precondition Filters screen will display Place new TEOM filters on the conditioning posts on the mass transducer Refer to the next section for more information on conditioning filters Select the Next gt button 17 The Close Instrument screen will display Raise the mass transducer to the closed position and fasten the holding rod onto the latch plate 18 Close and latch the door to the sensor unit Keep the door open for as short a time as possible to minimize the temperature change in the system Select the Next gt button THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Operatine TEOM 1405 DF 5 9 Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES 19 The system will autom
29. ui Drl Z SA1 29 1 30 2 37 4 39 7 24 4 13 6 4 9 15 6 12 8 8 6 7 1 6 4 3 1 4 2 3 8 3 4 3 7 5 7 9 1 3 7 2 0 0 9 1 3 L ESAT 35 1 38 5 47 7 54 2 30 6 21 5 11 0 28 5 18 2 20 9 8 6 11 7 6 3 6 6 7 2 8 8 8 2 12 6 14 4 7 2 4 3 3 5 4 9 Z SA10LWd 35 3 39 5 48 3 55 4 31 6 22 7 9 4 27 8 18 0 21 1 10 1 11 6 6 3 6 7 8 1 9 2 8 1 13 2 13 8 6 7 4 0 2 5 4 3 amp eWd 71002 NS 32 6 33 8 41 6 44 2 26 6 16 6 7 4 6 9 17 2 15 3 11 0 9 5 9 6 4 6 4 8 4 8 4 9 4 0 5 2 6 9 8 5 12 9 6 0 2 9 3 3 3 7 gui Drl 91102 NS 30 4 32 0 38 9 41 4 25 2 15 0 6 1 5 8 16 2 14 2 10 1 7 8 7 8 3 1 3 3 4 0 4 2 3 4 4 0 5 8 7 6 11 8 4 3 1 7 1 8 2 8 1002 NS 38 5 43 5 53 5 59 2 34 7 25 7 11 9 12 6 30 0 21 0 23 2 12 4 13 5 8 1 7 8 8 2 8 8 9 4 9 4 14 0 13 8 16 9 9 2 5 5 5 2 6 2 91102 NS 36 6 42 0 51 0 56 8 33 6 24 4 10 9 11 9 29 2 20 3 22 5 11 0 12 1 6 9 6 6 7 7 8 4 9 0 8 7 13 4 13 4 16 1 8 1 4 8 4 2 5 7 jusiquy 7 8 5 7 6 0 7 9 7 2 3 5 6 9 6 2 11 2 6 4 8 3 7 5 4 5 4 8 4 8 2 3 3 5 6 0 7 1 5 9 5 4 4 3 3 2 1 1 HH 80 4 80 7 84 9 84 2 82 3 80 9 76 1 80 1 84 5 80 3 77 7 76 0 79 8 78 5 83 0 74 74 5 70 8 75 0 78 5 78 7 7
30. uoneiqijed yndjno Bojeuy WAR einpeuog SUOISJOA aemula SINGS 1S9L 5 INd 1eeH eqn 951205 G Z Wd 191009 ssed q G Z Wd Jayeay ose deg INO3L 009 WOAL S Z Nd suonoun4 jueuinujsu 9jgesiq ejqeua sz Av peoueApy yooqey dois dns uny 104 u09 ejqe ree Jou uoiuw suondo eAnoe pue pe ejdsip semje suondo 0x JeanpsueJ sse y 49949 4297 upny Senosseooy uoneiqie2 uea 2 S19 002 uea 3 WOAL einpeuos eoueuejurey eoueuejure w 6 4 33 Operatine TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 4 SCREENS AND SETTINGS Instrument Control Screen Figure 4 27 Instrument Control screen 4 34 Operatine TEOM 1405 DF Select the Instrument Control button to display the Instrument Control screen Figure 4 27 The Instrume
31. 1 x Ethernet interface for the connection with a PC for data transfer and remote control via ePort Software 2 x USB interfaces for the direct data download and for Firmware update Status signals error messages Available overview see annex A of the instruction manual Bureau Veritas Air Quality AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Page 23 2 BUREAU Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the and PM25 TEOM 1405 DF 2 Scope of Equivalence Testing As discussed in Section 1 the TEOM 1405 DF is based on the measuring principle of oscillating micro weighing with correction for the loss of volatile particulates from the oscillating filter The Reference Method conversely takes 24 hour samples on to filters which are weighed on a balance before and after sampling As such there are significant differences between the Candidate and Reference methods necessitating that the full test procedures are undertaken as discussed in MCERTS for UK Particulate Matter There should be a total of at least four field tests of at least 40 data points at locations The field test was carried out at the following test sites Table copied from the TUV Rheinland Report Table 6 Field test sites Measuring test site Period Characterisation Teddington UK 04 2010 07 2010 Urban background Cologne parking lot winter 01 2011 05 2011 Urban background Bornheim motorwa
32. 20 2 40 3 33 5 28 4 50 4 49 7 36 9 36 5 37 2 gui Drl 91102 NS 26 7 30 5 24 7 18 6 14 4 28 3 30 1 27 1 16 8 32 2 30 6 24 4 19 7 22 4 31 5 67 3 45 2 59 2 32 7 20 6 40 6 33 8 27 9 49 8 48 7 35 8 35 3 35 6 jusiquy 7 2 5 4 3 7 2 7 2 6 5 8 8 3 7 8 HH Os m q 1ueiquy 69 3 1 6 71 6 2 6 67 2 4 0 68 8 5 4 74 9 52 80 4 6 9 75 8 9 8 79 8 86 7 11 3 87 0 9 8 83 2 9 4 80 8 9 3 69 7 8 3 81 6 4 3 83 7 2 9 79 3 0 4 82 1 0 1 77 9 0 9 81 8 2 9 85 3 6 0 79 2 4 4 SM ejejoA 3 9 5 3 2 3 6 0 3 8 4 1 1 9 1 9 0 9 1 5 2 7 3 5 0 7 3 3 1 0 3 0 0 4 28 1 0 4 5 2 0 4 9 2 9 5 4 3 8 3 0 4 1 6 6 2 4 6 0 2 2 17 9 1 3 5 0 2 9 5 3 1 7 5 4 1 0 5 3 1 1 5 5 Page 133 S ON Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405 5 Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405 5 Average of 4 1405 5 Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Nitrate is 2011 ion data on this date Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs VERITAS yew y
33. 5 Average of 4 1405 5 Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs o VERITAS yew y Zero filter gt Inlet Audit 20014 Audit 20014 Audit 20014 Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the PM25 TEOM 1405 DF eus Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter pue HUS Tue 17 Jan 12 07 00 Wed 18 Jan 12 07 00 Thu 19 Jan 12 07 00 Fri 20 Jan 12 07 00 Sat 21 Jan 12 07 00 Sun 22 Jan 12 07 00 Mon 23 Jan 12 07 00 Tue 24 Jan 12 07 00 Wed 25 Jan 12 07 00 Thu 26 Jan 12 07 00 Fri 27 Jan 12 07 00 Sat 28 Jan 12 07 00 Sun 29 Jan 12 07 00 Mon 30 Jan 12 07 00 Tue 31 Jan 12 07 00 Wed 01 Feb 12 07 00 Thu 02 Feb 12 07 00 Fri 03 Feb 12 07 00 Sat 04 Feb 12 07 00 Sun 05 Feb 12 07 00 Mon 06 Feb 12 07 00 Tue 07 Feb 12 07 00 Wed 08 Feb 12 07 00 Thu 09 Feb 12 07 00 F Instrument Manual Bureau Ve
34. 50 5 and filters were weighed twice before and after sampling Table 37 summarizes the conditioning and weighing timescales utilised Table 37 conditioning and weighing timescales Pre Sampling Post Sampling Condition minimum of 48 hours Condition 48 hours Weigh Filters Weigh Filters Condition 24 hours Condition 24 hours Weigh Filters Weigh Filters At the start of each weighing session the balance was exercised to remove mechanical stiffness and then calibrated At the start and end of each batch of filters a 50 and 200 mg check weight were weighed In line with the recommendations of the UK PM Equivalence Report filters were weighed relative to a 100 mg check weight and not a tare filter as the latter was shown to lose mass over time Four filters were weighed between check weights as the balance drift over time had been shown to be small The Check weight Mass CM of the filter was calculated for each weighing session using E B 1 below 255 ar M check End 2 CM Where Mcheck bet Mass of check weight weighed immediately prior to sample filter Mass of check weight weighed immediately after sample filter The Relative Mass RM of the filter was calculated for each weighing session using E B 2 below RM M pne CM E B 2 Where Miter Mass of sample filter Particulate Mass PM is calculated using the following equation in accordance with EN14907 E B 3 2 5
35. 71002 NS 0 15 8 20 6 15 1 16 1 7 4 3 1 4 0 4 9 4 3 6 2 8 0 5 7 4 3 6 5 5 7 11 4 8 3 6 9 6 8 8 6 eu 6rl 91102 NS M 15 7 20 6 15 2 16 4 6 6 3 2 3 3 4 6 4 2 6 4 7 9 4 5 4 3 6 4 5 6 11 3 7 7 6 4 6 8 7 6 OLINd 1002 NS 19 9 14 6 5 5 7 5 10 9 16 5 26 4 29 5 24 7 26 4 11 9 7 5 10 5 11 3 8 4 11 5 12 5 9 8 10 0 14 9 13 8 24 0 12 7 13 4 12 4 17 7 91102 NS 21 5 14 6 5 8 8 8 11 7 18 1 27 8 31 1 26 4 28 1 11 9 8 3 11 0 11 9 8 9 12 5 13 2 9 5 11 0 15 9 14 7 25 7 12 0 13 1 12 3 16 4 jusiquy 20 8 19 4 15 3 15 6 14 5 13 6 14 8 16 4 21 2 24 5 20 2 16 6 17 4 14 9 14 7 19 0 23 8 16 2 19 4 16 7 15 2 14 1 17 1 16 8 13 3 13 6 15 6 16 9 15 2 9e HH 83 4 83 7 77 0 69 2 66 7 73 6 72 0 71 6 72 2 67 0 79 5 62 9 66 8 73 1 84 7 86 9 73 0 86 0 71 1 67 3 65 1 75 3 72 6 70 6 76 4 75 8 78 0 69 5 72 2 Os m q 1ueiquy 17 9 16 6 11 3 10 0 8 4 9 0 9 8 11 3 16 0 18 0 16 5 9 5 11 2 10 1 12 1 16 8 18 7 13 9 14 0 10 6 8 7 9 8 12 1 11 4 9 2 9 4 11 8 11 3 10 2 SM ejejoA 1 0 3 2 1 5 2 0 1 1 0 7 1 3 1 4 2 0 1 2 0 8 1 7 0 7 3 0 0 6 4 3 0 8 2 1 1 3 2 2 1 1 1 5 1 9 0 6 2 6 2 0 2 2 1 3 1 1 1 0 0 4 0 9 1 5 1 2 0 7 1
36. All of the leak tests conducted passed the manufacturer s leak test specifications and it is recommended that this performance is sufficient in order to warrant approval of the instrument subject to an explanation being provided on the MCERTS certificate The maintenance interval was discussed in Section 8 3 The maintenance interval is defined by necessary maintenance procedures and is 4 weeks and this is this value that should be transferred to the MCERTS certificate This is greater than the required 2 2 weeks A series of intensive laboratory tests was undertaken by T V Rheinland that go beyond the requirements set out in MCERTS for UK Particulate Matter It is not required to report the results of these tests on the MCERTS certificate MCERTS for UK Particulate Matter requires that there should be a total of at least four field tests of at least 40 data points at locations As all of the field tests were conducted before the publication of MCERTS for UK Particulate Matter 31 July 2012 allowances are made for the scope of the field tests 1 It is not necessary that all the field test sites have a similar pollution climate similar to that of the UK though these calculations were presented in Section 15 It was shown that the pollution climate criteria are fully met for the TEOM 1405 DF for both and 5 This information should be referenced on the MCERTS Certificate but there is no requirement to give any detailed informatio
37. Analog Output Channel 4 Analog Output Channel 3 funalesg Output Channel amp Analog Channel 7 Analog Output Channel E 5 60 Guine TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES 7 The Select Analog Output Range screen will display Figure 5 75 Set the voltage range for the analog output Select the Next gt button Note Ensure that the voltage range selected for the analog output channel matches the jumper voltage setting for the analog output channel step 3 A Figure 5 75 Select Analog Output Ran Select Analog Output B up Range screen 8 The Connect Meter screen will display Figure 5 76 Locate the test point Figure 5 71 for the analog output being calibrated and attach a voltmeter set to VDC to the test point and to the ground test point on the board Select the Next gt button Figure 5 76 Connect Meter Connect Meter screen THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Operatinc Guine TEOM 1405 DF 5 61 Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES 9 The Measure Low Setting screen will display Figure 5 77 Compare the reading on the volt meter to the reading on the screen If the readings are different select the Current reading button to display the number keypad and enter the current reading and press the Enter button Select the Next gt button Figure 5 77 Measure Low Setting Measure Low Setting screen 10 The Me
38. Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer eui pue ojeq uelis Thu 25 Aug 11 07 00 Fri 26 Aug 11 07 00 Sat 27 Aug 11 07 00 Sun 28 Aug 11 07 00 Mon 29 Aug 11 07 00 Tue 30 Aug 11 07 00 Wed 31 Aug 11 07 00 Thu 01 Sep 11 07 00 Fri 02 Sep 11 07 00 Sat 03 Sep 11 07 00 Sun 04 Sep 11 07 00 Mon 05 Sep 11 07 00 Tue 06 Sep 11 07 00 Wed 07 Sep 11 07 00 Thu 08 Sep 11 07 00 Fri 09 Sep 11 07 00 Sat 10 Sep 11 07 00 Sun 11 Sep 11 07 00 Mon 12 Sep 11 07 00 Tue 13 Sep 11 07 00 Wed 14 Sep 11 07 00 Thu 15 Sep 11 07 00 Fri 16 Sep 11 07 00 Sat 17 Sep 11 07 00 Sun 18 Sep 11 07 00 Mon 19 Sep 11 07 00 Tue 20 Sep 11 07 00 Wed 21 Sep 11 07 00 Thu 22 Sep 11 07 00 Bureau Veritas Air Quality AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 gui Drl SA1 S ZINd 11 5 4 9 5 9 9 1 14 5 17 7 14 9 8 2 4 8 5 2 6 1 6 8 5 7 5 2 6 3 6 7 11 1 13 0 3 2 7 8 6 4 Z SA1 6 2 8 1 13 9 18 2 15 0 8 0 5 0 5 6 5 8 7 1 5 5 6 1 7 2 7 2 12 2 13 7 3 9 8 2 7 8 ESAT 18 8 10 7 7 7 11 4 17 1 26 0 27 5 25 1 12 7 9 2 11 1 12 5 12 1 9 4 11 6 16 3 15 3 24 3 23 0 7 0 12 5 12 4 19 2 2 ESAT OLWd 18 6 10 7 7 6 11 5 16 6 23 6 26 1 24 1 12 1 9 1 10 6 13 2 11 8 9 3 11 6 16 8 15 6 24 9 25 1 7 1 11 6 12 3 18 9
39. DO NOT adjust this value without contacting Thermo Scientific e PM 2 5 air tube temp This field contains the current value of the tempera ture C of the PM 2 5 air stream The default setting is 30 C To view or adjust the setpoint select the button to display the keypad Figure 4 3 DO NOT adjust this value without contacting Thermo Scientific e PM Coarse air tube temp This field contains the current value of the temperature C of the PM Coarse air stream The default setting is 30 C To view or adjust the setpoint select the button to display the keypad Figure 4 3 DO NOT adjust this value without contacting Thermo Scientific THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 4 SCREENS AND SETTINGS Analog Inputs Screen Analog Inputs screen Figure 4 15 gives the current values of the units four analog input channels The inputs accept 0 5 VDC and can be converted to a desired scale Select the Analog Input 1 Analog Input 2 Analog Input 3 or Analog Input 4 buttons to convert the analog input to a desired scale Figure 4 15 Analog Inputs screen TEOM 1405 Incirument Inputs x Back Harsa ENERO 15 55 THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Operatinc TEOM 1405 DF 4 19 Section 4 SCREENS AND SETTINGS FDMS Module Screen FDMS Module screen Figure 4 16 allows users to access the values used by the Filter Dynamics Measurement System to gen
40. F202 F203 F204 F201 F206 F401 402 VI Operatine TEOM 1405 DF requirements of this product Line Voltage 440VA 47 63 Hz IMPORTANT Disconnect the power cord from the power source output while servicing the instrumentto prevent electrical hazard Environmental Ranges The instrument and its sample pump must be installed in a weather sheltered location that is heated in the winter and air conditioned in the summer Note There may be hazardous line wire accessible inside the enclosure amp Installation Category Category 11 Current Rating Location F 4A 250VAC F 5A 250VAC F 4A 250VAC F 1A 250VAC F 2A 250VAC F 2A 125VAC T 6 3 250VAC Input Module Power Distribution Board Power Distribution Board Power Distribution Board Power Distribution Board Head Controller Board FDMS Board THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Electrical Safety Certifications CE Disposal of the Instrument THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Preface The product has been tested and has been documented to be in compliance with the following U S and Canadian safety standards UL Standard 61010 1 2004 2nd Edition CAN CSA C22 2 No 1010 1 2004 2nd Edition Thermo Fisher Scientific certifies that this product operates in compliance with the EC Directive 89 336 EEC in reference to electrical emissions and immunity Specifically the equipment meets the requirements of EN 61326 1 1998 for Immunity and Emissio
41. MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES Figure 5 68 Flow Calibration screen 5 56 Operatine Guine TEOM 1405 DF 6 The wizard will display a screen that shows the current low setpoint flow rate as measured by the instrument in the TEOM flow rate button Figure 5 68 the flow to stabilize Select the TEOM flow rate button and enter the current flow rate to two decimal places as measured by the flow meter into the number pad and select the Enter button The newly entered flow rate will display in the TEOM flow rate button Select the Next gt button PH 2 5 Flow Calibration CEER the bution to enter the Tow rate measured by the audit device PM 2 5 flow 2 4 pra lt Back gt Cancel The wizard will display a screen that shows the current high setpoint flow rate as measured by the instrument in the TEOM flow rate button Allow the flow to stabilize Select the TEOM flow rate button and enter the current flow rate to two decimal places as measured by the flow meter into the number pad and select the Enter button The newly entered flow rate will display in the TEOM flow rate button Select the Next gt button The wizard will display a screen that shows the current setpoint flow rate as measuted by the instrument in the flow rate button Allow the flow to stabilize Select the TEOM flow rate button and enter the current flow rate to two decimal places as measured by the
42. Preconditions for acceptance of the full dataset are that e slope b is insignificantly different from 1 b 1 lt 2 u b and e The intercept a is insignificantly different from 0 lt 2 u a Where u b and u a are the standard uncertainties of the slope and intercept respectively calculated as the square root of their variances If these preconditions are not met the candidate method may be calibrated according to GDE2010 The calibration shall only be applied to the full dataset The combined uncertainty of the candidates wc is calculated for each data set by combining the contributions according to the following equation Yi yi For each dataset the uncertainty is calculated at the level of y 30 ug m for PM s yi 50 ug m for PM g Wem Yi Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 68 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the and PM25 TEOM 1405 DF The expanded relative uncertainty of the results of the candidates is calculated for each data set by multiplication of wc with a coverage factor k according to the following equation In practice k 2 for a large n The highest resulting uncertainty Wey is compared and assessed with the requirements on data Wa 2 k Way quality of ambient air measurements according to 2008 50 EC Two results are possible 15 Wow lt Candidate method is accepted as equivalent t
43. RM RM e T RM y Where Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 111 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 0 Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the and PM25 TEOM 1405 DF Pre1 denotes weighing session 1 prior to sampling Pre2 denotes weighing session 2 prior to sampling Posti denotes weighing session 1 after sampling Post2 denotes weighing session 2 after sampling Pre Spread Spe Post Spread Spos and Blank Spread Ssiank were calculated using the following equations Spre RM m RM anfa E B 4 S RM gai T RM 5 Post 5 2 rc Men T Blank 2 2 As with the UK PM Equivalence Report 11 it was not possible to weigh all filters within the 15 day timeframe suggested in EN14907 However as filters were removed immediately from the reference samplers and placed in the refrigerator it was not necessary to determine if Tambienr exceeded 23 C It is felt that as 15 days was impractical for a relatively small scale field study it is less likely to be attainable if this methodology were adopted by a National or Regional network and as such the methodology employed herein is representative of how the reference samplers would be operated in practice Analysis of Protocols Employed The distributions of pre and post weight for all Emfab filters weighed relative to the tare filter and check weight are shown in Figure 82 If filters lose relative mass between weightings then
44. Regression line Candidate 2 ug m 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 Candidate 1 ug m Figure 37 Results of the parallel measurements with the candidates SN 20014 SN 20116 measuring component s all sites values gt 18 uig m 1405 DF SN 20014 SN 20116 All test sites gt 18 pig m Raw data 130 120 110 100 Measured values 90 Regression line 80 70 60 40 Candidate 2 ug m 30 20 10 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 Candidate 1 g m3 Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 62 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the and PM TEOM 1405 DF BULLAS VERITAS Figure 38 Results of the parallel measurements with the candidates SN 20014 SN 20116 measured component all test sites values lt 18 ug m 1405 DF SN 20014 SN 20116 All test sites 18 g m Raw data 130 120 110 100 Measured values 90 Regression line 80 70 60 40 Candidate 2 ug m 30 20 10 0 11 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 Candidate 1 g m Figure 39 Res
45. Schedule of Accreditation issued by United Kingdom Accreditation Service 21 47 High Street Feltham Middlesex TW13 4UN UK NPL Management Ltd Issue No 058 Issue date 28 November 2012 INSTRUMENTS FOR AIR QUALITY MONITORING Analyser Calibraton 200 ppb to 2 ppm Two point zero and span 150 ppb to 1 ppm calibration An assessment of 30 to 1 ppm uncertainty due to analyser 0 5 ppm to 45 ppm repeatability and imearty is also undertaken 200 ppb to 2 NOJ 150 ppb to 1 ppm 0 5 ppm to 45 ppm Assessmert Manager INC Page 51 052 Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 119 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 0 Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the and 5 TEOM 1405 DF D Maintenance Procedures The following text is copied with minor alterations from Section 7 of the TUV Rheinland Report Works in the maintenance interval 4 weeks The following procedures are required to be undertaken at regular intervals Regular visual inspection telemetric monitoring Check if device status is o k Check if there are no error messages Check if there are no contaminations Check of the instrument functions according to the instructions of the manufacturer Maintenance of the sampling inlet according to the instructions of the manufacturer Monthly change of the TEOM filters or in case the filter load gt 90 96 is reached Simultaneously with the change of the TEOM filters the cooled 47
46. X Measured values 90 Regression line 80 y x 70 50 Candidate 2 uig m 40 30 20 10 1 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 Candidate 1 g m7 Figure 45 Results of the parallel measurements with the candidates SN 20014 SN 20116 measured component PM all sites values lt 30 ug m 1405 DF SN 20014 SN 20116 Alle test sites lt 30 Raw data 130 120 110 100 Measured values 90 Regression line 80 See y x 70 60 s 40 Candidate 2 ug m 30 20 10 0 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 Candidate 1 g m Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 66 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the and 5 TEOM 1405 DF Conclusion for UK Purposes As at least 20 of the results obtained using the standard method are greater than 28 g m for and 17 ug m for 5 criterion 1 is fulfilled There is no requirement in MCERTS for UK Particulate Matter for this information to be placed upon the MCERTS certificate As the intra instrument uncertainty of the candidate method is less than 2 5 g m8 for all and all data as well as for the sub datasets corresponding to all the data split greater than or equal to and
47. a ua 0 993 1 032 0 011 0 157 0 301 0 988 1 023 0 013 0 407 0 465 0 974 1 118 0 021 1 067 0 438 0 942 0 896 0 020 1 673 0 410 Limit Value of 50 ug m3 WCM gt 28 ug m3 36 9 55 4 10 7 9 7 0 914 1 047 0 019 0 475 0 330 10 57 3 4 0 950 1 014 0 026 0 198 1 176 10 94 100 0 0 976 1 013 0 008 0 027 0 221 8 67 25 1 As the required expanded uncertainties were all below 25 before correction for intercept it is not compulsory to intercept correct the TEOM 1405 DF Ambient Monitor for either PM25 or Correction for intercept is shown to be marginally beneficial as the intercept for both instruments is not significantly different from 0 after correction The MCERTS certificate should show the range of required expanded uncertainties both before and after correction for intercept Intercept correction is not required in order to make the instrument equivalent but it is essential that thorough and frequent on going QA QC procedures are employed as prescribed in fprEN12341 2013 and CEN TS16450 including to precisely quantify analyser baseline performance and ensure the continued correct operation of the FDMS drier As the criterion specifically states that a correction may be made by taking this approach Criterion 5 is fulfilled Bureau Veritas Air Quality AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Page 91 Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equi
48. xu b u a Algorithms for the calculation of intercepts as well as slopes and their variances by orthogonal regression are described in detail in in the 2010 GDE The values for Uc scor are used for the calculation of the combined relative uncertainty of the candidate systems after correction according to the following equation w y c CM corr y Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 88 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific 2 UK Report on the Equivalence of the and 5 TEOM 1405 DF For the corrected data set uncertainty is calculated at the daily limit value by taking as y the concentration at the limit value The expanded relative uncertainty Wow cor is calculated according to the following equation Wow cor k w CM corr In practice k 2 for large number of available experimental results The highest resulting uncertainty Wcy is compared and assessed with the requirements on data quality of ambient air measurements according to 2008 50 EC Two results are possible 1 Wag gt Candidate method is accepted as equivalent to the standard method 2 Wom gt Candidate method is not accepted as equivalent to the standard method The specified expanded relative uncertainty Waqo for particulate matter is 25 ZA Assessment The candidate systems fulfil the requirements on the data quality of ambient air quality measurements during the test already wi
49. 0 023 0 330 0 748 Orthogonal Regression 0 990 1 055 0 983 1 029 0 972 1 080 0 957 0 851 247 0 872 1 086 0 025 0 722 0 254 24 38 4 5 0 948 1 029 0 025 0 336 0 819 19 57 100 0 338 0 972 1 006 0 009 1 352 0 176 16 38 30 2 0 014 0 016 0 020 0 016 Slope b ub Intercept ua WCM 96 96 gt 17 ug m 3 E Criterion 4 Betw een Instrument Uncertainties Reference Candidate Criterion 1 Criterion 2 Criterion 3 Limit Value of 30 ug m3 Criterion 5 Other Orthogonal Regression Limit Value of 30 ug m 3 CB Slope b ub Intercept a ua WCM gt 17 ug m 3 0 992 1 028 0 982 1 003 0 972 1 084 0 968 0 861 0 012 0 016 0 020 0 014 250 0 899 1 112 0 022 0 037 0 229 24 63 4 4 0 958 1 005 0 022 0 237 0 717 15 71 100 0 341 0 977 0 991 0 008 1 040 0 158 12 49 29 9 Page 69 VERITAS VERITAS Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the 5 TEOM 1405 DF The check of the five criteria from Section 12 1 resulted as follows Criterion 1 Greater than 20 of the data are greater than 17 g m3 Criterion 2 The intra instrument uncertainty of the candidates is smaller than 2 5 uig m Criterion 3 The intra instrument uncertainty of the reference is smaller than 2 0 uig m Criterion 4 All of the expanded uncertainties are bel
50. 00 Sat 19 Feb 11 10 00 Sun 20 Feb 11 10 00 Mon 21 Feb 11 10 00 Tue 22 Feb 11 10 00 Wed 23 Feb 11 10 00 Thu 24 Feb 11 10 00 Fri 25 Feb 11 10 00 Sat 26 Feb 11 10 00 Sun 27 Feb 11 10 00 Mon 28 Feb 11 10 00 Tue 01 Mar 11 10 00 Wed 02 Mar 11 10 00 Thu 03 Mar 11 10 00 Fri 04 Mar 11 10 00 Sat 05 Mar 11 10 00 Sun 06 Mar 11 10 00 Mon 07 Mar 11 10 00 Tue 08 Mar 11 10 00 Wed 09 Mar 11 10 00 Thu 10 Mar 11 10 00 Fri 11 Mar 11 10 00 Sat 12 Mar 11 10 00 Sun 13 Mar 11 10 00 Bureau Veritas Air Quality AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 gui Drl SA1 S ZNd 11 5 21 1 16 4 24 5 36 0 36 5 27 6 31 3 36 5 38 0 30 3 26 4 13 5 36 7 66 6 49 4 39 4 76 3 8 9 8 3 31 1 19 1 16 7 13 3 Z ESAT 12 5 19 5 16 0 24 0 35 5 36 7 27 8 31 8 37 9 37 9 31 4 26 7 13 3 36 0 66 0 49 7 37 5 76 5 9 2 9 0 31 8 18 8 16 1 13 1 L ESAT OLNd 17 0 23 8 19 0 34 0 42 2 43 4 29 5 36 6 43 3 45 7 36 0 30 4 15 4 44 7 75 6 60 6 50 8 13 6 13 8 43 9 30 5 33 5 16 2 Z ESAI 18 5 24 2 19 7 34 2 42 1 43 5 29 8 36 2 43 8 45 7 35 8 29 6 14 8 43 7 74 7 58 5 48 9 14 1 12 4 43 8 28 7 33 1 15 6 71002 NS 12 7 22 2 17 5 26 7 39 1 39 8 53 1 29 8 34 0 39 8 39 4 32 8 28 8 15 9 14 6 36 3 67 4 52 1 40 3 30 6 19 5 16 9 16 1 13 4 gui Drl 91102 NS 12 4 21 7 17 9 26
51. 01 Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 72 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the and PM TEOM 1405 DF VERITAS o Figure 46 Reference vs candidate SN 20014 amp SN 20116 measured component all test sites Bornheim Winter Cologne Winter M Bornheim Summer Teddington lt 18 ug m 3 Line gt 18 yg m 3 Line 5 1405DF FDMS ug m A a All Data Line wo 50 60 70 80 90 100 PM Reference ug m Figure 47 Reference vs candidate SN 20014 measured component s all test sites a SN 20014 5 1405DF FDMS ug m 40 50 60 70 80 90 Reference ug m Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 73 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the PM25 TEOM 1405 DF Figure 48 Reference vs candidate SN 20116 measured component s all test sites 4 SN20116 5 1405DF FDMS ug m 50 60 70 80 90 100 Reference ug m Figure 49 Heference vs candidate SN 20014 Teddington measured component gt a SN 20014 Teddington 5 1405DF FDMS ug m 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Reference ug m Bureau Veritas Air Quality AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Page 74 test site BUREAU VERITAS
52. 156 Analog Output 5 Cal Low Set 7 Operating Mode 107 Temperature Calibration Date 157 Analog Output 6 Cal Low Se 8 System Status 108 Pressure Calibration Date 158 Analog Output 7 Cal Low Set 9 RS232 Mode 109 Bypass Flow Calibration Date 159 Analog Output 8 Cal Low Se 12 Storage Interval 110 Analog Out Calibration Date 160 Analog Output 1 Cal Low Actua 18 Last Database Download Time 111 Anemometer Installed 161 Analog Output 2 Cal Low Actual 19 AK Set Time 115 TEOM A Air Tube Setpoint 162 Analog Output 3 Cal Low Actua 28 System Wait Time 119 TEOM B Air Tube Setpoint 163 Analog Output 4 Cal Low Actua 34 XX Hour Value 120 Analog Output 1 Value 164 Analog Output 5 Cal Low Actua 35 Mass Average Time 121 Analog Output 2 Value 165 Analog Output 6 Cal Low Actua 36 Mass Constant A 122 Analog Output 3 Value 166 Analog Output 7 Cal Low Actua 37 Mass Constant B 123 Analog Output 4 Value 67 Analog Output 8 Cal Low Actua 47 Case Temperature 124 Analog Output 5 Value 68 Analog Output 1 Cal High Se 48 Case Temperature Setpoint 125 Analog Output 6 Value 69 Analog Output 2 Cal High Se 58 Cap Temperature 126 Analog Output 7 Value 70 Analog Output 3 Cal High Se 59 Cap Temperature Setpoint 127 Analog Output 8 Value 71 Analog Output 4 Cal High Se 61 Ambient Temperature 128 Analog Output 1 Raw Value 72 Analog Output 5 Cal High Se 62 Ambient Temperature Offset 129 Analog Output 2 Raw Value 73 Analog Output 6 Cal High Se 63 Ambient Relative Humidity 130 Analog Output 3 Raw Val
53. 17 0 HH 66 7 57 1 65 4 53 6 51 7 53 7 48 6 52 4 51 3 54 1 51 8 58 0 51 7 50 3 51 5 90 4 77 6 56 8 47 4 44 5 53 3 49 4 61 5 46 9 41 1 37 0 34 7 73 8 78 4 Os m q 1ueiquy 2 6 2 9 5 1 6 5 5 8 12 5 13 2 SM ui Drl ejejoA 41 2 6 2 0 3 0 0 66 4 3 12 29 0 9 1 9 1 2 2 3 19 29 1 2 2 6 11 28 0 7 2 7 13 2 6 07 2 8 1 0 2 1 12 22 18 25 0 7 7 6 0 7 52 17 27 17 20 1 6 24 2 0 2 0 1 0 23 13 29 2 2 3 7 25 2 7 3 4 2 6 41 1 4 0 8 1 0 1 1 2 6 Page 129 S ON Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs o VERITAS yew y No ref measurement PM2 5 PM2 5 Grubbs outlier Wrong set up Wrong set up Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the PM25 TEOM 1405 DF eus Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Born
54. 250 4 37 6752006 1823 189184907 14406 26323 0 0 205 500075 265 508103 250 44346 250 4 38 amp amp 2006 18 23 15918 42597 14406 26323 0 0 285 5089975 255 5089 250 440345 250 4 39 6 52006 1823 1591842697 14406 26323 0 0 265 500075 265 508719 250 440346 250 4 40 5 1822 15918 42597 14406 26323 0 0 255 509875 255 508518 250 440345 250 4 48 0607 1920 n n Ene Een ENANAR wor 4 1405 200010605 2006 6 86 13 47 5 Peachy THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Operatine Guine TEOM 1405 DF 3 33 Section 3 Basic OPERATION User 0 The TEOM 1405 allows users additional analog input and analog and Co nne ctio ns digital output capabilities using the 25 pin USER I O connector on the back of the instrument The female 25 pin USER I O connector Figures 3 36 has connections for eight analog output four analog input and two digital output contact closure connections Figure 3 36 USER 1 0 connector Thermo Scientific offers a 25 pin male connector manufactured by Phoenix Contact that can be wited to match to the USER I O connector on the back of the instrument Figure 3 37 Figure 3 37 25 pin connector 3 34 Operatine TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 3 Basic OPERATION USER 1 0 Wire the desired analog input analog output or digital output connections Pin Assignments to the Phoenix Contact 25 pin male connector according to the man
55. 3 08 Teddington 5 5 00 1 67 1 67 5 00 0 33 0 33 Apr 2010 PM coarse 8 98 2 99 2 99 8 98 0 60 0 60 Bypass 5 00 0 33 0 75 5 00 0 67 0 50 Cologne 5 5 00 1 00 1 00 5 00 0 33 0 33 winter PMcoarse 5 00 2 40 2 40 8 98 1 20 1 20 5 5 00 0 42 0 33 5 00 1 17 1 08 5 5 00 0 33 0 33 5 00 0 33 0 67 Bornheim Sumner PM coarse 8 98 1 20 1 80 8 98 1 80 1 80 Bypass 5 00 3 25 2 92 5 00 0 25 0 08 Leak was fixed Conclusion for UK Purposes A leak of 5 08 was observed however the cause of this leak was identified and resolved As the next greatest leak detected is 3 25 it is this value that should be transferred to the MCERTS certificate This is greater than the required 1 however the leak test procedure for the 1405 DF is an internal manufacturer s procedure implemented in the instruments in order to avoid serious damage to the instrument The check on tightness must be performed using this internal procedure All of the leak tests conducted passed the manufacturer s leak test specifications and it is recommended that this performance is sufficient in order to warrant approval of the instrument subject to an explanation being provided on the MCERTS certificate Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 37 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 0 Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the and 5 TEOM 1405 DF 8 3 Maintenance Interval MCERTS for UK Particulate Mat
56. 3 5 6 5 7 4 14 2 13 2 6 2 8 4 11 6 21 6 21 8 gui Drl 91102 NS 1002 NS 9 3 17 2 8 0 11 7 2 8 5 2 6 4 13 2 4 3 6 3 6 6 9 3 9 2 13 2 5 3 9 1 4 3 10 1 6 9 13 0 45 4 56 0 0 5 2 4 3 5 8 2 2 3 8 1 3 5 9 0 2 9 8 8 5 11 6 6 8 14 4 13 9 19 6 12 2 18 3 7 0 5 8 12 5 7 3 19 5 10 4 24 0 19 9 25 3 22 6 31 2 91102 NS 17 6 10 8 12 4 4 8 13 0 6 0 9 3 13 0 9 1 9 4 12 4 56 2 2 1 7 2 6 8 8 0 8 6 14 1 11 2 14 5 19 9 17 9 10 8 12 9 18 9 23 7 24 1 33 2 jusiquy HH 82 6 87 2 84 9 93 5 82 2 80 6 79 2 84 6 81 0 77 9 77 0 82 9 93 6 83 1 81 5 72 2 72 9 77 1 79 8 81 2 84 8 88 4 80 2 79 4 78 8 74 8 82 8 94 4 81 8 Os m q 1ueiquy 5 2 3 7 0 4 0 3 2 3 3 6 SM ejejoA 14 5 6 2 8 0 8 0 8 1 5 21 18 3 3 2 0 3 5 0 3 2 0 0 0 0 9 0 3 1 2 2 0 31 0 9 47 2 1 3 2 0 8 1 0 1 4 2 9 1 2 1 8 0 4 5 6 12 5 0 2 0 7 8 0 5 4 3 0 6 4 8 1 1 3 5 0 7 1 9 3 1 1 1 3 9 1 3 2 5 4 3 1 8 4 8 1 4 1 4 2 1 0 6 3 6 0 6 3 1 135 S ON Nitrate is 2011 ion data on this date Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405 5 Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405
57. 33 1 67 9 24 2 10 2 13 6 35 5 20 1 17 0 19 8 25 2 22 9 33 6 jusiquy 12 6 13 8 13 9 17 6 10 9 10 0 11 8 16 2 13 8 12 9 11 3 14 0 16 0 HH 81 2 66 2 71 9 86 9 89 1 59 5 57 7 56 5 62 7 66 8 67 2 59 4 64 8 60 9 60 2 62 1 66 7 78 2 78 1 62 2 85 3 65 3 71 9 73 9 67 2 64 7 59 8 60 2 58 8 Os m q 1ueiquy 11 5 7 8 6 4 3 8 6 4 7 9 S W SM 0 3 2 2 2 5 4 7 1 1 1 2 0 9 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 0 1 6 1 5 1 1 1 9 1 1 2 4 3 7 2 3 2 6 2 0 2 7 2 1 1 8 3 0 2 9 1 3 1 1 3 9 ui Drl ejejoA 10 5 5 7 5 2 5 0 10 0 7 1 6 7 9 1 4 5 6 3 6 3 13 6 6 7 2 1 3 2 3 9 4 7 3 1 3 5 4 0 5 4 7 5 1 6 2 3 2 4 Page 128 S ON Nitrate is 2011 ion data on this date Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Nitrate is 2011 ion data on this date Nitrate is 2011 ion data on this date Nitrate is 2011 ion data on this date Average of 4 1405Fs VERITAS Powe
58. 4 and most other instrument screens If there are no status conditions the field at the bottom of the screen will read Normal status Figure 4 4 If there are status conditions present the field at the bottom of the screen will read Warning s a warning triangle will appear in the instrument title bar at the top of the screen Figure 4 5 In data files status codes are reported as decimal hexadecimal numbers Appendix A Figure 4 4 TEOM Data screen with Normal status message TEOM Data FEM PH MC ig his 1 H Hr Tear par Done Filte zding Frequency Haise Figure 4 5 TEOM Data screen with Warning s message and warning triangle MC lies 1 Hr Filte la zding Frequency Hise ab Seim 4 8 Operatine TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Figure 4 6 System Status screen Figure 4 7 Warnings screen THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 4 SCREENS AND SETTINGS Whenever a status warning is displayed select the System Status button to display the System Status screen Figure 4 6 The System status screen provides basic operating information and access to the list of the current active status warnings System Status System S
59. 4 821 13 20 23 Average of 4 1405Fs Teddington Tue 09 Feb 10 10 00 6 3 6 3 11 6 11 8 6 4 6 3 12 8 12 9 3 2 77 7 0 3 1 3 0 9 Average of 4 1405Fs Teddington Wed 10 Feb 10 10 00 5 8 5 6 12 0 12 4 6 4 6 6 13 8 14 5 1 1 70 1 3 7 18 0 9 Average of 4 1405Fs Teddington Thu 11 Feb 10 10 00 12 4 12 0 20 2 20 1 11 4 11 0 19 5 19 1 2 3 74 1 1 9 1 1 22 Average of 4 1405Fs Teddington Fri 12 Feb 10 10 00 6 7 6 5 12 6 12 4 7 9 7 4 13 7 13 2 3 0 765 0 8 11 1 9 Average of 4 1405Fs Teddington Sat 18 Feb 1010 00 8 8 8 8 15 1 15 4 8 7 9 3 14 3 14 7 2 4 82 4 03 0 5 1 9 Average of 4 1405Fs Teddington Sun 14 Feb 10 10 00 13 9 13 4 16 0 16 3 13 5 13 7 15 9 16 0 2 2 91 8 1 0 0 1 42 Average of 4 1405Fs Teddington Mon 15 Feb 10 10 00 12 5 12 8 16 0 15 9 12 9 12 8 16 4 16 3 3 3 89 7 1 8 01 4 5 Average of 4 1405Fs Teddington Tue 16 Feb 10 10 00 14 9 15 9 18 2 18 5 14 8 14 6 18 3 17 9 3 7 946 29 0 1 3 0 Average of 4 1405Fs Teddington Wed 17 Feb 10 10 00 44 8 45 2 52 2 52 1 38 7 40 7 47 9 50 1 3 4 78 8 0 0 03 64 Average of 4 1405Fs Teddington Thu 18 Feb 10 10 00 13 1 12 3 14 8 14 8 14 1 13 9 16 3 16 0 3 7 926 26 07 44 Average of 4 1405Fs Teddington Fri 19 Feb 10 10 00 18 3 18 5 21 7 21 7 17 7 11 4 20 3 14 8 0 8 875 1 0 0 2 43 Average of 4 1405Fs Teddington Sat 20 Feb 10 10 00 16 5 16 6 19 3 19 5 17 1 17 4 20 2 20 8 1 7 87 9 0 1 02 47 Average of 4 1405Fs Teddington Sun 21 Feb 10 10 00 7 4 7 3 10 2 10 2 9 0 8 5 11 3 11 0 53 922 41 05 3 2 Average of 4 1405Fs Teddington Mon 22 Feb 10 10 00
60. 5 1 7 1 1 1 6 0 9 1 5 0 8 0 6 1 6 1 4 2 5 1 0 1 3 1 0 0 6 1 4 0 6 0 5 1 1 0 8 0 9 1 2 1 0 Page 131 SOJON Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Nitrate is 2011 ion data on this date Nitrate is 2011 ion data on this date Nitrate is 2011 ion data on this date Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs o VERITAS yew y Inlet gt Zero filter Zero filter Zero filter Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the PM25 TEOM 1405 DF eus Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer eun pue
61. 5 62 5 50 Operatine Guine TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES 9 The Completing the Flow Audit Wizard screen will display Figure 5 61 Remove the flow meter and flow adapter s and install the virtual impactor inlet tube and inlet Ensure all lines including the bypass are reconnected Select the Finish button to exit the wizard and return to the Verification amp Calibration screen or select the lt Back button to move backward one step in the procedure Figure 5 61 Finish screen with flow audit Completing the Flow Audit results Wizard To complete the sudit remove the Flow Audit Device 5 Bow percent error 0 33 Pil Coarse Bow percent enor 0 80 Bypass flow percent error 0 08 The instrument will be putin Run mote when this wizard is finished close thig wizard prese Finish x Back Finish Figure 5 62 Finish screen with a failed audit Completing the Flow Audit Wizard The Flee Audit Wizard was unsuccessiul because one or more of the threes drifted by mare than 10 percent since the Inst calibration Please consult the service manual ter traublesthooteg Instructians To compiete the audit remove the Flow Audit Device 2 5 percent error Bow percent error 1287 Bypass percent orror JEE this wizard prese Finish THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Operatinc TEOM 1405 DF 5 5
62. 9 9 10 3 16 6 16 5 10 3 10 3 16 0 16 0 3 1 88 2 1 3 1 4 2 0 Average of 4 1405Fs Teddington Tue 23 Feb 10 10 00 14 5 14 4 22 2 22 3 13 4 13 1 20 5 20 3 48 922 36 08 3 4 Average of 4 1405Fs Teddington Wed 24 Feb 10 10 00 9 2 91 17 8 17 7 9 0 8 6 17 0 16 8 8 4 91 6 7 1 05 3 0 Average of 4 1405Fs Teddington Thu 25 Feb 10 10 00 5 9 48 92 9 4 71 6 7 11 1 107 7 7 881 59 10 27 Average of 4 1405Fs Teddington Fri 26 Feb 10 10 00 44 4 3 11 2 11 4 5 1 5 4 12 8 129 64 77 0 2 7 0 7 1 0 Average of 4 1405Fs Teddington Sat 27 Feb 10 10 00 11 8 11 7 18 9 19 2 12 8 11 9 19 4 18 4 7 8 88 4 60 0 7 3 6 Average of 4 1405Fs Teddington Sun 28 Feb 10 10 00 5 0 5 2 96 9 6 6 6 8 0 10 5 11 7 3 4 88 5 17 0 5 0 7 Average of 4 1405Fs Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 123 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the PM25 TEOM 1405 DF eus Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington eui pue ojeq uelis Mon 01 Mar 10 10 00 Tue 02 Mar 10 10 00 Wed 03 Mar 10 10 00 Thu 04 Mar 10 10 00 Tue 27 Apr 10 10 00 Wed 28 Apr 10 10 00 Thu 29 Apr 10 10 00 Fri 30 Apr 10 10 00 Sat 01 May 10 10 00 Sun 02 May 10 10 00 Mon 03 May 10 10 00 Tue 04 M
63. 91102 NS 15 7 20 0 21 8 16 6 19 1 17 8 14 4 18 6 49 6 48 5 52 3 18 0 21 4 12 7 19 2 26 8 29 7 25 3 10 1 24 4 19 4 41 7 54 2 36 3 15 4 10 5 15 1 duie 1ueiquiy 9e HH 87 2 88 3 97 2 89 9 94 3 91 1 91 1 79 3 90 5 86 0 85 9 94 8 97 0 90 0 96 3 93 9 97 8 83 7 92 1 85 2 95 0 87 0 91 1 80 0 83 2 85 5 86 4 76 9 84 4 25 m q 1ueiquy 3 2 4 1 0 6 3 1 2 5 2 9 2 3 0 0 0 6 0 7 0 7 2 1 4 1 5 2 3 2 5 9 3 8 1 8 3 8 6 9 2 9 3 0 0 0 2 5 2 2 3 4 2 3 3 2 SM ejejoA 0 1 2 0 0 3 3 2 0 0 8 5 07 2 6 07 2 8 0 5 2 9 08 3 7 18 2 0 0 7 2 6 0 3 7 5 1 5 7 6 0 1 80 01 3 9 1 8 5 0 0 4 2 3 01 1 9 0 1 3 8 1 4 9 5 02 52 11 6 2 0 5 2 9 0 22 52 01 4 1 0 9 3 7 0 5 5 8 0 3 6 7 0 5 5 0 0 9 1 9 0 22 2 5 Page 122 SOJON Average of 4 1405 5 Average of 4 1405 5 Average of Teddington and Bloomsbury 8500s Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405 5 Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405 5 Average of 4 1405 5 Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of Teddington and Bloomsbury 8500s Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405 5 Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 140
64. Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs o VERITAS yew y Audits SN 20014 Leak repair PM10 Grubbs outlier Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the PM25 TEOM 1405 DF eus Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter eu pue ojeq uelis Sat 22 Oct 11 07 00 Sun 23 Oct 11 07 00 Mon 24 Oct 11 07 00 Tue 25 Oct 11 07 00 Wed 26 Oct 11 07 00 Thu 27 Oct 11 07 00 Fri 28 Oct 11 07 00 Sat 29 Oct 11 07 00 Sun 30 Oct 11 07 00 Mon 31 Oct 11 07 00 Tue 01 Nov 11 07 00 Wed 02 Nov 11 07 00 Thu 03 Nov 11 07 00 Fri 04 Nov 11 07 00 Sat 05 Nov 11 07 00 Sun 06 Nov 11 07 00 Mon 07 Nov 11 07 0
65. BUREAU UK Report on the Equivalence of the 5 TEOM 1405 DF Table 32 Wind Speed Ambient Temperature Ambient Dew Point and Semi Volatile calculations for the 5 TEOM 1405 DF ae Wie Speed Semi Volatile id Higher 1 Higher r Hoher r right Bornheim Winter 5 m urban Cologne Winter 5 m urban Bornheim Summer 5 m urban Teddington 2 5 m urban Table 33 Wind Speed Ambient Temperature Ambient Dew Point and Semi Volatile calculations for the TEOM 1405 DF TEES Wie Speed Semi Volatile i Higher 1 Higher Higher Higher Bornheim Winter 5 m urban Cologne Winter 5 m urban Bornheim Summer 5 m urban Teddington 2 5 m urban Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 96 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific BUREAU UK Report on the Equivalence of the and PM25 TEOM 1405 DF 15 4 Conclusions The geometric mean calculations for each of the three test sites are met Further in all cases at least one site meets the lower threshold and at least one site meets the higher threshold for each of Wind Speed Ambient Temperature Ambient Dew Point and Semi Volatiles As such the pollution climate criteria are fully met for the TEOM 1405 DF for both PM and 5 This information should be referenced on the MCERTS Certificate but there is no requirement to give any detailed information as to the specific findings of the Pollution Climate calculations Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 97 AGGX5
66. BV DH 2835 Schedule of Accreditation issued by United Kingdom Accreditation Service 21 47 High Street Feltham Middlesex TW13 4UN UK NPL Management Ltd Issue No 047 Issue date 22 October 2012 Chemical Tests cont d 0 0001 to 200 m m ppm viv for some individual species Physical Tests 0 0001 to 200 ml m ppm wiv for some individual species with opinions and interpretations based on NIST research library 25 ug to 7 mg equivalent to 1 pg m for a 1 m hour sampler to 120 pg m for a 2 3 m hour sampler C2 to C10 hydrocarbons Nitrogen dioxide Nitrogen monoxide Sulphur dioxide Volatile organic compounds Standard specifications Equipment Techniques used Documented in house method based on MDHS 60 and 72 and ISO standard TC 146 SC2 N142 using Gas Chromatography with a FID end point 527 Documented in house method based on BS EN ISO 16017 182 UK HSE MDHS 63 72 amp 80 using an automated thermal desorber gas chromatogram with a mass spectrometer and optional simultaneous flame ionisation detector ATD GC MS FID QPAS B 544 in accordance with BS EN 15852 2010 Documented in house method based on BS EN 14907 2005 Documented in house methods 522 523 525 526 527 Page 9 of 16 Page 117 BUT VY gt gt 1828 BUREAU BUT VE D gt 182 Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the and PM25
67. DF VERITAS io Figure 64 Reference vs candidate SN 20014 measured component test site Cologne Winter 4 SN 20014 Cologne Winter 1405DF FDMS m m co BR o 50 60 70 80 90 100 Reference ug m Figure 65 Reference vs candidate SN 20116 measured component test site Cologne Winter 4 SN 20116 Cologne Winter PM 1405DF FDMS ug m 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 PM Reference ug m Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 82 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the and PM TEOM 1405 DF gusta VERITAS 66 Reference vs candidate SN 20014 measured component test site Bornheim Summer 4 SN20014 Bornheim Summer PM 1405DF FDMS ug m 50 60 70 80 90 100 Reference ug m Figure 67 Reference vs candidate SN 20116 measured component test site Bornheim Summer a SN20116 Bornheim Summer PM 1405F ug m 50 60 70 80 90 100 Reference ug m Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 83 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the and PM TEOM 1405 DF ZUREA VERITAS le Figure 68 Reference vs candidate SN 20014 measured component PM o test site Bornheim Winter a SN 20014 Bornheim Winter
68. LEN ZW Fi H OU UN ar The irstramentwiE be pul in Aun mode whan this witerd ie linighed Note If the leak check failed with the FDMS valve in either the base reference or both positions the complete leak check wizard screen will appear and indicate in which valve position the leak check failed A Figure 3 11 Leak Check Wizard finish screen with fail message Complete Leak Check Wizard The Leak check was unsuccesstul Aetermnoe tailed Replace ihe TED rifier s in the mass transducer neve pax IN 0 15 J OU o m m 1 um 1 The insirament wil be pul in Aun mede when this wirsrd ie finished Home This prast 15 Install new TEOM filter in the mass transducer Section 5 3 10 Operatine TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 3 Basic OPERATION Sto ring D ata The unit stores only those variables selected by the user If instrument variables are not set up to be logged THEY WILL NOT BE SAVED To select data storage variables 1 Select the Settings menu button to display the Settings screen Figure 3 12 Figure 3 12 Settings screen Dem TEOM 1405 DF Settings System Status Iris Conditions Service a Normal siae si 15 2 When in the Settings screen select the Data Storage button
69. Mode select the Instrument Control button in the Service screen page 4 32 In the Instrument Control screen page 4 34 press the Setup button When the unit is in the Setup Mode the user can change all of the system s parameters To manually leave the Setup Mode and start data collection when in the Instrument Control screen select the Run button 4 6 Operatine TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 4 SCREENS AND SETTINGS Stop All Mode Certain situations may arise in which the user may want to turn off all temperatures and flows in the instrument To enter the Stop All Mode select the Instrument Control button in the Service screen page 4 32 In the Instrument Control screen select the Stop button page 4 34 When the unit is in this operating mode it suspends operation of the instrument In this mode data collection ceases flow rates in the system drop to zero and the output to the temperature circuits is turned off Also the monitor will reset its system variables to the original values that were set by the user However this does not set the unit to its default parameters The instrument will remain in the Stop All Mode until you select the Run button in the Instrument Control screen Operatine Guine TEOM 1405 DF 4 7 Section 4 SCREENS AND SETTINGS System Status The current status condition is located in the status bar at the bottom of S creen the TEOM Data screen Figure 4
70. Next gt button The Select Location screen will display Use the Browse button to select a location for the data file downloaded by the software Select the Next gt button The Download Type screen will display Select automatic downloads Select the Next gt button Operatine Guipe TEOM 1405 DF 3 27 Section 3 Basic OPERATION 7 The Download Schedule screen will display Figure 3 30 Select a starting date and time and a download frequency daily weekly hourly Select the Next gt button Figure 3 30 Download Setup Wizard E gt Download Setup Wizard Download Schedule Setup Schedule for Automated Downloads Frequency Starting 11 16 2006 10 42 AM Once a day Once a week Every i2 hour s 8 The Completing the Download Setup Wizard screen will display Select the Finish button 3 28 Operatine TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 3 Basic OPERATION Performing To download data Data Download Figure 3 31 ePort Main screen irent 5 2 120567050 ab 120567080 wb 1412200090605 1502200120605 wb 1412200130605 115A S065 THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Ensure that the PC and the instrument ate connected to the same network using the Ethernet connection on the back of the instrument Refer to the Connecting to the TEOM 1405 DF Unit section for information on connecting the instrument to a network Use the ePo
71. Service screen Section 4 select the Instrument Control button to display the Instrument Control screen Figure 2 19 2 Select the Reboot button TEOM 1405 DF instru merit Gerrtne Ea fy states ERE Lear THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC 2 SETUP AND INSTALLATION Using the Thermo Fisher Scientific offers an outdoor shelter for the 1405 unit The Outdoor Shelter shelter is fully climate controlled and includes space for the 1405 unit pump and accessories such as a data logger or additional monitoring devices It is available in both 120V and 240V version Figure 2 20 1405 unit in the outdoor enclosure a OoOo I D _ IL m THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Operatinc TEOM 1405 DF 2 19 Section 2 SETUP AND INSTALLATION To install the 1405 unit an outdoor shelter 1 Before placing the 1405 unit or pump into the enclosure install a 3 8 inch elbow fitting provided with the outdoor enclosure into the quick connect fitting inside the pump compartment where the pump tubing goes through the bulkhead into the enclosure Install the other 3 8 inch elbows into the pump connection on the back of the 1405 unit and into the connection on the pump Figures 2 21 2 22 and 2 23 Figure 2 21 Enclosure Pump compartment bulkhead connection i Pump connections Figure 2 22 left
72. System screen 4 24 Operatine TEOM 1405 DF of the unit TEOM 1405 DF CECIEMTIFIC Setlings System ELSE tit omm ERE ES ED Slopped states mb AORTAE 1207 When in the System screen Set Time Select the Set Time button to enter the current time and date e Password Protection Select the Password Protection button to initiate High Lock or Low Lock mode In Low Lock mode the user can view all instrument screens and can change the operating mode to perform filter changes High Lock mode means the user cannot view any screens other than the TEOM Data screen The user can also set the password using this button Network Configuration Select the Network Configuration button to determine whether the unit s Internet Protocol IP address will be selected automatically or entered manually If the user wishes to specify an IP address the user must enter both the correct IP address and the Subnet mask for the system Display Select the Display button to choose the preferred viewing mode of the instrument screen white background with black text or black background with white text THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 4 SCREENS AND SETTINGS Decimal Symbol Select the Decimal Symbol button to choose whether to separate decimal numbers with a period 4 or a comma The unit must be restarted for this change to take effect Date Format Se
73. TEOM 1405 DF unit to another but generally ranges between 150 and 400 Hz This value cannot be changed by the user Noise This field contains the mass transducer s performance This value should be less than 0 10 after the system has been in Operating Mode 4 for at least 30 minutes This value cannot be changed by the user Operatine TEOM 1405 DF 4 3 Section 4 SCREENS AND SETTINGS 4 4 Operatine TEOM 1405 DF Filter loading This field contains the filter loading percentage Section 5 It indicates the portion of the TEOM filter s total capacity that has been used The instrument will always show a nonzero value even if no filter is mounted in the mass transducer New filters generally exhibit filter loading percentages of 15 to 30 at a flow rate of 3 1 min and less at lower flow rates TEOM filter cartridges must be exchanged before this value reaches 100 to ensure the validity of the data generated by the instrument At some point above 100 the main flow drops below its set point If the filter loading percentage is higher than 30 when a new TEOM filter is placed on the mass transducer or if the lifetime of consecutive TEOM filter cartridges becomes noticeably shorter inspect the in line filters for the PM 2 5 and coarse flow lines Section 5 and replace them if necessaty In addition to the information indicated above the instrument may be configured to calculate equivalent MC values for th
74. TEOM 1405 DF Schedule of Accreditation issued by United Kingdom Accreditation Service 21 47 High Street Feltham Middlesex TW13 4UN UK NPL Management Ltd Issue No 058 Issue date 28 November 2012 Hampton Road Contact Customer Helpline Teddington Tel 44 0 20 8943 7070 Middlesex Fax 44 0 20 8943 6184 TW11 OLW E Mail measurement_services npl co uk Accredited to ISO IEC 17025 2005 Calibration performed by the Organisation at the locations specified below Locations covered by the organisation and their relevant activities Laboratory locations Address Local contact National Physical Laboratory Mr Tahir Maqba Customer Hampton Road Services Manager Teddington Middlesex Tel 44 0 20 8943 6798 TW11 OLW Fax 44 0 20 8943 6184 Email tahir maqba npl co uk Local contact Mr G Hayman Tel 44 0 20 8943 7172 Email gary_hayman npl co uk Site activities performed away from the locations listed above Customers sites or premises The customers site or premises must be suitable for the nature of the particular calibrations undertaken and will be the subject of i contract review arrangements between the laboratory and the Chemical Environmental air quality monitoring customer instruments Assessment Manager WC Page 1 of 52 Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 118 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the PM and 5 TEOM 1405 DF
75. The test was carried out at four different sites during field test Different seasons and varying concentrations for and 5 were taken into consideration Of the complete data set at least 20 of the concentration values determined with the reference method shall be greater than the upper assessment threshold according to 2008 50 EC For PM the upper threshold is at 17 g m For PMjothe upper assessment threshold is at 28 ug m8 Of the complete data set 4 test sites for 0 336 valid data pairs for SN 20014 338 valid data pairs for SN 20116 for 5 338 valid data pairs for SN 20014 341 valid data pairs for SN 20116 in total 30 2 96 of the measured values are above the upper assessment threshold of 17 for and in total 25 3 96 of the measured values are above the upper assessment threshold of 28 ug m for 0 The measured concentrations were referred to ambient conditions Evaluation The uncertainty between the candidates uy must be lt 2 5 g m8 An uncertainty of more than 2 5 ug m between the two candidates is an indication that the performance of one or both systems is not sufficient and the equivalence cannot be declared The uncertainty is determined for All test sites respectively comparisons together complete data set 1 data set with measured values gt 18 ygg m for PMsos Basis averages reference measurement 1 data set with measured values gt 30 pg m for Basis avera
76. Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the and 5 TEOM 1405 DF VERITAS io Figure 50 Reference vs candidate SN 20116 measured component test site Teddington a SN 20116 Teddington 1405DF FDMS ug m 40 50 60 70 80 90 Reference ug m Figure 51 Reference vs candidate SN 20014 measured component PM s Cologne Winter a SN 20014 Cologne Winter Pg 1405DF FDMS ug m 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 Reference ug m Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 75 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the and PM TEOM 1405 DF VERITAS io Figure 52 Reference vs candidate SN 20116 measured component Cologne Winter 4 SN20116 Cologne Winter 1405DF FDMS ug m 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Reference ug m Figure 53 Reference vs candidate SN 20014 measured component 5 Bornheim Summer PM 5 14050 FDMS ug m 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Reference ug m Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 76 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the and 5 TEOM 1405 DF VERITAS 54 Reference vs candidate SN 20116 measured component Bornheim Summer 4 SN20116 Bornheim Summer 5 1405D
77. To calibrate the fine course or bypass flow 1 In the TEOM Data screen select the Service button to display the Service screen then select the Calibration button to display the Calibration screen Figure 5 49 2 Select the Flow Calibration button to start the Flow Calibration Wizard Figure 5 64 Select the Next gt button to begin the procedure Figure 5 64 Welcome to the Flow Calibration Wizard screen Welcome to the Flow Calibration Wizard This wizard helps you perform flow calibration on the TEOM Ambient Particulate Monitor The instrumen will be put Setup mode tor calibration To continue press Next Next Cancel 3 The Select a Flow Calibration Device screen will display Select a flow audit device Select Direct Flow Device to audit the flow using a direct flow measuring device reading l min adjusted for temperature and pressure such as the Streamline Pro Select FTS to audit the flow using the FTS system FTS users will enter the device calibration constant and the change in pressure from the FTS Select the Next gt button 4 The Select Flow to Calibrate screen will display Select the Calibrate PM 2 5 Flow Calibrate PM Coarse Flow or Calibrate Bypass Flow button to calibrate the selected flow Select the Next gt button THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Operatinc TEOM 1405 DF 5 53 Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES 5 The wizard will p
78. Winter 77 Figure 56 Reference vs candidate SN 20116 measured component PM25 Bornheim Winter 78 Bureau Veritas Air Quality AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Page 9 BUREAU VERITAS Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the PM25 TEOM 1405 DF Figure 57 Figure 58 Figure 59 sites Figure 60 Figure 61 Figure 62 Figure 63 Figure 64 Winter Figure 65 Winter Figure 66 Summer Figure 67 Summer Figure 68 Winter Figure 69 Winter Figure 70 Figure 71 Figure 72 Figure 73 Figure 74 Reference vs Reference vs Reference vs Reference vs Reference vs Reference vs Reference vs Reference vs candidate SN 20014 measured component values gt 18 ug m 78 candidate SN 20116 measured component PM 5 values gt 18 ug m 79 candidate SN 20014 amp SN 20116 measured component 10 all test TERNI 79 candidate SN 20014 measured component all test sites 80 candidate SN 20116 measured component PMi all test sites 80 candidate SN 20014 measured component PMi test site Teddington A 81 candidate SN 20116 measured component PM test site Teddington 81 candidate SN 20014 measured component test s
79. amplitude A precision electronic counter measures the oscillation frequency with a 10 second sampling period The tapered element is in essence a hollow cantilever beam with an associated spring rate and mass As in any spring mass system if additional mass is added the frequency of the oscillation decreases This can be seen by observing the frequency on the display of the device and operating the monitor both with and without a filter in place Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 17 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the and 5 TEOM 1405 DF In a spring mass system the frequency is obedient to the following equation K M With F Frequency K Spring rate M Mass K and M are consistent units The relation between mass and frequency change can me expressed as 1 1 follows with dm Mass change Ko Spring constant incl of the mass conversion fo Initial frequency Hz f End frequency Hz After transposing the equation it can be solved for the spring constant Ko dm 80 K Therefore calibration constant of the device can be determined easily by measuring the frequencies with and without known mass e g with a pre weighed TEOM Filter from the K calibration kit 1 2 Functionality of the Measuring System The following text is copied with minor alterations from Section 3 2 of the TUV Rheinl
80. and flow tested by NPL and TUV Rheinland throughout the four field campaigns Sections 8 1 and 8 2 The Maintenance Interval is discussed herein Section 8 3 Data Capture has been calculated in accordance with MCERTS for UK Particulate Matter Section 11 Calculations of the suitability of the data relative to the pollution climate within the UK were undertaken by BV This report sets out the findings of the field campaigns laboratory testing and pollution climate calculations The report is structured to include the 17 numbered sections required in Section 6 of MCERTS for UK Particulate Matter This combined report is fully compatible with all the requirements of MCERTS for UK Particulate Matter including its reporting structure It will be used to provide the MCERTS Certification Body and its certification committee with the evidence required to assess whether all the testing carried out is compliant with all the requirements of MCERTS for UK Particulate Matter Sections of the report have been copied with permission from the TEOM 1405 DF TUV Rheinland Report Where this text is used it is clearly marked and placed within a light blue text box within this report Within these Sections text relating to German Legislation has been replaced with text relating to UK legislation some figures that were in German have been translated in to English and some minor changes have been made for grammar Sections have been added to discuss t
81. and pressure in the equation above THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section2 Setup and Installation This section describes the setup and installation of the TEOM 1405 DF including the pump flow splitter tripod virtual impactor sample tube and sample inlet After you have set up the system you must perform a leak check on the monitor Section 3 and install a TEOM filter Section 5 in the mass transducer before starting a sample run If you want to install the monitor in an outdoor location consult Thermo Fisher Scientific for specific site recommendations Figure 2 1 1405 DF Inlet Virtual impactor Flow splitter Tripod FDMS tower TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Operatine TEOM 1405 DF 2 1 Section 2 SETUP AND INSTALLATION Installation Considerations 2 2 Operatine TEOM 1405 DF The 1405 DF may be located in any convenient indoor location which is maintained between 8 and 25 C 46 to 77 F The user must run two sampling tubes through the roof of the monitoring site refer to the inlet installation instructions later in this section The entrance to the sample inlet must be 1 8 to 2 1 m 70 to 82 inches above the roof based on U S EPA requirements Refer to local regulations for the actual inlet height requirements Although the TEOM monitor is inherently rugged it is a precision instrument The user will obtain the best operating conditions
82. bo enter the current actual ambient bemperabure of pressure SixeaSng Hana a ATHE 131 36 3 Determine the current temperature C at the ambient temperature sensor using an external thermometer C 5 9 x F 32 If the measured value is within 2 C of the temperature displayed in the Ambient Temperature field of the button no further action is necessary Select the lt Back button to return to the Calibration creen If the value is not within 2 C of the temperature displayed in the Ambient Temperature field of the button select the Ambient Temperature button A keypad will display Enter the actual temperature as measured by the external thermometer and press the Enter button The Ambient Temperature Calibration screen will display with the new entered value Select the lt Back button to return to the Calibration screen THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES Calibrating the Perform the ambient air temperature calibration pressure calibration and leak check Section 3 before executing the flow calibration procedure Ambient Pressure Figure 5 54 Ambient Calibration screen THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC To calibrate the ambient pressure ils In the TEOM Data screen select the Service button to display the Service screen then select the Calibration button to display the Calibration screen Figure 5 49 Select
83. coiled tubing connected to the water trap filter is mounted vertically so condensed water will drip into the water trap filter Figure 2 14 Bypass tubing and sample tubes installed Sample tube extension coarse channel Bypass connection Flow splitter extension tube PM 2 5 channel 2 14 Operatine TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC 2 SETUP AND INSTALLATION 12 Locate the ambient temperature and humidity sensor Connect the sensor to the flow splitter using the U bolt provided with the system Figure 2 15 13 Attach the sensor cable to the sensor and run the sensor cable to the instrument through an opening in the roof or through a window Attach the sensor to the sensor connection on the back of the TEOM 1405 DF unit Figure 2 16 14 Fasten the tripod feet to the roof The length and type of fasteners depends on the type of roof surface The tripod feet also may be attached to a pallet or 3 4 marine plywood with the pallet or plywood secured by concrete blocks or sand bags Figure 2 15 Temperature humidity sensor installed on flow splitter Flow splitter Temperature humidity sensor U bolt Figure 2 16 Temperature humidity sensor connection of the back of the TEOM 1405 DF unit Temperature humidity cable connection THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Operatinc TEOM 1405 DF 2 15 Section 2 SETUP AND INSTALLATION Applying Power TEOM 1405 DF unit ac
84. each candidate device prior to and after each change of location with a mass flow meter which could be connected to the air inlet of the systems via a hose assembly The measuring devices have been installed in the field test in such a way that only the sampling inlets and the flow splitter are located above the roof of the measurement cabinet The central units of both candidates were installed inside the climate controlled measurement cabinet On each day that a reference method filters was either installed or removed the candidate instruments were manually checked by observing if there were any warning messages displayed on the instrument The data were downloaded approximately twice a week and were processed by BV UK Sites and TUV Rheinland German Sites Time series of the data parameters were plotted and any anomalies were flagged for further discussion with the manufacturer It was agreed between T V Rheinland and BV not to discard any measured value for the candidates unless the implausibility is caused due to technical reasons In general only small sections of data were deleted for short periods after a filter change audit or maintenance when it was clear from the trends in the mass base and reference data that the instrument had not fully stabilised 24 hour averages were calculated only for days where there was greater than 90 96 data capture The sampling inlets of the candidates were cleaned approximately every 4 week
85. filter exchange tool desiccant and a humidity indicator and the pre filter with tubing that was supplied with the unit Note Refill kits for the mass calibration verification kit are available from Thermo Scientific 59 002019 THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES To confirm the system s K calibration T Figure 5 80 Welcome to KO Verification Wizard screen THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Confirm that the PM 2 5 and PM Coatse KO numbers entered into the instrument and the PM 2 5 and PM Coarse KO numbers on the plates on the mass transducer ate the same The KO numbers entered into the unit can be found in the Audit screen Figure 5 52 Ensure the instrument is at the normal operating temperature and condition Ensure that the pre weighed filter in the kit matches the humidity conditions for the test as shown on the card provided with the kit Note If the filter does not match the conditions listed on the humidity indicator follow the instructions provided with the kit to dry the filter to an acceptable level In the TEOM Data screen select the Service button to display the Service screen then select the Calibration button to display the Calibration screen Figure 5 49 Select the Mass Transducer KO Verification button to start the KO Verification Wizard Figure 5 80 Select the Next gt button to begin the procedure Welcome to the Verification Wizard Thi
86. finished the results of ihe calibration will be applied close this wizard press Finish Operatinc TEOM 1405 DF 5 63 Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES Verifying the Calibration Constant 5 64 Operatine Guine TEOM 1405 DF The calibration of the mass transducer in the TEOM 1405 DF Monitor is determined by the mass transducer s physical mechanical properties Under normal circumstances the calibration does not change materially over the life of the instrument Contact Thermo Scientific if the results of the verification procedure fails You can locate the original calibration constant on the Instrument Checkout Record or the Final Test Record documents that are shipped from the factory with the instrument Before the TEOM 1405 DF is shipped to the customer it is calibrated with new pre weighed TEOM filters installed in its mass transducer as a calibration weight Because the mass of the filter cartridge with particulate matter differs from the mass of a new filter cartridge by only a small fraction calibrating the system with a calibration mass equivalent to the filter mass allows all measurements to be made at essentially the same operating point as the original calibration Refer to Section 1 for a detailed explanation of how the calibration constant K is derived To audit verify the KO numbers requires a mass calibration verification kit 59 002107 which includes a pre weighed filter a
87. flow meter into the number pad and select the Enter button The newly entered flow rate will display in the TEOM flow rate button Select the Next gt button THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES 9 After the third flow value has been entered the Select Flow to Calibrate screen will display again The flow channel that was just calibrated will be grayed out on the screen to show it was calibrated during this calibration session If you want to calibrate another flow channel select another channel and follow steps 4 9 and the wizard to complete additional flow channels Otherwise ensure that no flow channel buttons are selected and select the Next gt button 10 The Completing the Flow Calibration Wizard screen will display Figure 5 69 Remove the flow meter and flow adapter s and install the virtual impactor inlet tube and inlet Ensure all lines including the bypass ate reconnected Select the Finish button to exit the wizard and return to the Calibration screen or select the lt Back button to move backward one step in the procedure Note If you want to audit the total flow rate following the calibration procedure see Figure 5 63 Figure 5 69 Completing the Flow Completing the Flow Calibration Wizard screen Calibration Wizard To complete the calibration remove the Flew Audit Derice The will bc Putin Run mede when this wizard is finished
88. flow button and enter the reading from the flow device Select the Next gt button 7 The Flow Audit Results screen will display the difference between the flow rate of the instrument and the flow rate on the measurement device Figure 5 60 If the difference is less than 10 percent you may adjust the flow rate to reflect the value on the audit device Select the Yes button to adjust the flow based on the results of the flow audit Select the No button to leave the original flow settings in place Select the Next gt button to return to the Select Flow screen and audit another flow channel __ Figure 5 60 Audit Results Flow Audit Results screen Your flow has deifbed 333 percent sirce your asi calibration Previous flow factor 1 0000 Current Tys adjustment 1 0323 Would yeu like t adjust the flow based on ihis sudit 8 The Select Flow to Audit screen will display again The flow channel that was just audited will be grayed out on the screen to show it was audited during this session If you want to audit another flow channel select another channel and follow steps 3 8 and the wizard to complete additional flow channels Otherwise ensure that no flow channel buttons are selected and select the Next gt button Note If the difference is more than 10 percent the flow will fail the audit and the unit requires a leak check flow calibration Figure
89. frequencies are stable the system will display the Completing the TEOM Filter Replacement Wizard screen Figure 5 13 Select the Finish gt button Figure 5 13 Finish screen with successfully completed message Completing the Filter Replacement Wizard You have sucesstulhy completed ihe Filter Replacement Wizard You should replace the 47 mm i and clean the zample inlet ag 1 described in the TEOM Series 1405 Operating Guide clage this wizard press Finish THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Operatinc TEOM 1405 DF 5 11 Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES Note If the system still cannot detect a stable frequency for one or both of the filters it will display a filter could be damaged message and prompt for replacement of one or both of the filters Figure 5 14 If the system fails to establish the frequency again the filter change procedure will fail completely and recommend appropriate service Figure 5 15 A Figure 5 14 Try Another Filter message Try Another Filter The TEOM filter could be damaged Both TEOM illters are still loose This could be because they are damaged Please replace the filters with new Figure 5 15 Fail service message Completing the TEOM Filter Replacement Wizard The TEOM Fiter Replacement Wizard has completed ursucaesstuly Please reference the TEOM Series 1405 1 Serice Manual ter troubleshooting instruc
90. gt Cancel 3 The Remove Filter Cassettes screen will display Open the two compartment doors on the side of the unit and remove both 47 mm filter cassettes and filters Refer to the Replacing the 47 mm Filters section earlier in this chapter for more information on removing the filter cassettes Select the Next gt button 5 30 Operatine Guine TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES 4 The Open Unit screen will display Remove the front cover from the unit tower and locate the two cooler assemblies the switching valve and the dryer vacuum connection Figure 5 38 Figure 5 38 Interior of 1405 tower Cooler assembly Switching valve Cooler assembly 5 Remove the tubing from both the top and bottom quick connect fittings on each of the cooler assemblies Figure 5 38 Select the Next gt button THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Operatinc TEOM 1405 DF 5 31 Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES 6 The Disconnect Vacuum Line screen will display Remove the main line from the bottom of the T connection of the dryer vacuum line Figures 5 39 and 5 40 Select the Next gt button Figure 5 39 Main dryer vacuum line T fitting Main dryer vacuum line Figure 5 40 Main dryer vacuum line removed from T fitting 5 32 Operatine Guine TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES 7 The Con
91. in the maintenance interval the change of the TEOM filter the 47 mm filter approximately every 4 weeks and the regular check of the flow rates respectively of the tightness can lead to outages of more than 2 hours per device especially when all is done on one day The affected daily averages in this case have been rejected Assessment The availability was 98 2 for SN 20014 99 1 for SN 20116 without outages due to test conditions or 93 1 for SN 20014 and 94 0 for SN 20116 including outages due to test conditions Detailed representation of the test results Table 18 and Table 19 show a compilation of the operation maintenance and malfunction times Table 18 Determination of availability without test related outages Table 19 Determination of availability including test related outages Device 1 SN 20014 Device 2 SN 20116 Operating time Outage time Maintenance Actual operating time Availability Conclusion for UK Purposes As discussed in Section 2 as all of the field tests were conducted before the publication of MCERTS for UK Particulate Matter 31 July 2012 it is not necessary to assess this criteria for the TEOM 1405 DF However in the interest of completeness this information should be included on the MCERTS certificate Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 56 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific a UK Report on the Equivalence of the PM and 5 TEOM 1405 DF 12 Field T
92. inlet Original style p n 57 000596 0001 Figure 3 Measuring device TEOM 1405 DF Ambient Particulate Monitor 2 system from left in measuring station Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 20 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the 5 TEOM 1405 DF Table 4 Instrument modifications after field test site Teddington Component Configuration C Configuration D Reason Assessment Mass Transducer Hinge Belville washer spring with machined hinge blocks Coil compression spring Simplification of the manufacturing No influence on the instrument performance Mass Transducer Latch High force screw latch Consistent force hook latch Simplification of the operability No influence on the instrument performance Mass Transducer Shipping Bracket Not available Removable plate couples mass transducer to enclosure For the protection of the device during transport No influence on the instrument performance Air Tube Tower top interface Rubber isolators between bulkhead fitting and cover Direct connection using bulkhead fitting Simplification of the manufacturing No influence on the instrument performance Diverter valve shipping bracket Not available Bracket coupling valve to tower For the protection of the device during transport No influence on the instrument performance
93. inlet tube on top of the virtual impactor Install the inlet Figure 2 31 Figure 2 31 Outdoor enclosure with inlet installed Inlet Sample inlet tube Note Drain the water trap as needed Note Thermo Scientific strongly recommends that you use the vacuum pump provided with the unit If you choose to install a different pump it must be oil free and able to maintain a 21 Hg vacuum at a flow of 16 67 l min 2 26 Operatine TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section3 Basic Operation This section describes the steps to begin data collection with the TEOM 1405 DF monitor as well as leak check the instrument and download data The instrument will not begin collecting data until the operating mode message in the status bar reads Fully Operational Figure 3 1 Users must install clean conditioned filters in the unit prior to sampling Users can select flow rate data and other settings while waiting for the unit to become fully operational Figure 3 1 TEOM Data screen with Fully Operational message TEOM 1405 DF TEOM Data System Status FEM PM PM MC ono 000 30 M amp n MC gree 000 000 0 00 1 MC 6 06 600 Hr 6 06 006 12 He MC paimk 0600 MC 0 00 600 Fiker loading Frequency 77685 He
94. list on the screen To adjust the order touch the desired variable and then move the position by pressing the V and A arrows to the right of the data variable list For this ordering to wotk properly with data dwonloads version 1 40 or later of ePort is required 7 When all the desired variables are selected and the Storage Interval is set select the lt Back button to return to the Settings screen THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 3 Basic OPERATION Downloading D The ePort software allows users to download data from the TEOM 1405 DF monitor using a personal computer PC with the Windows XP or later operating system The monitor must be attached to a local area network LAN or directly to a router using the Ethernet connection on the back of the instrument Figure 3 14 In order to use ePort it must have a valid IP address Figure 3 14 Back of instrument Ethernet connection THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Operatine Guine TEOM 1405 DF 3 13 Section 3 Basic OPERATION Installing ePort Figure 3 15 ePort Welcome to InstallShield Wizard screen 3 14 Operatine TEOM 1405 DF Users must first install the ePort software on a personal computer PC connected to the same network as the TEOM 1405 DF that data will be downloaded from At the same time the ePort software is installed the installer will install Microsoft NET Framework software if the PC does not already have an up to date version of NET Framew
95. locations within the UK The Executive Summary summarise the findings in relation to MCERTS for UK Particulate Matter The text has been agreed by the UK certification committee and is repeated on the MCERTS certificate Below is a summary of the rationale behind these decisions A measurement range of 0 to 1000 g m is recommended in the T V Rheinland Report as a default setting of the analogue output for European conditions It is recommended that this is also adopted for UK purposes The Test for the Constancy of Volumetric Flow was discussed in Section 8 1 As the highest deviation from the nominal value is 0 00196 it is this value that should be transferred to the MCERTS certificate This is less than the required 3 The flow rate tests were done under flow conditions at a variety of filter loadings encountered during the field tests as opposed to 0 50 and 80 of the mass load as prescribed in MCERTS for UK Particulate Matter The variable filter load is not a requirement of CEN TS16450 The Leak Test procedure was discussed in Section 8 2 As the greatest leak detected is 3 25 it is this value that should be transferred to the MCERTS certificate This is greater than the required 196 however the leak test procedure for the 1405 DF is an internal manufacturers procedure implemented in the instruments in order to avoid serious damage to the instrument The check on tightness must be performed using this internal procedure
96. menu System Status status information of the instrument can be looked at At this place also the current software version can be looked at In the case of warning messages an additional button appears in the centre of the display View Warnings After its confirmation the pending warning messages can be looked at In addition an overview of the warning messages can be received at any time by clicking at the triangular warning symbols located at the right of the TEOM Data button Figure 74 Warning messages display triangular warning symbol button View Warnings SCIENTIFIC System Status Operating mode Fully operational RS232 mode AK protocol Vacuum pump pressure 0 29 atm Protection level Unlocked IP address 10 175 240 169 Serial number 1234567890 Instrument firmware version 1 51 Figure 75 Menu Instrument conditions TEOM 1405 DF SCIENTIFIC Instrument Conditions E Fully operational Normal status 09 28 2011 11 19 Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 103 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 UY gt 0 BU 57 Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the PM and 5 TEOM 1405 DF In the menu Instrument conditions the user may control and modify different settings of the instrument regarding temperature and flow rates as well as inform him about ambient conditions of the instrument Figure 76 Menu Settings TEOM 1405 DF 9
97. neis Fri 23 Sep 11 07 00 Sat 24 Sep 11 07 00 Sun 25 Sep 11 07 00 Mon 26 Sep 11 07 00 Tue 27 Sep 11 07 00 Wed 28 Sep 11 07 00 Thu 29 Sep 11 07 00 Fri 30 Sep 11 07 00 Sat 01 Oct 11 07 00 Sun 02 Oct 11 07 00 Mon 03 Oct 11 07 00 Tue 04 Oct 11 07 00 Wed 05 Oct 11 07 00 Thu 06 Oct 11 07 00 Fri 07 Oct 11 07 00 Sat 08 Oct 11 07 00 Sun 09 Oct 11 07 00 Mon 10 Oct 11 07 00 Tue 11 Oct 11 07 00 Wed 12 Oct 11 07 00 Thu 13 Oct 11 07 00 Fri 14 Oct 11 07 00 Sat 15 Oct 11 07 00 Sun 16 Oct 11 07 00 Mon 17 Oct 11 07 00 Tue 18 Oct 11 07 00 Wed 19 Oct 11 07 00 Thu 20 Oct 11 07 00 Fri 21 Oct 11 07 00 Bureau Veritas Air Quality AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 gui Drl SA1 S ZNd 12 2 15 7 17 1 12 4 13 5 9 8 4 5 5 5 3 6 6 0 4 7 1 3 1 9 4 2 5 9 11 1 18 6 4 3 3 8 9 3 17 6 ui Drl Z ESAT 13 4 14 5 16 0 11 8 14 8 9 8 2 5 4 1 3 1 6 4 5 2 2 0 3 2 4 2 8 5 13 7 20 1 6 7 5 2 9 5 18 1 L ESAT OLWd 26 1 21 3 18 8 38 3 23 4 15 9 7 0 10 8 8 1 10 1 11 9 5 5 5 3 11 5 14 8 17 0 28 0 11 6 11 9 28 0 Z ESAI 26 2 21 7 20 6 39 8 24 5 16 3 6 5 10 4 7 6 10 4 12 5 5 0 5 0 11 7 14 0 16 7 27 3 11 5 15 8 26 4 71002 NS 25 2 19 5 13 8 14 7 31 6 21 6 10 0 3 5 4 2 4 3 6 8 6 9 8 5 4 1 5 6 6 6 9 7 11 6 15 9 22 4 8 1 6 4 12 8 20 3 gui Drl 91102 NS
98. of the switching valve with the cleaning brush do not use a cleaning solution provided with the system Figure 5 47 Select the Next gt button Figure 5 47 Cleaning the valve with the valve brush 5 38 Guine TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES 8 The Reinstall screen will display Set the switching valve back into the system ensuring that the two empty quick connect fittings are located on the top of the switching valve 9 Tighten the four Swagelok connections Tighten them finger tight at first then turn them 1 1 4 turns with the wrench 10 Reinstall the tubing into the quick connect fittings on the top of the switching valve The short tubing that connects to the lower cooler will only reach the correct fitting the left quick connect fitting 11 Reinstall the cover of the unit Select the Next gt button 12 The wizard will display a message showing the procedure is complete Figure 5 48 Select the Finish button to exit the wizard and return to the Maintenance screen or select the lt Back button to move backward one step in the procedure Figure 5 48 Completing the Valve Completing the Valve Cleaning Wizard screen Cleaning Wizard The Valve Cleaning Wizard has completed sucesstulby The instrument will be put in Run made when this wizard is finished this wizard press Finish THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Operat
99. of the measuring device Figure 72 Main window of the user display TEOM 1405 DF SCIENTIFIC TEOM Data PM Coarse MC pg m 0 18 4 30 Min MC pg m 0 00 1 MC 1 27 8 Hr MC 0 69 12 Hr MC 0 60 24 Hr MC 0 00 Filter loading 26 34 9 60 Frequency 254 7463 Hz 240 0049 Hz Noise 0 003 0 002 ug wf Fully operational Normal status 0972872011 11 18 On the first level the main window of the user display is located here the current time the current date the instrument status normal warning the current operational condition e g fully operational stabilizing the mass concentration values MC 2 moving hourly mean every 6 minutes updated 30 min presently not implemented 1h 8h 12h and 24h averages the vibration frequency the noise of the mass measuring and the loading of the TEOM filter are displayed Figure 73 Menu System status here software version 1 51 TEOM 1405 DF SCIENTIFIC System Status Operating mode Fully operational RS232 mode AK protocol Vacuum pump pressure 0 29 atm Protection level Unlocked IP address 10 175 240 168 Serial number 1234567890 Instrument firmware version 1 51 Fully operational Normal status 09 28 2011 11 18 Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 102 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the and PM25 TEOM 1405 DF In the
100. on this date Nitrate is 2011 ion data on this date Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Nitrate is 2011 ion data on this date Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs VERITAS yew y 10 Grubbs outlier Inlet gt Zero Zero filter Zero filter Zero filter Power cut complete Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the PM25 TEOM 1405 DF eus Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter eu pue ojeq uelis Mon 14 Mar 11 10 00 Tue 15 Mar 11 10 00 Wed 16 Mar 11 10 00 Thu 17 Mar 11 10 00 Fri 18 Mar 11 10 00 Sat 19 Mar 11 10 00 Sun 20 Mar 11 10 00 Mon 21 Mar 11 10 00 Tue 22 Mar 11 10 00 Wed 23 Mar 11 10 00 Thu 24 Mar 11 10 00 Fri 25 Mar 11 10 00 Sat 26 Mar 11 10 00 Sun 27 Mar 11 10 00 Mon 28 Mar 11 10 00 Tue 29 Mar 11 10 00 Wed 30 Mar 11 10 00 Thu 31 Mar 11 10 00 Fri 01 Apr 11 10 00 Sat 02 Apr 11 10 00 Sun 03 Apr 11 10 00 Mon 04 Apr 11 10 00 Tue 05 Apr 11 10 00 Wed 06 Apr 11 10 00 Thu 07 Apr 11 10 00 Fri 08 Apr 11 10 00 Sat 09 Apr 11 10 00 Sun 10 A
101. rated value Tightness of the sampling 3 25 Note 2 Leakage not to exceed 1 system of the sampled volume Full data set 0 55 ug m lt 2 g m 18 ug m 0 54 ug m Not specified 218 ug m 0 56 ug m Not specified Full data set 0 56 ug m lt 2 ug m 30 g m 0 55 ug m Not specified 230 ug m 0 60 ug m Not specified Full data set 0 76 ug m 2 5 ug m 18 ug m 0 64 ug m 2 5 ug m 218 ug m 1 05 ug m 2 5 ug m Full data set 0 75 ug m 2 5 ug m 30 ug m 0 68 ug m 2 5 ug m 230 ug m 1 06 ug m 2 5 ug m Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 13 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific d UK Report on the Equivalence of the and 5 TEOM 1405 DF Table 1 Continued Summary of the test results The data in this table relate to the instrument without correction for slope and or intercept See Note 1 Expanded uncertainty calculated at 30 ug m for Instrument SN 20014 for 5 Full data set lt 25 18 ug m Not specified 218 ug m lt 25 Individual sites Bornheim Winter lt 25 Cologne Winter lt 25 Bornheim Summer lt 25 Teddington lt 25 Expanded uncertainty calculated at 30 ug m for Instrument SN 20116 for 5 Full data set lt 25 18 ug m Not specified 218 ug m lt 25 Individual sites Bornheim Winter lt 25 Cologne Winter lt 25 Bornheim Summer lt 25 Teddington lt 25 Expanded uncertainty calculated at 50 ug m for Instrument SN 20014 for Full data set lt 25 30 ug m N
102. straight way via a dryer directly to the oscillating filter In the reference mode the air flow is directed through a cooled filter after the dryer to remove and restrain the non volatile and volatile part of the particulate from the sample During normal operation the temperature of the cooler is maintained at constantly 4 C Based on the mass concentration measuring during the base and reference mode the FDMS system updates every six minutes the 1h average of the following results Base MC Particle concentration of the particle loaded sampling flow Ref MC Particle concentration of the particle free sampling flow after passing through the cooled filter MC Base MC adjusted for Ref MC Base mass concentration normally positive minus reference mass concentration negative in case mass of the filter evaporates After the mass determination the sampling flows are directed over a mass flow rate regulator To guarantee a constant sampling volume flow at the inlet taking into account the ambient temperature and pressure the volume flow control shall be operated in the mode active actual 1 3 Candidate Instrument Scope and Layout The following text is copied from Section 3 3 of the T V Rheinland Report This Section has been edited in order to reduce the number of photographs In accordance with the requirements of MCERTS for UK Particulate Matter discussion on the operating procedures of the instrument is given in Appendix A
103. table Table A 3 First convert the decimal status code downloaded from the monitor to a hexadecimal number using the Windows or another scientific calculator 8433666 H 80B002 Table A 3 Example status code table 4 Operatine TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC APPENDIX A TROUBLESHOOTING 2 52 In the one s place of the status code a status code of 2 is displayed In the one s place of the status code table the 2 status code matches the H 2 Power Switch status code This is one of the status codes that the unit is displaying in its status code In the ten s place of the status code there are no 0 status codes displayed In the 100 s place of the status code there are no 0 status codes displayed In the 1 000 s place of the status code a status code of is displayed Because there are no status codes in the status code table that match this number the numbers needs to be broken down further Convert B to a decimal number using Table A 2 which converts B to 11 Next look at the status code table to decipher the status code In the 1 000 s place of the table there are three status codes that when added together will total 11 H 1000 Serial Port Problem H 2000 Line Printer Problem and H 8000 Leak on Loop B These are three more of the status codes
104. that after the start of the measuring system the system always first waits for the next full hour for determination and recording of the measured values and then stores the data in the following intervals hh 00 hh 06 hh 12 hh 18 hh 24 hh 54 This update of the software increases easy operation of the measuring system and has no influence on the performance of the measuring system because only the first hour after starting up the system might be affected by possible delays due to the applied change Furthermore a couple of small bugs in the software have been corrected which exclusively increase the safe operation of the systems and have no influence on the performance of the systems themselves Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 19 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the and 5 TEOM 1405 DF No influence on the instrument performance is to be expected due to the realised changes up to the version 1 56 Within the scope of the testing after the field test site Teddington a modification of the measuring system from configuration C to D was made In the following lab test and the three field test campaigns in Germany no negative influence on the instrument performance could be observed Table 4 summarises the components that were changed on the instruments Figure 2 Overview of complete system TEOM 1405 DF Ambient Particulate Monitor including American PM o sampling
105. that the frequency is stable in order to ensure valid test data Look at the change in the oscillating frequency on the TEOM Data screen Figure 5 18 The last two digits of the reading will fluctuate due to noise and the rest will remain steady If more than the last two digits fluctuate in this reading this indicates that the TEOM filter is loose Re seat the filter and check the frequency again Data System Status ME pgm 30Min MC pgi E 1 igen Iris trusmenit Conditians B Hr MC pgm 12 Hr ugima z4 Hr MC Semings Filter Fragua Hoite Fay raea messe eno THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES Conditioning the TEOM Filters filters must be preconditioned to avoid excessive moisture buildup prior to their use in the system To precondition the TEOM filters 1 Place two TEOM filters on the TEOM filter holders of the mass transducer Figure 5 19 to condition the filters 2 When it is time to install a new TEOM filter use a conditioned filter from one of the filter holders 3 Replace the conditioned TEOM filter that was on the filter holder with a new filter Figure 5 19 Conditioned TEOM Filters Conditioned filter Conditioned filter Note Extra filters should be stored inside the carrier box in the interior of the unit near the mass transducer to ensure they are at or near the approp
106. that the unit is displaying in its status code In the 10 000 s place of the status code there no 0 status codes displayed In the 100 000 s place of the status code 800000 a status code of 800000 is displayed which matches H 800000 Sensor Comm Prob lem n the 1 000 000 s place of the status code there are no 0 status codes displayed Therefore the downloaded status code 8433666 H 80B002 breaks down into the following status codes according to the example status code table H 2 Power Switch H 1000 Serial Port Problem H 2000 Line Printer Problem H 8000 Leak on Loop B H 800000 Sensor Comm Problem THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Operatine TEOM 1405 DF A 5 APPENDIX A TROUBLESHOOTING Notes A 6 Operatine TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC AK Protocol THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Appendix B Serial Communication The TEOM 1405 Monitor supports AK Protocol This protocol permits a locally or remotely located computer to obtain information electronically from the unit These protocols are described in this appendix The AK Protocol allows the user to query the present value of any system variable remotely and allows the user to change those system variable values The user also can download information from the internal data logger The RPComm software program uses this protocol for two way communication di
107. the distribution will be shifted to the right whereas if there is a gain in the relative mass the distribution will shift to the left EN14907 states that unsampled filters should be rejected if the difference between the masses of the two pre weightings is greater than 40 ug Similarly EN14907 states that sampled filters should be rejected if the difference between the masses of the two post weightings is greater than 60 Filters were not rejected based on these criteria The observed distributions of repeat mass measurements are considered unlikely to have had a significant effect on the results Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 112 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific BUREAU UK Report on the Equivalence of the and PM25 TEOM 1405 DF Figure 82 Distribution for Emfab filters of A Pre spread weighed relative to the check weight and B Post spread weighed relative to the check weight Pre Spread u g D 3 75 en o o o n less than 200 150 to 200 100 to 150 100 to 90 10010 150 150 to 200 greaterthan 200 Range of Spread ug Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 113 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the PM and gt 5 TEOM 1405 DF 15017025 Accreditations Figure 83 19017025 Accreditation deed of T V Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH DAkks Deutsche Akkreditierungsstelle Deutsche Akkreditieru
108. the Ambient Calibration button to display the Ambient Calibration screen Figure 5 54 TEOM1405 DF Service Calibration gt Ambient Calibration Click the button to enter the current actual smijeni bempersbure or pressure SUMI ERE slamng erret status 12228 Determine the current ambient pressure atmospheres absolute pressure not corrected to sea level If the measured value is within 0 01 atm of the pressure displayed in the Ambient Pressure field of the button no further action is necessary Select the lt Back button to return to the Calibration screen If the value is not within 0 01 atm of the pressure displayed in the Ambient Pressure field of the button select the Ambient Pressure button A keypad will display Enter the actual pressure as measured by the external device and press the Enter button The Ambient Pressure Calibration screen will display with the new entered value Select the lt Back button to return to the Calibration screen Operatinc TEOM 1405 DF 5 45 Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES Auditing the To auditthe fine course or bypass flow Flow Rates In the TEOM Data screen select the Service button to display the Service screen then select the Verification button to display the Verification screen Figure 5 50 2 Select the Flow Audit button to begin the Flow Audit Wizard Figure 5 55 Select the Next
109. the Following Web site THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 3 Basic OPERATION Connecting to the when the ePort software is installed and the TEOM 1405 DF unit and the TEOM 1405 DF Unit are connected to the same network the software can connect to the instrument and download data Additional Technical Notes regarding information on connecting to instruments over the network are offered in the library on our website at www thermo com aqi Once you have connected to an instrument or instruments and saved a configuration file select Open Saved Configuration in the ePort Open screen to open that configuration and automatically connect to all the instruments that were saved in that configuration To connectto the instrument 1 Ensure that the PC and the instrument are connected to the same network using the Ethernet connection on the back of the instrument Refer to the previous section for information on connecting the instrument to a netwotk 2 In the System Status screen of the machine from which you want to download data locate and record the IP address Figure 3 21 of that unit Figure 3 21 ES System Status screen SEDEM E TEOM 1405 DF System Status System Status Operating mode Stabilizing RE mode Hone Masc pressure 1 00 Enchosure temperature 30 00 instament Probection level Linkoribed IP address P address 182 188 193 129 Serial number 12343587890 instrument firmare vers
110. the dewpoint of the sample gases may exceed 0 C Thermo Fisher Scientific recommends the cooler temperatures be adjusted to a 10 C set point for the operating period where the high ambient temperatures or humidity exists This is accomplished by setting the cooler temperature to 10 C at the beginning of the typical calendar period when these conditions exist and resetting the cooler temperature to 4 C at the end of the calendar period When changing the cooler temperature from 4 C to 10 C follow these steps 1 Remove the TEOM sample filters 2 Perform the Cooler Cleaning as instructed in Section 5 3 Change the Cooler temperature from 4 C to 10 C 4 Install new TEOM Sample filters The instrument is now ready to sample at the new FDMS cooler temperature When changing the cooler temperature setting from 10 C to 4 C these steps are not necessary Operatinc TEOM 1405 DF 4 21 Section 4 SCREENS AND SETTINGS Settings Screen Figure 4 17 Settings screen 4 22 Operatine TEOM 1405 DF The Settings button displays the Settings screen Figure 4 17 and provides access to system data and advanced settings for the instrument TEOM Data TEOM 1405 DF Settings System Status Cenditiang s Hund statem 157 Settings Service When in the Settings screen select the System Analog amp Digital Outputs Data Storage and Advanced b
111. to 1 Line 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 PM Reference 1 Figure 28 Grubbs test results for PM reference method Cologne Winter 5244 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 4 30 20 Outlier Outlier Deleted Outlier Not Deleted 1 to 1 Line 50 60 70 Reference 1 Bureau Veritas Air Quality AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Page 52 le BUREAU VERITAS Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the and PM25 TEOM 1405 DF EURER le Figure 29 Grubbs test results for the PM reference method Bornheim Summer 100 Not Outlier 90 Outlier Deleted Outlier Not Deleted 80 1 to 1 Line 70 60 50 40 Nd 30 50 60 70 80 90 100 Reference 1 Figure 30 Grubbs test results for the PM reference method Bornheim Winter 100 Not Outlier 90 Outlier Deleted Outlier Not Deleted 80 1 to 1 Line 70 60 50 40 52444 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 PM Reference 1 Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 53 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the PM and PM25 TEOM 1405 DF le Candidate Method Two TEOM 1405 DF Ambient Particulate Monitor systems were simultaneously operated during each field test The flow rate was tested on
112. to display the Data Storage screen Figure 3 13 THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Operatine TEOM 1405 DF 3 11 Section 3 Basic OPERATION Figure 3 13 Data Storage screen 3 12 Operatine TEOM 1405 DF Settings gt Data Storage instrument variables te store You can change order ofvariables by clicking on the field and dragging it up or doam using the arrow Suttons an the right reference WIC Ambient bempersbure g sing wemasaw 3 When in the Data Storage screen select the Edit List button to display the Edit Data Storage screen Press the names of the variables you wish to log up to the maximum allowed of 30 Use the Next Page gt and lt Previous Page buttons to scroll through the entire list of variables which can be stored Select the OK button when all the desired vatiables have been selected 4 Use the V and A buttons to scroll through the list of selected variables to ensure that all desired variables are selected 5 When in the Data Storage screen select the Storage Interval button to select the interval for data storage Enter the desired data storage interval into the keypad and select the Enter button For example if the storage interval is 10 seconds every 10 seconds the instrument will log save the data in the selected variables 6 The storage order of the variables may be set by moving individual storage registers up or down in the
113. 0 Tue 08 Nov 11 07 00 Wed 09 Nov 11 07 00 Thu 10 Nov 11 07 00 Fri 11 Nov 11 07 00 Sat 12 Nov 11 07 00 Sun 13 Nov 11 07 00 Mon 14 Nov 11 07 00 Tue 15 Nov 11 07 00 Wed 16 Nov 11 07 00 Thu 17 Nov 11 07 00 Fri 18 Nov 11 07 00 Sat 19 Nov 11 07 00 Bureau Veritas Air Quality AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 gui Drl SA1 S ZNd 23 0 15 4 11 0 6 0 18 1 17 8 11 7 22 5 17 2 9 2 13 7 55 2 34 6 43 7 24 0 14 3 26 9 21 5 38 6 35 0 37 7 26 0 23 9 ui Drl Z ESAT 23 2 15 4 12 1 6 7 19 3 18 0 12 2 22 3 17 3 10 8 14 3 54 7 34 3 43 6 23 4 13 9 27 9 21 5 38 1 34 6 36 6 25 9 22 9 L ESAT 27 2 16 8 30 8 17 8 21 0 62 1 39 5 53 1 28 6 17 3 35 1 24 1 43 8 44 3 44 1 32 3 31 2 Z SA10LWd 27 3 16 3 28 4 17 5 21 1 63 5 40 6 54 2 29 9 17 3 35 3 24 7 45 1 45 1 44 2 32 0 32 6 71002 NS 22 9 26 5 17 4 13 2 7 9 20 5 20 4 20 6 14 0 24 3 24 8 19 4 12 0 15 2 22 6 58 0 37 0 45 9 26 5 15 9 31 5 28 4 24 7 38 3 41 6 29 7 27 8 30 7 gui Drl 91102 NS 21 7 25 9 16 8 12 6 7 7 20 2 20 1 19 5 13 1 23 9 24 5 18 0 10 8 13 4 23 0 57 4 36 6 45 8 25 3 15 5 31 1 28 2 23 7 37 7 40 3 28 4 26 2 28 8 1002 NS 27 6 30 6 24 2 18 5 13 6 27 6 29 7 27 5 17 8 32 0 30 2 25 2 20 8 23 4 30 5 67 2 45 2 58 8 32 8
114. 0014 20116 Values gt 30 g m 91 20014 20116 Values lt 30 ug m 0 64 Table 21 Uncertainty between systems under test for the candidates SN 20014 and SN 20116 measured component 20014 20116 Single test sites 20014 20116 Teddington 20014 20116 Cologne winter 20014 20116 Bornheim winter Classification via reference value 20014 20116 Values gt 30 g m 76 20014 20116 Values lt 30 g m 260 Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 59 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the and PM TEOM 1405 DF BULLAS VERITAS Figure 32 Results of the parallel measurements with the candidates SN 20014 SN 20116 measured component s all sites 1405 DF SN20014 SN20116 All Test Sites Raw data Measured values Regression line Candidate 2 ug m 1 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 Candidate 1 ug m Figure 33 Results of the parallel measurements with the candidates SN 20014 SN 20116 measured component s test site Teddington 1405 DF SN 20014 SN 20116 Teddington Raw data Measured values Regression line Candidate 2 ug m 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 Candidate 1 yg m B
115. 09155 0 09113 0 09260 0 09155 0 09115 0 09260 0 09157 0 09116 0 09262 0 09156 0 09117 0 09264 0 09157 0 09116 0 09262 0 09154 0 09114 0 09260 0 09156 0 09116 0 09262 0 09156 0 09113 0 09263 0 09160 0 09117 0 09263 0 09158 0 09118 0 09263 0 09158 0 09117 0 09267 0 09160 0 09118 0 09265 0 09157 0 09116 0 09266 0 09159 0 09119 0 09269 0 09162 0 09122 0 09268 0 09162 0 09121 0 09267 0 09161 0 09121 0 09266 0 09161 0 09118 0 09268 0 09160 0 09120 0 09264 0 09161 0 09117 0 09264 0 09159 0 09116 Average 0 09264 0 09158 0 09117 Standard deviation relative standard 0 036 0 027 0 031 deviation 3 2911E 05 2 4937E 05 2 8558E 05 Median 0 09264 0 09158 0 09117 lowest value 0 09257 0 09154 0 09110 highest value 0 09269 0 09162 0 09122 Highlighted yellow average value Highlighted green lowest value Highlighted blue highest value Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 110 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific BUREAU UK Report on the Equivalence of the and PM25 TEOM 1405 DF B 2 UK test sites Teddington Implementation of Weighing Protocols NPL National Physical Laboratory were subcontracted to weigh filters manually for the field study In line with EN14907 filters were kept in the weighing room for less than 28 days the glove box used for weighing was maintained at 20 1 and
116. 1 Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES Calibrating the Perform the ambient air temperature calibration pressure calibration and Flow Rates leak check Section 3 before executing the flow calibration procedure calibrate or audit the PM 2 5 PM Coarse and bypass flows you will need a 1 1 4 inch flow adapter a 1 2 inch Swagelok flow adapter a 3 8 inch Swagelok flow adapter and a flow measurement device The reference flow meter such as a bubble meter dry gas meter or mass flow meter should have been recently calibrated to a primary standard and should have an accuracy of 1 at 3 l min and 16 67 l min and pressure drop of less than 0 07 bar 1 psi If you are using a mass flow meter you must make any necessary corrections to translate this reading to volumetric 1 min at the current ambient temperature and barometric pressure No adjustment is necessary in the case of a volumetric flow metet Thermo Scientific offers the Streamline Pro Multi Cal system 57 008887 to measure volumetric flow measurements Note To audit the total flow you will need a 1 1 4 inch flow adapter Remove the inlet and attach the flow adapter and meter to the top of the inlet tube Figure 5 63 A Figure 5 63 Flow meter adapter attached to top of inlet tube for total flow audit Flow meter adapter Inlet tube 5 52 Operatine Guine TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES
117. 10006 250 43345 250 4 20 02006 1820 15918 42597 14406 26323 0 0 285 5089975 255 510115 250 440345 250 4 21 6 5 0006 1820 15918 42697 14406 26323 0 0 25 509875 265 510115 250 44 845 250 4 6S2006 1H20 15918 42697 14406 26323 0 0 265 5089975 255 510143 250 440345 250 4 662008 18 20 15918 42697 14406 26323 0 0 265 500075 265 510178 250 447346 250 4 24 650006 1820 15918 42597 14406 26323 0 0 255 508875 255 510187 250 440046 250 4 25652006 18 21 1501842697 14406 26323 0 0 205 500075 265 510184 250 44345 250 4 25 S520006 18 21 15918 42597 14406 26323 0 0 285 5089975 265 510158 250 440046 250 4 27 6 8 206 18 21 15918 42697 14406 26323 0 0 265 500075 265 510153 250 440346 250 4 238 5 18 21 15918 42597 14405 26323 0 0 265 509975 265 510081 250 440345 250 4 23 662008 18 21 1591842697 14406 26323 0 0 265 508505 265 510015 250 447346 250 4 30 60006 18 21 15918 42597 14406 26323 0 0 255 9089975 255 508925 250 440046 250 4 05 2006 1822 1691942097 14406 26323 0 0 205 500075 265 500605 250 44345 250 4 1822 15918 42597 14406 25123 o 0 285 5089975 265 508582 250 440046 250 4 33 65206 1822 1591842697 14406 26323 0 0 265 500075 2065 50092 250 44345 250 4 4 lt 182 15918 42697 14406 26323 0 0 255 5089975 285 509559 250 440046 250 4 35 65206 1822 15918 42697 14406 26323 0 0 265 500505 265 508385 250 430346 250 4 35 65206 1822 15918 42597 14406 26323 0 0 265 508875 255 508273 250 440046
118. 1002 NS 28 9 22 8 21 7 16 0 22 3 27 8 22 2 14 0 12 2 9 7 13 9 16 2 21 1 17 4 14 6 10 4 15 0 12 8 13 1 14 5 18 6 21 2 15 3 12 5 18 7 23 8 23 6 24 9 23 2 OLINd 91102 NS 28 0 22 3 21 1 15 1 22 7 28 2 21 9 13 4 12 0 9 8 13 9 16 4 21 7 18 0 14 5 10 7 15 1 12 9 12 9 14 6 18 5 21 2 15 1 12 2 18 9 23 7 23 6 24 7 23 7 duie 1ueiquiy 12 0 12 5 11 3 12 8 14 1 16 0 18 1 18 9 9e HH 78 0 62 9 71 6 72 0 64 1 61 9 76 8 76 4 75 3 76 5 60 1 66 2 64 2 59 1 64 5 78 3 69 6 56 5 66 1 61 1 59 8 58 0 60 3 82 3 63 0 62 0 68 8 72 3 62 4 Os m q 1ueiquy 0 6 0 2 2 5 8 1 8 3 10 2 8 6 8 1 3 6 0 4 2 0 5 5 3 2 3 5 5 1 4 0 1 3 0 8 1 1 2 2 4 0 5 0 8 4 5 9 6 9 10 2 13 0 11 6 S W SM 0 2 0 9 2 5 1 0 0 3 0 5 0 2 0 4 0 5 1 8 1 7 0 8 0 8 1 2 1 4 1 1 1 0 1 4 0 6 0 6 0 3 0 4 0 4 0 2 0 4 0 4 0 1 0 1 1 2 ui Drl ejnejoA 1 6 3 2 1 8 1 2 3 5 4 3 3 9 2 2 2 5 1 0 1 0 2 2 4 8 3 5 2 7 1 9 2 4 2 0 1 7 2 0 3 8 3 3 2 1 1 2 1 3 2 6 1 9 3 2 5 0 Page 124 SOJON Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of
119. 11 The Install Calibration Filter screen will display Figure 5 86 Correctly install and properly seat the pre weighed calibration verification filter onto the PM 2 5 left side of the mass transducer using the calibration filter exchange tool Follow the instructions for changing a filter earlier in this section Select the Next gt button Note DO NOT use the calibration filter exchange tool for installing or removing ANY filter other than the pre weighed calibration filter A Figure 5 86 install Calibration Filter Install Calibration Filter screen The instrument will measure the frequency with tie calibration Mer installed Open the instrument door and mass transducer Correctly install and property seat he preweighed calibration verification filler onto the left PM 25 side of ihe mass fraesducer Ugit the cassratian Mher exchange tool Giese ine mass transducer amd ingtrument door 12 The Stabilizing screen will display while the instrument waits for the frequency of the TEOM calibration filter A countdown timer on the screen will show the progress of the stabilization step Figure 5 84 When the stabilization Complete message displays select the Next gt button Note If the frequency doesn t stabilize the wizard will display a screen with instructions to re seat the filter Re seat the filter and select the Next button The Stabilizing screen will display If the un
120. 114 Figure 84 15017025 Accreditation deeds of NPL excerpts 116 Bureau Veritas Air Quality AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Page 10 BUREAU VERITAS Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the PMio 5 TEOM 1405 DF TITLE OF THE METHOD The following text has been approved by the UK Certification Committee as being an accurate description of the set up of the instrument and it is recommended that this text is repeated on the MCERTS certificate The instrument tested was the TEOM 1405 DF with 0 pre separator measuring system consisting of the following parts USEPA style sampling inlet operating at 16 7 l min Virtual Impactor Flow splitter with flows split to 3 and 13 7 Sampling tubes FDMS Filter Dynamics Measurement Systems tower TEOM Tapered Element Oscillating Microbalance mass sensor Mass Flow Controllers Vacuum pump The operation of instruments in permutations other than the above is not covered by this report and is not recommended for approval without further consideration by the UK Certification Committee for the implications of any variations Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 11 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the and 5 TEOM 1405 DF EXECUTIVE SUMMARY The Thermo Fisher Scientific Tapered Element Oscillating Microbalance TEOM 1405 DF Filter
121. 13 To use the actual temperature and pressure to control the volumetric flow you must install the ambient temperature humidity sensor The instrument s mass flow controllers measure flow on a mass basis All of the size selective inlets including the PM 10 inlet operate on a constant volumettic flow basis If the user chooses to use passive flow control they must select the Passive flow control button Figure 4 13 The average temperature and average pressure used by the instrument may vary with season and altitude If the user wants the unit to use the average temperature and pressure to control the volumetric flow they should manually adjust the average temperature and average pressure settings as climatic conditions change The user usually has to adjust the average pressure only once for the average barometric pressure at the sampling site 1 station pressure not adjusted to sea level However the user generally must adjust the average temperature periodically often 4 times per year in accordance with changing average ambient temperatures 4 16 Operatine TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 4 SCREENS AND SETTINGS The mass concentration is reported based on the volume sampled through the TEOM inlet It can be reported in terms of the mass collected per actual volume sampled through the inlet or reported in terms of mass collected per standard volume sampled through the inlet
122. 13 9 Fri 01 Jan 10 10 00 Bureau Veritas Air Quality AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 S ZNd vLooz NS S ZNd 91102 NS nu 16 8 16 5 11 0 11 3 7 2 7 7 8 8 9 2 26 4 26 1 33 3 32 9 21 6 21 7 6 6 5 4 11 9 11 8 11 8 10 8 7 3 6 4 16 7 17 0 27 5 25 2 14 5 14 8 16 5 16 2 9 0 8 0 3 9 3 2 5 4 2 9 17 2 16 7 9 5 9 3 9 3 9 0 6 7 6 8 11 6 9 7 OLINd 71002 NS ew 6rl OLNd 91102 NS 24 1 25 3 23 5 23 9 17 3 18 3 12 6 13 6 12 6 13 4 31 7 32 4 39 2 39 9 26 6 27 5 10 8 9 7 15 7 16 1 15 2 14 3 11 2 10 1 19 5 20 1 29 8 27 5 17 6 18 2 19 6 19 7 13 4 12 8 9 6 9 2 8 4 6 4 23 7 23 6 11 9 11 9 12 5 12 3 12 8 13 2 15 3 13 5 25 jusiquy 9 8 5 7 5 8 4 2 3 4 0 6 1 5 1 3 0 8 0 1 0 9 14 2 1 2 8 4 1 4 1 5 9 2 4 3 7 4 8 4 3 2 3 0 1 94 1 90 9 93 8 83 9 87 7 88 8 87 5 96 9 85 2 86 6 85 9 87 3 97 3 98 3 95 9 94 1 94 5 90 2 86 2 88 6 95 9 93 1 81 8 88 3 1ulod Mag 2 5 4 8 3 3 2 4 1 8 2 4 1 1 1 0 2 7 2 2 2 7 0 8 2 3 2 3 3 2 3 3 4 4 0 4 2 0 4 2 3 3 0 5 1 8 s w SM 0 1 0 2 0 4 0 8 0 5 0 2 0 2 0 2 2 4 0 9 0 2 0 1 0 3 0 0 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 3 0 3 1 2 1 7 1 9 1 1 0 2 gui Drl ejejoA 1 2 3 1 2 2 2 5 4 9 7 6 7 2 2 1 3 4 4 6 2 2 3 9 4 5 4 6 3 2 2 7 2 1 0 8 4 6 3 3 2 0 1 4 1 7 121 SOJON INeIOA Averag
123. 2 Enclosure Temp 2 temperature exceeds 60 C 0x00000001 Power Failure 1 Operating Guide TEOM 1405 DF Thermo Fisher Scientific Converting Decimal Hexadecimal Numbers Table A 2 Hex digits and status codes THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC APPENDIX A TROUBLESHOOTING The easiest way to convert the decimal numbers reported by the unit is to use the calculator on a Windows based PC To convert a decimal status code to a hexadecimal number 1 Open the Windows calculator it s located in Accessories under All Programs in the Start menu 2 Select View then Scientific to open the scientific style calculator 3 Select Dec to choose the decimal calculator option and then enter the decimal status number into the calculator 4 Select Hex to choose the hexadecimal calculator option The new number displayed in the calculator is the hexadecimal number you will use to decipher the status code list Note To convert a hexadecimal to a decimal number select Hex type in the hexadecimal number then select Dec To properly use the hexadecimal numbers converted from the decimal data download separate the converted number and the status codes on the table into place holders the one s ten s 100 s 1 000 s 10 000 s and 100 000 s and the 1 000 000 s place Each place in the converted code will have a hexadecimal digit Each hexadecimal digit 0 F in each place wi
124. 2010 3 17 2010 3 24 2010 3 31 2010 4 14 2010 4 21 2010 4 28 2010 5 5 2010 5 12 2010 5 19 2010 5 26 2010 6 2 2010 6 9 2010 6 16 2010 6 23 2010 6 30 2010 Bureau Veritas Air Quality AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Page 40 BUREAU VERITAS BUREAU VERITAS UK Report on the Equivalence of the 5 TEOM 1405 DF Thermo Fisher Scientific LLOZ S S LLOG LL LL LLOZ Y L E L LOC 8C V LL0 82 0L LLOC Le V LLOZ L Z O LLOC VL V LLOZ Y L OL 102 4 10 2 01 LLO LE E LLOZ OE 6 LLOd ve 102 62 6 VIII LLOC ZL E 102 91 6 LLOZ OL E L L0 6 6 LLOC E E L LOZ Z 6 102 102 92 8 LL02 61 8 10 2 1 102 2 1 8 02 01 02 102 0 8 02 6 6 02 66 27 L LOZ ZZ L O O O st LLOZ ZZ L D ES Q 5 2 w o S Q ES o S T Q o b N n S w o D E Time Series of the 5 Reference at the test site Bornheim motorway parking lot summer lot winter o e 1 S ZINd Figure 13 Figure 14 41 Bureau Veritas Air Quality AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 BUREAU VERITAS UK Report o
125. 2011 Bureau Veritas Air Quality AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Page 34 Thermo Fisher Scientific 2 UK Report on the Equivalence of the and TEOM 1405 DF 8 2 Tightness of the Measuring System MCERTS for UK Particulate Matter lists the following requirement for the tightness of the measuring system The leak tightness of the sampling system is carried out using flow and pressure monitoring equipment to determine the leak rate of the entire instrument where feasible or by evaluating the leaks of different parts separately The tests can be made by measuring the volume flow at the inlet and outlet of the system or by determining the pressure to achieve the performance criterion shall not exceed 1 of the sample volume The following text is copied with minor alterations from Section 6 1 5 4 8 of the TUV Rheinland Report Equipment Adapter for flow rate check tightness check Performance of test The TEOM 1405 DF Ambient Particulate Monitor can perform a tightness check using an internally implemented tightness check assistant The tightness check assistant compares the different measured values between zero flow with the vacuum turned off and flow through the device when the inlet is blocked ideally again a zero flow should be measured The tightness check is considered as passed when the flow values with a blocked inlet deviate no more than 0 15 l min from zero flow at the 5
126. 3 12 1 11 8 ui Drl Z SA1 8 2 12 2 19 4 11 4 17 2 17 9 20 8 20 7 17 6 17 8 19 3 13 3 7 0 9 2 9 3 11 5 13 6 17 6 12 2 11 2 11 8 L ESAT 18 0 24 4 32 0 31 9 26 4 30 3 33 9 27 4 31 0 44 3 28 0 25 9 21 0 13 0 16 1 15 9 20 5 20 1 30 7 46 1 23 4 17 8 19 6 2 ESAI 17 1 23 2 31 5 31 9 26 6 30 7 34 2 27 4 31 3 45 1 28 0 27 3 22 0 12 9 14 9 15 1 20 2 19 5 31 1 47 5 23 0 17 8 19 1 71002 NS 10 7 15 9 24 2 12 8 15 3 16 1 20 2 22 3 23 8 24 0 19 3 31 7 23 5 22 2 17 7 35 2 25 3 21 8 14 0 11 4 10 8 10 5 13 8 14 5 13 5 12 6 9 9 gui Drl 91102 NS 11 0 14 8 23 5 11 8 14 3 14 7 18 9 22 0 23 0 23 7 19 5 31 0 23 0 20 8 23 0 34 3 24 7 20 9 13 9 8 4 11 1 10 2 14 8 14 5 13 7 12 7 10 1 OLINd 1002 NS 20 6 27 2 35 4 31 2 39 6 23 2 30 3 35 2 38 6 36 4 30 1 40 8 31 4 31 0 34 4 47 9 32 0 30 4 23 6 16 3 16 7 16 4 21 5 21 9 30 2 40 6 22 0 91102 NS 20 2 26 2 34 9 30 1 38 1 22 5 29 4 35 5 38 8 37 0 28 3 39 5 30 6 29 2 38 1 46 8 31 5 29 4 22 9 13 9 16 9 16 6 22 5 22 0 31 5 46 9 22 6 jusiquy 10 1 8 0 10 4 11 9 11 4 14 3 15 5 16 6 17 8 20 0 18 0 18 1 16 8 16 7 10 8 14 2 17 2 16 9 14 8 11 0 10 0 9 7 14 1 18 6 21 9 22 1 17 2
127. 30 ug m 3 Line 30 ug m 3 Line 1405DF FDMS ug m All Data Line 40 50 60 70 80 90 Reference ug m Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 79 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the and PM TEOM 1405 DF VERITAS Figure 60 Reference vs candidate SN 20014 measured component all test sites 4 SN 20014 1405DF FDMS ug m 50 60 70 80 90 100 Reference ug m Figure 61 Reference vs candidate SN 20116 measured component PM o all test sites 4 SN20116 1405DF FDMS ug m 50 60 70 80 90 Reference ug m Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 80 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the and 5 TEOM 1405 DF VERITAS io Figure 62 Reference vs candidate SN 20014 measured component PM test site Teddington 4 SN 20014 Teddington 1405DF ug m 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 PM Reference ug m Figure 63 Reference vs candidate SN 20116 measured component test site Teddington a SN 20116 Teddington 1405DF FDMS ug m 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 Reference ug m Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 81 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the and PM TEOM 1405
128. 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs yew y VERITAS Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the PM25 TEOM 1405 DF eus Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington eui pue uelis Sat 22 May 10 10 00 Sun 23 May 10 10 00 Mon 24 May 10 10 00 Tue 25 May 10 10 00 Wed 26 May 10 10 00 Thu 27 May 10 10 00 Fri 28 May 10 10 00 Sat 29 May 10 10 00 Sun 30 May 10 10 00 Mon 31 May 10 10 00 Tue 01 Jun 10 10 00 Wed 02 Jun 10 10 00 Thu 03 Jun 10 10 00 Fri 04 Jun 10 10 00 Sat 05 Jun 10 10 00 Sun 06 Jun 10 10 00 Mon 07 Jun 10 10 00 Tue 08 Jun 10 10 00 Wed 09 Jun 10 10 00 Thu 10 Jun 10 10 00 Fri 11 Jun 10 10 00 Sat 12 Jun 10 10 00 Sun 13 Jun 10 10 00 Mon 14 Jun 10 10 00 Tue 15 Jun 10 10 00 Wed 16 Jun 10 10 00 Thu 17 Jun 10 10 00 Fri 18 Jun 10 10 00 Sat 19 Jun 10 10 00 Bureau Veritas Air Quality AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 gui Drl SA1 S
129. 4 3 18 5 16 1 18 6 15 9 SM ejejoA 0 7 42 06 5 5 29 36 23 1 6 0 9 1 2 0 9 1 4 1 5 1 2 1 1 2 7 0 8 32 1 11 1 5 1 4 1 5 1 5 1 2 2 5 0 7 2 7 0 1 1 3 3 2 1 2 1 0 1 1 1 3 0 7 2 1 11 0 7 1 2 0 6 0 7 1 6 0 7 3 3 1 2 3 0 1 5 2 0 0 8 2 1 1 0 1 3 1 2 3 3 0 9 3 2 0 7 1 8 Page 130 S ON Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs o VERITAS Wrong set up Correction of set up Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the PM25 TEOM 1405 DF eus Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer
130. 5 5 Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs VERITAS yew y Zero filter PM2 5 Grubbs outlier Power supply interrupted Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the and 5 TEOM 1405 DF o U vu T g 2 2 2 gt 5 E 5 lt 5 T d zzzszi2p s 3 5 gii sls a sisi al ai ele amp 2 rz le le eS SSS 2 3 5 3 8 Teddington Sun 31 Jan 10 10 00 12 2 13 0 17 3 16 9 10 1 10 2 14 0 13 5 00 91 2 1 3 01 2 4 Average of 4 1405Fs Teddington 01 Feb 10 10 00 8 4 8 3 14 7 14 4 83 9 3 15 0 16 0 31 839 07 04 27 Average of 4 1405Fs Teddington Tue 02 Feb 10 10 00 83 8 3 12 0 11 7 86 9 3 11 9 12 6 59 896 43 03 3 3 Average of 4 1405Fs Teddington Wed 03 Feb 10 10 00 9 4 9 3 19 2 19 2 10 3 10 3 17 4 17 6 67 91 0 53 0 2 3 2 Average of 4 1405Fs Teddington Thu 04 Feb 10 10 00 12 0 12 4 19 7 19 8 13 3 13 0 19 7 19 6 7 6 86 1 54 1 3 3 8 Average of 4 1405Fs Teddington Fri 05 Feb 10 10 00 7 2 84 9 4 8 0 6 2 3 Average of Teddington and Bloomsbury 8500s Inlet gt Zero filter Teddington Sat 06 Feb 10 10 00 5 1 89 7 3 5 0 6 5 2 Average of Teddington and Bloomsbury 8500s Zero filter Teddington Sun 07 Feb 10 10 00 3 8 851 1 5 0 8 7 1 Average of Teddington and Bloomsbury 8500s Zero filter Teddington Mon 08 Feb 10 10 00 14 4 14 5 19 4 20 2 1
131. 5 reference method Teddington 52 Figure 28 Grubbs test results for PM 5 reference method Cologne Winter 52 Figure 29 Grubbs test results for the reference method Bornheim 53 Figure 30 Grubbs test results for the reference method Bornheim Winter 53 Figure 31 Results of the parallel measurements with the candidates SN 20014 SN 20116 measured component all test sites sss nnns 59 Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 8 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 BUREAU VERITAS Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the PM25 TEOM 1405 DF Figure 32 Results of the parallel measurements with the candidates SN 20014 SN 20116 measured component PM s all 5 60 Figure 33 Results of the parallel measurements with the candidates SN 20014 SN 20116 measured component PM s test Site 60 Figure 34 Results of the parallel measurements with the candidates SN 20014 SN 20116 measured component PM 5 test site Cologne Winter sess 61 Figure 35 Results of the parallel measurements with the candidates SN 20014 SN 20116 measured component PM test site Bornheim Summter eese 61 Figure 36 Results of the parallel measureme
132. 508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific BUREAU UK Report on the Equivalence of the and PM25 TEOM 1405 DF CONCLUSIONS 16 Discussion Relative to Data Quality Objectives Air Quality Directive 2008 50 has two data quality objectives for Particulate Matter One is that the uncertainty is below 25 and the other is that the minimum data capture is 90 The mechanisms to prove these are set out in GDE2010 and MCERTS for UK Particulate Matter and these mechanisms have been followed herein The uncertainty was demonstrated to be below 25 in Section 12 3 The minimum data capture was demonstrated to be above 90 in Section 11 As such the data quality objectives have been fully achieved Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 98 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the and PM TEOM 1405 DF 17 Overall Conclusions TEOM 1405 DF fully meets the requirements set out in MCERTS for UK Particulate Matter for both 0 and The pollution climate calculations Section 15 show that the requirements for the sites to be of a similar pollution climate to the UK and for there to be a suitable range of wind speed temperature dew point and volatile components are all met The field test sites utilised cover urban background rural and traffic locations We propose therefore that this instrument is suitable for use at urban background rural and traffic
133. 508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the and 5 TEOM 1405 DF Algorithms for the calculation of intercepts as well as slopes and their variances by orthogonal regression are described in detail in the 2010 GDE With respect to b The value of the slope b may be used as a factor to correct all input values y according to the following equation yi b The resulting values of may then be used to calculate the following new terms by linear regression y i corr Vicor Car dx RSS Uc a 1 x u b with u b uncertainty of the original slope b the value of which has been used to obtain yi corr Algorithms for the calculation of intercepts as well as slopes and their variances by orthogonal regression are described in detail in the 2010 GDE With respect to c The values of the slope b and of the intercept a may be used as correction terms to correct all input values y according to the following equation b The resulting values of Yicor may then be used to calculate the following new terms by linear regression y i corr dx 5 _ RSS Ue Aaa kr 2 with u b uncertainty of the original slope b the value of which has been used to obtain and with u a uncertainty of the original intercept a the value of which has been used to obtain u x c 4 d 1 F
134. 51 8 55 5 60 2 68 1 73 9 81 3 72 1 83 2 68 2 63 0 65 8 70 4 56 1 57 8 58 5 69 7 55 8 25 m q 1ueiquy 10 3 11 2 11 1 5 9 7 0 5 4 7 4 11 2 5 1 9 4 10 8 8 3 7 5 11 1 14 1 12 2 11 2 12 5 12 7 12 3 9 7 8 6 10 5 9 3 5 8 7 0 9 4 9 0 3 9 SM ui Drl ejejoA 1 2 3 0 0 3 2 5 1 4 2 4 2 3 1 8 10 23 0 4 2 4 06 17 10 1 6 1 6 0 9 0 6 22 0 4 4 4 0 7 3 6 16 24 0 5 4 4 0 4 5 6 0 6 3 1 0 5 27 0 5 1 6 11 28 18 32 0 5 1 6 0 7 0 9 0 7 1 5 1 5 1 2 1 8 1 8 1 9 1 5 1 6 1 6 1 1 1 9 1 5 0 9 Page 125 SOJON Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of Teddington and Bloomsbury 8500s Average of Teddington and Bloomsbury 8500s Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs VERITAS yew y Zero filter Zero filter gt Inlet No ref measurement PM2 5 Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the PM25 TEOM 1405 DF eus Teddington Teddington Tedding
135. 6 38 4 38 9 50 6 28 8 32 6 38 9 39 0 32 2 28 5 16 0 13 4 35 5 66 8 49 9 38 4 29 1 18 4 16 4 15 6 13 2 1002 NS 16 7 26 3 20 5 36 1 46 1 47 1 58 8 32 5 39 7 47 2 49 9 38 2 31 7 18 4 15 6 43 3 75 2 61 7 50 5 42 8 30 1 32 6 31 7 16 5 OLINd 91102 NS 16 8 26 0 21 3 36 3 46 1 47 3 57 2 32 0 39 3 47 4 50 5 38 2 32 0 19 3 14 9 43 3 75 5 60 7 49 3 42 7 29 5 32 8 32 7 16 5 jusiquy HH 81 1 87 5 86 9 86 7 76 8 78 4 73 6 67 1 65 5 56 2 59 6 94 2 87 1 86 0 86 0 83 3 69 9 54 7 50 4 67 8 73 4 52 4 34 2 54 0 75 8 68 9 69 5 61 6 77 3 Os m q 1ueiquy SM ui Drl ejejoA 4 2 2 5 3 5 1 4 1 7 1 5 4 5 4 1 3 1 3 0 5 0 2 6 3 4 4 3 3 9 0 9 2 1 2 2 1 4 1 2 2 2 1 9 5 1 2 3 3 5 5 3 3 8 3 3 3 0 2 0 1 6 Page 127 16 0 3 2 2 8 6 2 4 8 6 4 2 8 SOJON Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405 5 Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405 5 Average of 4 1405 5 Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Nitrate is 2011 ion data on this date Nitrate is 2011 ion data on this date Nitrate is 2011 ion data
136. 6 1 76 8 76 8 85 3 82 4 85 4 Os m q 1ueiquy 0 1 1 7 0 1 2 6 3 2 2 1 1 7 2 0 0 5 1 1 SM 0 5 1 2 0 5 0 4 1 5 1 6 2 4 2 3 1 0 2 6 1 3 4 2 2 9 3 1 2 4 3 0 2 6 2 1 1 5 2 3 3 3 4 6 3 7 3 8 5 7 2 6 2 0 ui Drl ejejoA 3 0 1 6 2 3 3 8 Page 134 SOJON Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405 5 Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405 5 Average of 4 1405 5 Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Nitrate is 2011 ion data on this date Nitrate is 2011 ion data on this date Nitrate is 2011 ion data on this date VERITAS yew y Inlet gt Zero filter Zero filter Zero filter Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the PM25 TEOM 1405 DF eus Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim W
137. 7 Figure 2 6 4 Flow splitter Bottom of the flow splitter Bypass tube 1 2 inch sample tube nut A 4 Sample tube Figure 2 7 Measuring the distance from the top of the sample tube to the top of the flow splitter THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Operatine TEOM 1405 DF 2 7 Section 2 SETUP AND INSTALLATION Assembling the Tripod Figure 2 8 Placing the metal bracket on the tripod foot 2 8 Operatine TEOM 1405 DF An optional tripod is available for installation on the roof of a sampling building To assemble the tripod 1 Locate a tripod foot and remove the rubber leg holder if one is attached Place one leg of the tripod onto the tripod foot Place a metal bracket over the rubber base of the tripod leg and into the two slots on the tripod foot Figure 2 8 Ensure that the bracket is placed over the rubber base on the end of the tripod leg Insert a plain washer then a lock washer onto each threaded end of the bracket then install the nuts on the threaded ends of the bracket and tighten them with a 3 8 or adjustable wrench Note Hand tighten both nuts on the bracket before tightening them with the wrench to ensure that the bracket is positioned properly on the tripod leg and tripod foot a Repeat steps 1 through 4 for each leg of the tripod THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC 2 SETUP AND INSTALLATION Installing the Inlet To install the inlet and virtual im
138. 8 17 5 30 6 29 6 24 9 13 2 Z ESAT OLWd 15 3 13 8 15 7 11 0 23 8 29 4 9 0 9 5 11 6 13 3 36 8 83 7 94 0 73 6 24 7 20 4 11 4 15 0 18 8 31 3 30 6 26 7 14 1 71002 NS 12 5 12 1 11 1 8 8 19 3 27 0 11 4 12 7 8 5 9 1 9 0 65 0 21 6 14 5 7 4 5 0 9 1 10 7 18 2 22 4 20 8 11 1 15 6 gui Brl 91102 NS 11 4 11 2 8 6 10 4 8 0 17 9 24 8 10 4 11 6 6 5 7 6 8 0 62 9 20 9 14 0 6 5 4 9 9 3 11 3 17 5 22 3 20 2 12 0 15 4 1002 NS 19 4 21 0 17 3 19 8 15 3 28 0 38 2 20 4 22 8 12 5 13 6 15 1 78 8 25 1 20 4 12 6 8 7 14 7 19 5 29 9 30 6 26 2 12 9 19 7 91102 NS 18 5 20 3 16 8 19 4 16 2 27 4 35 7 20 6 22 5 10 8 12 2 14 1 78 0 24 5 19 9 11 8 8 7 15 2 20 7 30 2 31 2 26 2 14 2 19 6 jusiquy 15 6 19 8 21 5 21 8 21 3 21 9 21 1 22 8 23 2 21 5 20 1 21 9 0 2 1 8 2 1 3 4 3 8 2 3 0 8 4 3 9 9 11 0 8 2 9 8 3 2 6 1 8 7 8 9 6 0 HH 55 8 55 1 50 1 52 4 54 7 56 1 63 2 50 3 43 9 70 2 63 2 58 8 72 1 77 0 77 0 83 9 86 9 88 2 88 6 83 0 72 4 71 2 69 5 60 9 77 0 67 6 84 2 93 5 89 8 25 UOd m q 1ueiquy SM ui Drl ejejoA 21 5 7 3 4 6 4 4 3 2 4 7 1 1 7 2 0 1 6 11 28 5 3 5 9 4 5 4 2 Page 126 S ON Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs
139. 8 green tubing for bypass flow 10 3 8 green tubing to pump 5 m 16 5 ft 5 Sample tubing extensions 1 m 40 1 Sample tubing extension 79 m 31 Box of 20 TEOM filter cartridges Pallflex TX40 Filter exchange tool 1 package FDMS filter cassettes Box of 25 47mm filters for FDMS 1 small filter element 1 large bypass filter element Flow splitter PM 10 inlet Sample inlet tube Virtual impactor Water trap filter assembly Flow audit adapter leak check kit Cooler cleaning kit 2 Y adapters orifice Vacuum pump 2 Operating Manuals one hard copy one on CD Quick Start Guide Pre filter silicone tubing Operatine TEOM 1405 DF 2 3 Section 2 SETUP AND INSTALLATION Pum p Connections rollowthese steps to attach the pump 1 Locate and cut the piece of the 15m green tubing into two pieces one about but not less than 5m the lengths may be precut The typical setup has 5m of tubing for the pump and 10m for the bypass line 2 Locate the sample pump in a location to minimize vibrations effecting the instrument Push the one end of the 5m pump tubing into the fitting on the vacuum pump Figure 2 2 Figure 2 2 Vacuum pump 3 Install the other end of the 5m length of pump tubing into the pump connection on the back of the TEOM 1405 DF unit Figure 2 3 Figure 2 3 Back of TEOM 1405 DF unit To water trap filter Pump connection Bypass filter 2 4 Operatine TEOM 1405 D
140. 8 0 19 0 24 4 13 8 17 1 5 6 7 9 10 8 12 1 11 4 6 4 7 0 13 5 13 7 25 8 16 8 13 3 17 1 19 7 29 9 16 9 Z SA10LIAd vLO0Z NS G ZiNd 91102 NS gui Drl OLINd 100 NS 20 9 25 2 16 6 11 4 11 3 19 0 6 0 5 7 11 2 14 2 10 0 9 8 14 0 19 2 13 6 14 5 20 8 20 1 10 5 11 3 21 7 26 1 18 6 18 4 25 3 14 7 12 1 11 6 18 9 18 0 11 6 11 2 19 1 6 9 7 3 11 6 6 4 41 37 7 1 7 5 3 5 32 7 0 11 2 6 7 3 4 12 0 12 7 68 7 1 13 9 11 1 4 8 5 2 11 6 70 41 48 6 7 5 7 6 0 8 7 6 7 45 43 7 8 13 9 9 0 83 16 3 12 9 8 4 8 5 15 3 25 0 16 3 16 6 27 7 15 9 13 6 13 4 22 8 12 8 10 1 10 9 15 6 10 3 10 1 16 7 17 2 13 7 13 7 20 2 19 3 15 3 15 3 23 5 30 1 23 8 24 1 34 4 16 7 7 8 7 5 17 6 OLINd 91102 NS 19 3 11 8 14 3 22 7 24 2 26 5 19 8 19 9 12 9 7 4 7 5 9 9 15 1 13 3 7 9 9 7 8 2 17 0 16 7 29 9 24 5 17 4 17 6 21 2 24 8 36 3 19 1 jusiquy 17 7 16 9 14 5 13 4 19 1 23 2 19 7 22 3 20 6 19 3 17 8 15 5 13 8 18 0 20 9 18 5 20 1 17 4 17 9 19 1 21 1 22 5 16 8 20 7 23 2 20 4 22 6 20 1 HH 84 8 85 6 76 2 80 4 76 2 68 1 60 8 82 9 71 6 75 8 85 0 64 0 74 7 76 8 57 5 53 8 78 9 77 0 86 2 71 8 69 0 73 8 76 6 80 0 66 6 74 8 76 5 78 4 76 6 Os m q 1ueiquy 14 7 15 3 12 7 11 2 9 3 13 1 15 2 16 7 16 9 16 2 16 7 10 9 11 0 9 8 9 5 11 2 14 8 15 9 15 1 12 7 13 3 16 2 18 2 13 3 1
141. 9 _ 5 Volts 324 Jumper Test point Label Ground test point Figure 5 72 Close up of setting guide OUTPUT Setting guide Tie xm JUMPERS _ 2 5 Volts P4324 7 RAM 7 2 0 4 JP305 rm 1DA4 DAS Lu THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Operatinc TEOM 1405 DF 5 59 Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES 4 In the 1405 Data screen select the Service button to display the Service screen then select the Calibration button to display the Calibration screen Figure 5 49 5 Select the Analog Output Calibration button to start the Analog Output Calibration Wizard Figure 5 73 Select the Next gt button to begin the procedure Figure 5 73 Welcome to the Analog Output Welcome to the Analog Calibration Wizard screen Output Calibration Wizard This wizard hips you partonm analog output za bration on the TEOM Dichot Ambient Particulate Monitor continue press 6 The Select Channel to Calibrate screen will display Figure 5 74 Select which analog output channel you want to calibrate Select the Next gt button Figure 5 74 select Channel to Calibrate Select Channel to Calibrate screen Select the analog output channel you wish io calibrate To complete ihe wizard make sure no channels are selected and click Analog Ciuiput Channel 1 Analog Channel 2 Analog Channel 3
142. Air Quality Page 90 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the and PM TEOM 1405 DF Table 27 Summary of the results of the equivalence check SN 20014 amp SN 20116 measuring PM after intercept correction PM10 1405DF 25 3 gt 28 ug m 3 FDMS Intercept Corrected All Data 30 ug m3 gt 30 ug m3 SN 20014 Dataset Bornheim Winter Cologne Winter Individual Datasets Bornheim Summer Teddington lt 30 ug m3 Combined Datasets gt 30 ug m3 All Data SN 20116 Dataset Bornheim Winter Cologne Winter Individual Datasets Bornheim Summer Teddington Combined Datasets All Data Conclusion for UK Purposes Orthogonal Regression WOM 96 nc s r2 Slope b ub Intercept a ua 336 0 976 260 0 916 1 042 0 019 0 372 0 327 76 4 0 625 4 1 239 Orthogonal Regression Slope b ub Intercept a ua 0 993 1 057 0 011 0 076 0 313 0 985 1 027 0 015 0 504 0 523 0 977 1 109 0 020 1 426 0 406 0 930 0 875 0 021 2 102 0 442 Betw een Instrument Uncertainties Reference Candidate Limit Value of 50 ug m3 WCM gt 28 ug m3 38 1 55 4 10 7 9 7 0 908 1 043 0 020 0 369 0 342 10 59 3 5 0 935 1 042 0 031 1 222 1 376 13 21 100 0 0 973 1 021 0 009 0 068 0 241 9 82 25 3 Orthogonal Regression Slope b ub Intercept
143. Appendix A Troubleshooting This appendix includes the information on deciphering status codes and as well as key schematics for troubleshooting purposes Appendix Serial Communication This appendix includes information on the instrument s program register codes and built in AK protocol THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Application Range THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 1 INTRODUCTION The TEOM 1405 DF Monitor is a real time device used for measuring the mass concentrations of PM 2 5 PM 10 PM Coarse TEOM instruments are the only filter based mass monitors that measure the mass of particulate matter suspended in gas streams in real time This is made possible through the use of an inertial mass transducer patented in the U S and internationally by Thermo Fisher Scientific The monitor is ideally suited for applications demanding real time ait particulate matter monitoring in outdoor indoor or industrial settings It calculates mass concentration mass rate and the total mass accumulation on the TEOM filter under the following conditions Flow rate through sample inlet PM 2 5 flow rate PM Coartse flow rate Temperature of sample stream Particulate matter mass concentration 16 7 l min 1 m3 ht 3 l min 1 67 l min 30 C less than 5 ug m to several g m Operatine Guine TEOM 1405 DF 1 5 Section 1 INTRODUCTION Theory of Operation 1 6 Operatinc TEOM 1405 DF The 1405 DF Mon
144. Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Nitrate is 2011 ion data on this date Nitrate is 2011 ion data on this date Nitrate is 2011 ion data on this date Nitrate is 2011 ion data on this date Nitrate is 2011 ion data on this date Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs VERITAS yew y PM10 Grubbs outlier PM10 Grubbs outlier Audits Audits Zero filter Zero filter Zero filter Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the PM25 TEOM 1405 DF eus Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter eu pue ojeq uelis Sun 13 Feb 11 10 00 Mon 14 Feb 11 10 00 Tue 15 Feb 11 10 00 Wed 16 Feb 11 10 00 Thu 17 Feb 11 10 00 Fri 18 Feb 11 10
145. B port first copy the firmware upgrade files to the root folder of a standard USB flash drive The required files are etx dichotFDMS tar etx dichotFDMS kernel etx dichotFDMS USB rc 1 Recotd all important configuration information from the instrument This includes KO values instrument serial number data storage settings etc 2 Turn off the instrument 3 Open the front panel that contains the instrument display 4 Compare the inside of the instrument to the following figure If the instrument interface board matches the figure proceed to step 4 If the unit is an updated version close the front panel and continue with step 6 An updated interface board includes the text Thermo Fisher Scientific along the front edge of the board 5 Locate the Module Power Jumper on the interface board as indicated in Figure 4 34 and install a jumper across the pins One of the analog input jumpers may be temporarily used for this purpose 6 Insert the USB Flash Drive and turn on the instrument power 7 The instrument will automatically locate and install the necessary files from the USB flash drive and update the instrument firmware 8 At the end of the update process the instrument will pause for 20 seconds before a blank white screen appears Remove the USB Flash Drive The instrument will reboot automatically to complete the installation of the firmware 9 If you installed a jumper in step 4 above turn off the instrument po
146. Back of the 1405 unit Figure 2 23 right Pump 2 20 Operatine TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Water trap filter Pump compartment bulkhead connection 2 SETUP AND INSTALLATION Install the water trap filter and bracket into the two pre drilled holes on the side of the pump compartment Figure 2 24 Cut a 14 inch 35m piece of tubing from the 3 foot section that came with the enclosure package Place the pump in the enclosure and connect the elbow fitting on the pump Figure 2 23 to the elbow fitting on the inside of the pump compartment using the 14 inch piece of tubing Locate and cut the piece of the 15m green tubing that came in the 1405 packaging into two pieces one about but not less than 5m Install the one end of the 5m pump tubing into the quick connect fitting on the outside bulkhead wall of the pump compartment behind the water trap filter Figure 2 24 Place the 1405 unit into the enclosure install the other end of the 5m tubing that is connected to the bulkhead into the quick connect elbow fitting for the pump connection on the back of the 1405 unit Figure 2 22 Operatinc TEOM 1405 DF 2 21 Section 2 SETUP AND INSTALLATION Figure 2 25 left Sample connections inside enclosure Figure 2 26 right Sample connections on top of the enclosure PM 2 5 short sample tube Coarse 1m sample tu
147. Dynamic Measurement System FDMS with USEPA style 16 7 l min pre separator and virtual impactor herein referred to as the TEOM 1405 DF has been tested in compliance with the requirements set out in the Annex to the MCERTS Performance standards for Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Systems herein referred to as MCERTS for UK Particulate Matter The instrument is shown to meet the requirements and is suitable to be declared equivalent to the and PM25 reference methods in the United Kingdom UK TEOM 1405 DF Candidate Method CM was tested against the and PM25 Sven Leckel LVS3 European Reference Methods RM over a series of four field campaigns split between Germany three tests and the UK one test The operation of the instruments was undertaken by TUV Rheinland in Germany and the National Physical Laboratory NPL in the UK Both organisations have appropriate 15017025 accreditations which are included herein Section 5 Calculations of the between sampler uncertainties of the TEOM 1405 DF and the expanded uncertainties relative to the reference method were undertaken by Bureau Veritas BV These calculations were audited by TUV Rheinland BV has provided overall project management to the delivery of the programme in the UK A series of intensive laboratory tests was undertaken by TUV Rheinland that go beyond the requirements set out in MCERTS for UK Particulate Matter Additionally the instruments were leak tested
148. EAU VERITAS Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the PM and PM25 TEOM 1405 DF GENERAL INFORMATION 1 Summary of Principles of the Candidate Method 1 1 Measuring Principle The following text is copied with minor alterations from Section 3 1 of the TUV Rheinland Report The ambient air measuring system TEOM1405 DF Ambient Particulate Monitor is based on the measuring principle of oscillating micro weighing For the weighing principle which is used in the TEOM mass transducer in the measuring system TEOM 1405 DF Ambient Particulate Monitor the change in mass determined with the sensor results from the measurement of the change in frequency of the tapered element The tapered element at the heart of the mass detection system is a hollow tube clamped on one end and free to oscillate at the other An exchangeable TEOM filter cartridge is placed over the tip of the free end The sample stream is drawn through this filter and then down the tapered element Figure 1 Schematic set up of the mass transducer _ Exchangeable TEOM Fitter Cartridge Tapered Element requency Counter The tapered element oscillates precisely at its natural frequency An electronic control circuit senses this oscillation and through positive feedback adds sufficient energy to the system to overcome losses An automatic gain control circuit maintains the oscillation at a constant
149. F FDMS ug m 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Reference ug m Figure 55 Reference vs candidate SN 20014 measured component 5 Bornheim Winter a SN 20014 Bornheim Winter 1405DF FDMS ug m 50 60 70 80 90 100 Reference ug m Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 77 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the and TEOM 1405 DF gusta VERITAS io Figure 56 Reference vs candidate SN 20116 measured component PM 5 Bornheim Winter 4 SN20116 Bornheim Winter 5 1405DF FDMS ug m 50 60 70 80 90 100 Reference ug m Figure 57 Reference vs candidate SN 20014 measured component s values gt 18 uig m 4 SN20014 5 1405DF FDMS ug m 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 PM Reference ug m Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 78 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the and PM TEOM 1405 DF gusta VERITAS io Figure 58 Reference vs candidate SN 20116 measured component values gt 18 g m a SN20116 5 1405DF FDMS ug m 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Reference ug m Figure 59 Reference vs candidate SN 20014 amp SN 20116 measured component PMi all test sites Bornheim Winter Cologne Winter Bornheim Summer Teddington lt
150. F THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC 2 SETUP AND INSTALLATION 4 Mount the water trap filter assembly near the 1405 unit Figure 2 4 The water trap should be mounted at the low point of the tubing to the instrument Figure 2 4 Water trap filter assembly Quick connect fitting Water trap filter Note Drain the water trap as needed 5 From the 10m length of tubing for the bypass line cut a piece of tubing long enough to reach from the water trap filter to the bypass filter on the back of the 1405 unit Figure 2 3 and 2 4 Install the tubing into the quick connect fittings on the water trap filter and bypass filter 6 Insert one end of the remaining section of bypass tubing into the quick connect fitting at the end of the coiled piece of tubing connected to the water trap filter Note The other end of the bypass tubing will be connected to the bypass connection on the flow splitter when you assemble and install the sample inlet and virtual impactor following section Note Thermo Scientific strongly recommends that you use the vacuum pump provided with the unit If you choose to install a different pump it must be oil free and able to maintain a 21 Hg vacuum at a flow of 16 67 l min THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Operatine Guine TEOM 1405 DF 2 5 Section 2 SETUP AND INSTALLATION Adjusting the An isokinetic flow splitter Figures 2 5 and 2 6 is used in combination Flow Splitter with an automatic fl
151. Figure 4 29 TEOM Data TEOM 1405 DF System Status System Status Operating mode Stabilizing ASz37 mode Hang Vacuum pump pressure 0 0 zum Enciosure temperature nog Inztrument Protection level Linlac ed F address 152 188 159 129 Serial number 234587890 Instrument firmare version 0 82 Settings Service gh Sene Homa states a THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 4 SCREENS AND SETTINGS 4 Use the ePort PC software to connect to the instrument refer to Section 3 for information on connection to the instrument 5 In the ePort Main screen Figure 4 30 select Upgrade Instrument Figure 4 30 Software ePort Main screen 1405A200100605 DichotFDMS Serial erben 1406430109505 IP Address 10 210 96 145 States Ative Cormaands Det ads Deevricac Date Decenboad folder Location Program Ple TharnolaPorti domsloads Cesbled Interface min e imtrurart Presa M Cored eun I Lest Downkosd or Selected Date and Tine Next dosasisad wil start with dete alter 31 Jen 2007 62620 Note Data will not be collected during the upload procedure and the instrument will be restarted THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Operatinc TEOM 1405 DF 4 37 Section 4 SCREENS AND SETTINGS 6 The Thermo 1405 Installer Wizard screen will display Figure 4 31 Select the Next gt button Figure 4 31 TRL T
152. H 81 5 84 3 84 8 85 5 81 9 77 0 83 7 87 4 81 0 78 6 85 6 81 0 81 2 75 8 62 8 53 6 50 2 69 0 69 8 57 9 57 8 61 6 68 4 81 1 25 Meg 1ueiquiy 3 4 0 7 4 8 0 9 4 4 2 7 1 7 0 4 0 4 0 7 0 1 1 3 3 2 3 9 8 8 13 2 15 6 13 2 13 0 14 8 15 7 13 7 10 6 8 1 s w SM ejhejoA 0 5 4 5 1 5 5 0 4 1 3 1 31 2 8 5 3 2 5 4 7 1 2 3 0 1 8 0 9 3 0 3 9 5 0 41 6 1 1 1 3 7 0 9 3 9 1 4 6 9 1 5 7 1 2 0 5 4 2 2 5 4 1 5 4 1 1 0 5 6 1 0 7 9 17 52 1 1 4 6 18 42 0 8 52 1 6 6 9 Page 136 Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs VERITAS TEOM 1405 DF Dichotomous Ambient Particulate Monitor with FDMS Option 42 010815 Revision A 003 16Sep2009 This documentation contains trade secrets and confidential information proprietary to Thermo Fisher Scientific The software supplied with the instrumentation documentation and any information contained therein may not be us
153. He Moise Serice Stosiising statis Status bar Note This screen shows the data for U S EPA FEM Refer to Section 4 to set the equivalency calculations for the local region THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Operatine TEOM 1405 DF 3 1 Section 3 Basic OPERATION Starting the Instrument 3 2 Operatine TEOM 1405 DF To program the instrument and begin collecting data Perform a leak check refer to the following section for leak check information Install a TEOM filter into the mass transducer on both TEOMs Section 5 Install both 47 mm filters into the FDMS tower Section 5 When in the System Status screen ensure that the serial number listed for the instrument matches the serial number on the back of the unit When in the Instrument Conditions screen select the Flows button to display the Flows screen Verify flow rate set points for the PM 2 5 PM Course and Bypass flows are 3 LPM 1 67 LPM and 12 LPM respectively Select the Flow Control button to select the desired flow control Active or Passive and the desired standard and average temperatures and pressures Refer to Section 4 for more information on screens and settings When in the Settings screen select the System button then the Set Time button to set the current date and time Refer to Section 4 for more information on screens and settings When in the Settings screen sel
154. LLO2 rc 1102 62 6 102 276 1102 91 6 LLOC OL E L0 6 6 102 0 6 LLOc E E concentrations at the test site Bornheim motorway parking LL0c 9c 8 LLOc vc c 102 61 8 L LOZ ZL Z L LOZ ZL 8 02 01 6 102 4 8 0 1102 62 t LOZ ZZ 4 102 2 2 E E Gg Q 2 o E 9 T o n S o E ES Time Series of the PM lot summer OLINd 2U09 ul 2 Figure 17 Figure 18 Page 43 Bureau Veritas Air Quality AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the and TEOM 1405 DF Figure 19 Time Series of the PM concentrations at the test site Bornheim motorway parking lot Winter 100 Conc 10 Ref in ug m 11 14 2011 E 11 22 2011 11 30 2011 12 8 2011 12 16 2011 12 24 2011 1 9 2012 1 17 2012 1 25 2012 2 2 2012 The following figures show the measuring cabinet at the field test sites Teddington Cologne parking lot and Bornheim motorway parking lot Figure 20 Field test site Teddington Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 44 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the
155. MO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Operatine Guine TEOM 1405 DF 3 5 Section 3 Basic OPERATION Figure 3 4 Back of 1405 DF unit Pump connection 6 The Stabilizing screen will display Allow 1 minute for the flows to stabilize then select the Next gt button 7 The Reconnect Vacuum Line screen will display Reinstall the pump vacuum tubing into the back of the unit Select the Next gt button 8 The Remove Inlet screen will display Remove the inlet Figure 3 5 Select the Next gt button 3 6 Operatine TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 3 Basic OPERATION Figure 3 5 Inlet assembly Inlet Figure 3 6 Leak check adapter Sample inlet tube Valve closed Leak check adapter _ 9 The Attach Audit Adapter screen will display Attach the leak check flow audit adapter to the top of the sample tube 10 Slowly close the valve on the leak check adapter Select the Next gt button 11 The Stabilizing screen will display Allow 1 minute for the flows to stabilize then select the Next gt button 12 Slowly open the leak check adapter valve Select the Next gt button Failure to release the vacuum before proceeding may damage the seals in the switching valve THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Operatine Guine TEOM 1405 DF 3 7 Section 3 Basic OPERATION 13 The Select Valve Position screen will once again display this time with the just completed valve position unavail
156. Operatine TEOM 1405 DF A 1 Appendix A Troubleshooting Table 1 1405 DF Status Codes A 2 Code Warning Decimal Reason for warning 0x40000000 RH High Side A 1 073 741 824 gt 98 0x20000000 Dryer A 536 870 912 gt 2 0x10000000 Cooler A 268 435 456 0 5 C deviation 0x08000000 Exchange Filter A 134 217 728 90 0x04000000 Flow A 67 108 864 1096 deviation 0x02000000 Heaters Side A 33 554 432 gt 2 deviation 0 01000000 Mass Transducer 16 777 216 frequency lt 10 Hz 0x00400000 RH High Side B 4 194 304 gt 98 0x00200000 Dryer B 2 097 152 gt 2 0x00100000 Cooler B 1 048 576 0 5 C deviation 0x00080000 Exchange Filter B 524 288 90 0x00040000 Flow B 262 144 1096 deviation 0x00020000 Heaters Side B 131 072 296 deviation 0x00010000 Mass Transducer B 65 536 frequency 10 Hz 0x00004000 User 1 0 Device 16 384 0x00002000 FDMS Device 8 192 0x00001000 Head 1 4 096 0x00000800 Head 0 2 048 0x00000400 MFC 1 Device 1 024 0x00000200 MFC 0 Device 512 0x000001 00 System Bus 256 0x00000080 Vacuum Pressure 128 Ambient Vac lt 0 1 atm 0x00000040 Case or Cap Heater 64 gt 2 deviation 0x00000020 FDMS Valve 32 0x00000010 Bypass Flow 16 gt 10 deviation 0x00000008 Ambient RH amp Temp Sensor 8 Ambient RH amp temp sensor disconnected 0x00000004 Database 4 Unable to log to the database 0x0000000
157. Range Average Ambient pressure kPa Range Average 979 1037 1009 992 1031 1013 995 1024 1008 976 1031 1012 Rel humidity 96 Range Average 43 9 98 3 77 2 34 2 94 2 67 53 8 91 1 75 1 50 2 94 4 79 0 Wind velocity m s Range Average Precipitation mm Range Average Bureau Veritas Air Quality AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Page 46 Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the and 5 TEOM 1405 DF 10 Description of Equipment and Test Procedures The following text is based upon Section 4 3 of the TUV Rheinland Report Equipment Deployed The field test was carried out with two identical systems with the serial numbers Device 1 SN 20014 Device 2 SN 20116 The following additional equipment was used for the field test Measurement cabinet of TUV Rheinland for the TEOM 1405 DFs Air conditioned to approximately 20 Measurement trailer of Defra for the LVS3s Air conditioned to approximately 20 Weather station WS 500 manufactured ELV Elektronik AG German sites MK III series manufactured by Rainwise Bar Harbor Maine USA UK Sites for the determination of meteorological characteristics such as air temperature air pressure air humidity wind velocity wind direction and rainfall Two reference samplers LVS3 for Manufacturer Sven Leckel Gmbh Two reference samplers LVS3 f
158. TEOM B Total Mass 395 TEOM A FEM XX Hr Mass Conc 241 TEOM A Filter Pressure 328 TEOM B Raw Mass Conc 396 TEOM A FEM 12 Hr Mass Conc 242 TEOM A Filter Load 329 Mass Conc 397 TEOM A FEM 24 Hr Mass Conc 243 TEOM A Total Mass 332 TEOM B 30 Min Mass Conc 244 TEOM A Raw Mass Conc 333 TEOM B 1 Hr Mass Conc 245 TEOM A Mass Conc 334 TEOM B XX Hr Mass Conc 248 TEOM A 30 Min Mass Conc 335 TEOM B 12 Hr Mass Conc 249 TEOM A 1 Hr Mass Conc 336 TEOM B 24 Hr Mass Conc 250 TEOM A XX Hr Mass Conc 337 TEOM B Mass Rate 251 TEOM A 12 Hr Mass Conc 341 TEOM B Frequency 252 TEOM A 24 Hr Mass Conc 342 TEOM B Noise 253 TEOM A Mass Rate 343 TEOM B KO 257 TEOM A Frequency 344 TEOM B KO Audit 258 TEOM A Noise 351 TEOM B Flow Calibration Date 259 TEOM A KO 352 TEOM B Verification Date 260 TEOM A KO Audit 353 Dichot Total Mass 267 TEOM A Flow Calibration Date 354 Dichot Mass Conc Thermo Fisher Scientific SERIAL COMMUNICATION AK Protocol Ask Register Command AREG COM 2 WAY SETTINGS RS Para 1 ASCII code for the 1 digit Station Number for example 4 052 The Station Number is always 1 digit in length ASCII code representation of the 2 digit Channel Number for example KO 075 048 The Channel Number is always 2 digits in length RS Para 3 13010 Optional Up to 3 ASCII codes can be added to response from the instrument In this case CR and lt LF gt ASCII codes 013 and 010 are appended to the res
159. TO REPAIR OR REPLACE A DEFECTIVE PRODUCT SHALL BE THE SOLE REMEDY OF BUYER IN THE EVENT OF A DEFECTIVE PRODUCT EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PROVIDED IN THIS SECTION 9 SELLER DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED ORAL OR WRITTEN WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCTS INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE SELLER DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE PRODUCTS ARE ERROR FREE OR WILL ACCOMPLISH ANY PARTICULAR RESULT Safety Notice Repair of instrumentation manufactured by Thermo Scientific should only be attempted by properly trained service personnel and should only be conducted in accordance with the Thermo Scientific system documentation Do not tamper with this hardware High voltages may be present in all instrument enclosures Use established safety precautions when working with this instrument The seller cannot foresee all possible modes of operation in which the user may attempt to use this instrumentation The user assumes all liability associated with the use of this instrumentation The seller further disclaims any responsibility for consequential damages Use of this product in any manner not intended by the manufacturer will void the safety protection provided by the equipment and may damage the equipment and subject the user to injury Preface Equipment Rating The following information can be used to determine the power service FUSES Ref Designation Main Fuse 2 F201
160. Table 30 Site Name Country Site Classification number of days number of calendar days prescribed range and geometric mean for reference method measurements of PM made in each site employed for the testing of the PM25 TEOM 1405 DF PM25 calculations for Cologne Chorwelier are also shown ee Dee eee Days Calendar Days Allowed Range Cologne Parking Lot Germany Urban Background Traffic Suburban Urban Background Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 94 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 9 BUREAU VERITAS Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the PM25 TEOM 1405 DF Table 31 Site Name Country Site Classification number of days number of calendar days prescribed range and geometric mean for reference method measurements of made in each site employed for the testing of the TEOM 1405 DF calculations for Cologne Chorwelier are also shown com a Allowed Range nee Parking Lot Germany Urban Background Traffic Suburban Urban Background 15 3 Volatile Wind Speed Ambient Temperature and Ambient Dew Point Calculations Ambient Temperature relative humidity and wind speed measurements were obtained from meteorological stations collocated with the instruments The anemometer height was 2 5 m above ground in the UK test sites and 4 5 m in above ground in the German test sites The German anemometer was assumed to be 5 m above g
161. The manual for the TEOM 1405 F is given in Appendix F The tested measuring unit consists of PM sampling inlet virtual impactor flow splitter the respective sampling tubes a tripod to support the sample tubes the measuring device TEOM 1405 DF including FDMS tower the vacuum pump with its respective power supply cord and cables as well as adapters the roof lead through including a flange and a manual in German English The testing was performed with software version 1 51 2009 During the testing the software was constantly developed and optimized up to the version 1 55 During the development problems with the touch screen display were resolved e g there have been problems with the button reboot during a possible system crash Finally the manufacturer Thermo Fisher Scientific carried out a further update of the software to the now current version 1 56 The carried out modifications from 1 55 to 1 56 comprise the following points As default the measuring devices record each 6 minutes the updated moving hourly average values In the past the measuring system started immediately after reaching the status ready for measurement with the determination and recording of the measured values in the 6 min interval without taking care of a correct synchronization to the full hour Because of this sometimes no exact synchronization of the measured values to the full hour was possible This is now changed by the software update so
162. Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the and 5 TEOM 1405 DF June 2013 Move Forward with Confidence This page is left blank intentionally BUREAU DOCUMENT CONTROL SHEET Issue Revision Final Version Date 5 June 2013 Submitted to Henk Oele Prepared by Dr David Harrison Signature Approved by Dr Richard Maggs Signature Project number AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Disclaimer This Report was completed by Bureau Veritas on the basis of a defined programme of work and terms and conditions agreed with the Client Bureau Veritas confirms that in preparing this Report it has exercised all reasonable skill and care taking into account the project objectives the agreed scope of works prevailing site conditions and the degree of manpower and resources allocated to the project Bureau Veritas accepts no responsibility to any parties whatsoever following the issue of the Report for any matters arising outside the agreed scope of the works This Report is issued in confidence to the Client and Bureau Veritas has no responsibility to any third parties to whom this Report may be circulated in part or in full and any such parties rely on the contents of the report solely at their own risk Unless specifically assigned or transferred within the terms of the agreement the consultant asserts and retains all Copyright and other Intellectual Property Ri
163. XP sp2 o Windows 2000 sp3 and sp4 o Windows 2003 Server BEFORE installing rp Communicator EXIT this installation and install the Critical Windows Updates http windowsupdate microsoft com 7 5 The Customer Information screen will display Type in the information and select the Next gt button Operatine TEOM 1405 DF 3 15 Section 3 Basic OPERATION 6 The Ready to Install Program screen will display Figure 3 17 Select the Install button Figure 3 17 appre Ready to Install the Program screen Ready to Install the Program The wizard is ready to begin installation If you want to review or change any of your installation settings click Back Click Cancel to exit the wizard Current Settings Setup Type Destination Folder C Program Files Thermo User Information Name Company 7 The wizard will post messages showing the progress of the installation When the process is complete the Finish screen will display Figure 3 18 Select the Finish button sete i ePort 0 12 8 InstallShield Wizard Completed screen InstallShield Wizard Completed The InstallShield Wizard has successfully installed ePort 0 12 8 Click Finish to exit the wizard 3 16 Operatine TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 3 Basic OPERATION 8 If the PC does not have an up to date version of Microsoft NET Framework software the system will automatically begin installing that
164. ZNd 6 4 12 0 6 1 9 7 7 3 8 2 5 0 4 0 13 2 15 2 12 4 9 0 17 8 17 3 7 3 4 0 4 5 11 3 7 8 6 6 9 7 7 2 2 9 5 0 4 1 3 7 Z ESAT L ESAT OLNd 6 2 9 0 5 7 9 3 12 4 17 5 6 9 15 6 9 2 19 1 7 3 8 0 8 2 14 4 4 9 10 5 3 9 8 2 13 0 20 6 15 5 20 0 11 9 17 7 8 8 15 5 17 9 26 0 16 4 23 8 6 4 11 6 37 7 8 4 4 9 2 9 8 15 5 7 6 10 4 6 6 13 4 9 9 17 4 6 2 13 4 3 1 10 2 4 6 10 8 4 5 7 1 Z SA10LWd 71002 NS gui Drl 91102 NS oo NO o YN 13 7 13 7 8 9 8 4 9 9 9 2 7 7 7 2 6 0 5 5 15 1 13 8 18 6 16 8 15 2 14 2 10 5 10 2 22 6 20 7 21 5 19 5 11 6 10 5 6 5 5 7 6 7 6 6 13 4 12 2 10 1 9 2 10 8 8 8 9 8 8 4 11 5 10 9 9 5 8 3 6 3 4 8 7 1 6 1 6 7 6 3 8 0 6 4 6 0 5 5 9 t LO0Z NS 14 4 20 0 18 9 16 0 12 9 10 7 22 1 22 4 20 9 17 8 32 3 29 4 17 5 10 2 10 7 17 7 14 0 15 1 16 0 19 9 16 0 13 5 14 3 12 0 16 3 12 1 gui Brl OLINd 91102 NS 12 5 14 2 20 4 19 0 15 7 13 2 10 4 21 2 21 0 20 1 18 1 31 0 28 0 16 5 9 6 11 1 17 0 13 4 13 4 14 9 19 8 15 3 12 5 13 8 12 2 15 1 12 0 duie 1ueiquiy 21 7 20 5 15 0 13 2 13 3 15 2 14 1 14 6 14 3 13 0 17 4 17 5 20 3 22 1 18 2 15 8 15 7 17 8 15 2 15 5 15 6 16 9 14 6 14 4 15 2 17 6 14 5 12 5 9e HH 60 0 51 3 54 6 54 5 66 0 58 9 59 6 82 5 52 9 72 1 86 7 55 2
165. able Select the second valve position Figure 3 8 and select the Next gt button Figure 3 7 Leak Check Wizard screen with completed valve position unavailable Figure 3 8 Leak Check Wizard screen with second valve position 14 The Replace Inlet screen will display Slowly open the leak check valve to restore flow to the system Remove the flow audit leak check adapter and attach the inlet to the top of the sample inlet tube Figure 3 5 Select the Next gt button 3 8 Operatine TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 3 Basic OPERATION After completing the leak check with the FDMS in both the base and reference positions the select valve position screen will again appear but this time with both valve position buttons disabled Select the Next gt button Figure 3 9 67 Leak Check Wizard screen with both valve positions disabled 15 The Completing the Leak Check Wizard screen will display If the leak check passes a You have successfully completed the Leak Check message will display Figure 3 9 THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Operatine Guine TEOM 1405 DF 3 9 Section 3 Basic OPERATION Figure 3 10 Leak Check Wizard finish screen with pass message Complete Leak Check Wizard The Leak check was successlul Replace te liberis ini ihe mass transducer nas pax IE Referers PES fim mi od ond
166. aboratories Involved 27 LABORATORY TEST PROGRAMME iere otn et 28 6 Parameters Tested in the Laboratory 28 f Laboratory Test Procedures Used Ee eet egre EE Ern 29 8 Laboratory Test Results certc age eR RC 29 FIELD EQUIVALENCE TEST 40 9 Field Test Locations Periods and 4 0 0 0 40 10 Description of Equipment and Test 47 11 Data Availability of the Candidate 55 12 Field Test Uncertainty 57 12 1 Titifejeli 57 12 2 Determination of uncertainty between systems under test Ups 57 12 3 Calculation of the expanded uncertainty of the 67 12 4 Application of correction factors and 87 13 Discussion on the number of Reference Methods 92 14 Discussion on the number of UK Field Tests enn 92 PARTICULATE MATTER POLLUTION CLIMATE 93 15 Pollution Climate
167. acquisition system Ethernet and RS232 ports allow for communication over a network or serial communications Operatine TEOM 1405 DF 1 1 Figure 1 1 Schematic of typical installation Inlet Virtual impactor Flow splitter Tripod FDMS tower TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Operatine TEOM 1405 DF 1 2 THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 1 INTRODUCTION The sensor unit contains the two mass measurement hardware systems that monitor particles that continuously accumulate on both PM 2 5 and PM Coarse particulate filters PM Coarse and PM 2 5 particulate split by a virtual impactor each accumulate on the system s exchangeable TEOM filters By maintaining a flow rate of 1 67 l min through the coarse sample flow channel and 3 1 min through the PM 2 5 sample channel and measuting the total mass accumulated on each of the TEOM filters the device can calculate the mass concentrations of PM 2 5 PM Coarse and PM 10 sample streams in near real time In addition the TEOM 1405 DF monitor is equipped with the FDMS System The FDMS system is composed of the following components air chiller filter dryer and a switching valve that is used to direct the sample flows through system The FDMS Filter Dynamics Measurement System provides a representative determination of the particulate matter PM mass concentration as it exists in the ambient air The FDMS unit automatically generat
168. acturer s leak test specifications Note 3 A study of pollution climate relevant to sites in the UK and Germany has demonstrated that in all cases the particulate geometric mean criteria are met and at least one site meets the lower threshold and higher threshold criterion for wind speed ambient temperature ambient dew point and semi volatile nitrate content The pollution climate criteria are satisfied for all the equivalence tests Note 4 For the purposes of quality control of these monitors in the field as with all PM instruments that are not the reference method the 1405 series FDMSs should be calibrated on a test site at intervals against the gravimetric reference methods EN 12341 or EN 14907 as applicable and as given in the recommendations of the GDE 2010 and CEN TS16450 5 CEN Standard EN 12341 1998 Air Quality Determination of the fraction of suspended particulate matter Reference method and field test procedure to demonstrate reference equivalence of measurement methods 6 CEN Standard EN 14907 2005 Reference Gravimetric Measurement Method for the Determination of the gt 5 mass fraction of suspended particulate matter in Ambient Air 7 Guidance for the Demonstration of Equivalence of Ambient Air Monitoring Methods EC Equivalence Group January 2010 http ec europa eu environment air quality legislation pdf equivalence paf Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 16 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 BUR
169. ampling inlet Two reference devices each for and were simultaneously operated during the testing with controlled volume flow of 2 3 m3 h The accuracy of the volume flow control is below 1 96 of the nominal volume flow under standard conditions Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 47 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific 0 UK Report on the Equivalence of the and PM TEOM 1405 DF During the field tests QA QC procedures were periodically undertaken on the LVS3 devices accordance with the manufacturer s instructions The instruments were leak checked and the flow rates were checked typically at the same time as they were on the Candidate Methods Section 8 In all cases the results of the QA QC checks were within the required limits and no maintenance was required on the LVS3 devices The electronic measuring equipment of the LVS3 small filter device displays the incoming sampling air volume in standard or operating as soon as the sampling is complete To determine the PM and 5 concentrations the laboratory performed a gravimetric determination of the amount of suspended particulate matter on the respective filters The obtained result was then divided by the respective volume of sampling air in operating m or standard m The impaction plates of the sampling inlets of the reference devices were cleaned approximately every 2 weeks and lubricated with silicone grease in or
170. an the required 2 2 weeks Further information as to the maintenance procedures required is given in Appendix D Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 39 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the and 5 TEOM 1405 DF FIELD EQUIVALENCE TEST PROGRAMME 9 Field Test Locations Periods and Conditions The following text is copied with minor alterations from Section 4 3 of the TUV Rheinland Report The field test was carried out at the following test sites Table 12 Field test sites Measuring test site Period Characterisation Teddington UK 04 2010 07 2010 Urban background Cologne parking lot winter 01 2011 05 2011 Urban background Bornheim motorway parking lot summer 07 2011 10 2011 Rural structure traffic influence Bornheim motorway parking lot winter 11 2011 02 2012 Rural structure traffic influence Figure 12 to Figure 19 show the time series of the and PM concentrations at the field test sites which were recorded with the reference measuring device Figure 12 Time Series of the PM concentrations Reference at the test site Teddington Conc 2 5 Ref in g m 60 50 40 30 12 9 2009 12 16 2009 12 23 2009 12 30 2009 1 6 2010 1 13 2010 1 20 2010 1 27 2010 2 3 2010 2 10 2010 2 7 2010 2 24 2010 3 3 2010 3 10
171. and B 8 Operatine TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC SERIAL COMMUNICATION AK Protocol Ask Storage Command ASTO COM 2 WAY SETTINGS RS Para 1 ASCII code for the 1 digit Station Number for example 4 052 The Station Number is always 1 digit in length ASCII code representation of the 2 digit Channel Number for example KO 075 048 The Channel Number is always 2 digits in length RS Para 3 13010 Optional Up to 3 ASCII codes can be added to response from the instrument In this case CR and lt LF gt ASCII codes 013 and 010 are appended to the response Enter 0 if nothing is to be appended RS Para 2 75048 De eee em eue ste poem creme o oe rese rers e rtm erts 3 4 D Ask Storage command 4 digit Ask Storage command Number of current status conditions of current status conditions O o k 2 digit Channel Number as defined EEES o UE SE 3 au storage This can be smaller than downloaded from the instrument s Storage Marker moved to after last 12 storage Downloading begins at the eT record transmitted Not right filled storage marker which can be set Up to 3 digits appended to the end of the entry for RS Para 3 oo 0 j O EE The instrument then transmits the number of storage records shown Pow o in response bytes10 through 12 above Each record i
172. and PMz 5 TEOM 1405 DF Figure 21 Field test site Cologne parking lot 2 Figure 22 Besides the measuring device for the determination of particulate ambient air a device for the determination of meteorological characteristics was installed at the cabinet measuring test site A continuous determination of ambient temperature ambient pressure relative humidity wind velocity wind direction and the amount of precipitation was made The 30 minute Germany and 15 minute UK averages were recorded Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 45 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the and PM25 TEOM 1405 DF The following Table 13 contains therefore not only an overview on the most important meteorological data of the four test sites but also an overview on the PM conditions during the test Section 15 gives a detailed analysis of these results Table 13 Ambient conditions at the field test sites expressed as daily averages BUREAU VERITAS Teddington UK Cologne parking lot winter Bornheim motorway parking lot summer Bornheim motorway parking lot summer No of paired values reference 83 82 66 No of paired values reference PM2 5 Ratio 5 96 30 2 92 3 63 9 38 8 93 5 67 7 27 1 88 1 57 3 31 1 90 9 65 7 Ambient temperature C
173. and Report The particle sample passes the PM with a flow rate of 16 67 l min 1 3 Subsequently the PM fraction is divided a PMcoarse fraction flow rate of 1 67 l min and into the fraction flow rate 15 l min using a virtual impactor While the PMeoarse flow is lead directly to the measuring system the flow of the PM s fraction is directed over a flow splitter and divided into two sub flows the s flow of l min and the bypass flow of 12 l min The PMcoarse flow and the are directed to the actual measuring system TEOM 1405 DF via the FDMS unit There it is secreted to the respective TEOM filter constantly heated at 30 C and the secreted mass of particles is quantifi ed To take into account non volatile as well as volatile particulate during the measuring the FDMS technology is used The FDMS unit is placed between the flow splitter and the measuring device TEOM 1405 DF in the so called FDMS tower The FDMS unit automatically compensates for the loss of the semi volatile particulate using a switching valve and two operation modes the base mode and the reference mode Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 18 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific 0 UK Report on the Equivalence of the PM and PM TEOM 1405 Every six minutes the switching valve changes the sampling flow rate from base to reference mode In the base mode the sampling is done on a
174. and longest instrument life when the unit is not exposed to extremes of weather Filter exchange in particular may be best accomplished by a technician operating in an indoor environment where there is no possibility of rain or snow contaminating the filter Be sure to install the ambient temperature humidity sensor If you do not install the ambient temperature humidity sensor you must set the instrument to Passive flow control Section 4 or the mass flow controller will attempt to control the sample flow as if the ambient temperature is absolute zero The sample lines for the PM 2 5 and PM Coarse channels should proceed in a straight vertical line from the PM 10 inlet and virtual impactor to the inlet of the unit To achieve the best results locate the TEOM sensor unit in an environment with relatively slow temperature fluctuations Avoid sampling locations with direct exposure to sunlight or that are in close proximity to a heating or air conditioning outlet To avoid condensation in the sample tubing Thermo Scientific strongly recommends that the user insulate the sample tube extensions with pipe insulation when operating the instrument in areas of high humidity THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC 2 SETUP AND INSTALLATION Sta nd a rd Syste The TEOM 1405 DF Monitor is supplied with the following components THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Hardware 1405 DF TEOM unit Temperature humidity sensor and cable 10 m 3
175. ansferred to the MCERTS certificate This is less than the required 3 The flow rate tests were done under flow conditions at a variety of filter loadings as opposed to 0 50 and 80 of the mass load as prescribed in MCERTS for UK Particulate Matter The variable filter load is not a requirement in Technical Specification CEN TS16450 Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 30 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the and 5 TEOM 1405 DF Figure 4 Time Series of the PM concentration ug m3 Candidate SN 20014 Cologne Winter Dichot 20014 6 min Col W 2011 Dichot 20014 tmoTEOMAMC 0 Dichot 20014 tmoTEOMBMC 0 0 r J 1 4 2011 3 26 2011 6 16 2011 Figure 5 PM s flow rate at candidate SN 20014 Cologne Winter PM2 5 Dichot 20014 6 min Col W 2011 tmoTEOMAFlowMass_0 e eLimit TEOMA Flow 2 8 1 17 2011 2 16 2011 3 18 2011 4 17 2011 5 17 2011 Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 31 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific Ns UK Report on the Equivalence of the and PM 5 TEOM 1405 DF pea Figure 6 PM coarse flow rate at candidate SN 20014 Cologne Winter PMGrob Dichot 20014 6 min Col W 2011 tmoTEOMBFlowMass_0 e Limit TEOM Flow 1 5 1 17 2011 2 16 2011 3 18 2011 4 17 2011 5 17 2011 Figure 7 Total flow rate at candidate SN 20014 Cologne W
176. asure High Setting screen will display Figure 5 78 Compare the reading on the volt meter to the reading on the screen If the readings are different select the Current reading button to display the number keypad and enter the current reading and press the Enter button Select the Next gt button Figure 5 78 Measure High Setting Measure High Setting screen 5 62 Operatine TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Figure 5 79 Completing the Analog Output Calibration Wizard screen THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC 11 12 Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES The Select Channel to Calibrate screen will display again The channel that was just calibrated will be grayed out on the screen to show it was calibrated during this calibration session If you want to calibrate another analog output channel select another channel then the Next gt button and follow steps 1 9 and the wizard to complete additional channels Otherwise ensure that no Analog Output Channel buttons ate selected and select the Next gt button The Completing the Analog Output Calibration Wizard screen will display Figure 5 79 Select the Finish button to exit the wizard and return to the Verification amp Calibration screen or select the lt Back button to move backward one step in the procedure Completing the Analog Output Calibration Wizard The Analog Output Wizard has completed sucesstulby When the wizard is
177. atically test the two newly installed TEOM filters to ensure they are firmly seated The system will display a screen with the wait time Figure 5 11 Figure 5 11 Stabilizing Wait for inglrement t Stabilizing screen 20 If the system is unable to obtain a stable frequency for one or both of the filters it will display a screen telling which filter or filters needs to be re seated Figure 5 12 Otherwise the filter change is complete go to step 22 Figure 5 12 FRe seat Filters Re seat Filters screen The pers need to be re seated after thay have experienced an increase in Temperature 5 10 Operatine TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES 21 If the filters need to be re seated open the door to the sampler and the mass transducer and press straight down on the appropriate TEOM filter s with the bottom of the filter exchange tool Figure 5 9 This ensures that the filters are properly seated Close the mass transducer and sensor unit door Select the Next gt button 22 The system will again display the waiting screen while it is testing for stable frequencies If it still cannot obtain a frequency for one or both of the filters it will prompt the user to re seat the filters a second time If it still cannot obtain a stable frequency the procedure will prompt to replace the filters or post a fail message Figures 5 14 and 15 23 When the
178. ay 10 10 00 Wed 05 May 10 10 00 Thu 06 May 10 10 00 Fri 07 May 10 10 00 Sat 08 May 10 10 00 Sun 09 May 10 10 00 Mon 10 May 10 10 00 Tue 11 May 10 10 00 Wed 12 May 10 10 00 Thu 13 May 10 10 00 Fri 14 May 10 10 00 Sat 15 May 10 10 00 Sun 16 May 10 10 00 Mon 17 May 10 10 00 Tue 18 May 10 10 00 Wed 19 May 10 10 00 Thu 20 May 10 10 00 Fri 21 May 10 10 00 Bureau Veritas Air Quality AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 gui Drl SA1 S ZNd 12 7 9 3 12 1 16 0 11 3 5 4 8 5 14 0 9 8 7 8 4 5 6 5 4 9 6 2 8 4 13 4 12 7 7 0 5 6 10 2 12 7 14 0 13 9 14 3 ui Drl Z SA1 13 1 8 7 11 2 16 7 11 4 5 4 8 6 13 9 9 2 7 7 4 2 7 6 5 1 6 0 8 3 13 2 13 7 6 7 5 2 10 3 13 4 15 2 147 15 5 L ESAT 21 7 20 9 16 5 20 2 25 8 19 2 11 5 15 0 18 8 16 2 12 9 8 9 14 1 10 2 10 6 12 3 17 2 19 1 12 7 9 5 16 2 21 5 20 0 18 7 17 9 Z SA10LWd 21 0 21 3 16 6 20 9 25 0 19 3 11 9 15 1 19 7 16 6 13 1 8 9 14 0 9 8 9 8 12 5 17 1 18 7 12 7 9 6 16 6 21 5 19 4 19 0 18 6 71002 NS gui Drl 91102 NS 20 2 13 6 13 1 A 8 2 7 9 14 0 13 8 18 4 18 4 13 8 13 2 7 49 7 0 8 9 8 5 6 2 6 0 6 5 6 2 10 4 9 9 15 5 15 6 10 9 11 1 9 4 8 9 6 7 6 9 8 9 8 9 6 9 6 9 8 4 8 0 10 5 10 2 14 2 13 8 15 4 15 3 9 2 8 6 8 3 7 8 11 8 11 6 14 9 14 1 16 6 16 3 18 7 18 0 18 0 18 0
179. be 2 22 Operatine TEOM 1405 DF 10 Select a location on the pump tubing to install the vacuum gauge It should allow the gauge to be easily monitored Thermo Scientific suggests a location about half a meter from where the tubing is installed in the pump connection on the back of the unit Cut the tubing and install the two ends into the quick connect fittings on the vacuum gauge From the 10m length of tubing for the bypass line cut a piece of tubing long enough to reach from the water trap filter to the bypass filter on the back of the 1405 unit Figure 2 22 and 2 24 Install the tubing into the quick connect fittings on the water trap filter and bypass filter Note The bypass tubing will be connected to the bypass connection on the flow splitter and to the water trap when you assemble and install the sample inlet and virtual impactor on top of the enclosure later in this section Ensure that the shorter sample tube is properly installed in the flow splitter refer to Adjusting the Flow Splitter earlier in this section Install the sample tube from the flow splitter PM 2 5 channel through the left front roof opening as you face the instrument Install a standard 1m sample tube through the right front fitting in the roof of the enclosure Figures 2 25 and 2 26 THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC 2 SETUP AND INSTALLATION 11 Install the adjustable elbow fitting and male swivel fitt
180. can not be edited Total flow This field contains the current value of the total flow rate of the instrument l min The current value can not be edited THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Flow Control Screen Figure 4 13 Flow Control screen THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 4 SCREENS AND SETTINGS Select the Flow Control button in the Flows screen to display the Flow Control screen Figure 4 13 This screen allows users to adjust the flow control method TEOM 1405 DF CIENTIFIC Inglrussent Canditiang FlawacFlau Contra Valusseetrie Firar Control Report to the following conditions b Sippel Horna si ENE The Flow Control screen contains the following control buttons Volumetric Flow Control Active or Passive These buttons allow the user to select active using actual temperature and pressure or passive using average temperature and pressure to adjust the flow Report to the following conditions Actual or Standard These buttons allow the user to select Actual reporting the mass concentration measured per actual volume sampled through the inlet or Standard reporting the mass concentration adjusted based on a set standard temperature and pressure Standard temperature This field contains the standard temperature C setting The default setting is 25 C To adjust the setpoint select the button to display the keypad Figure 4 3 Averag
181. cepts all voltage inputs between 85 and 240 to th e Instrument volts AC The unit should be connected to an appropriate code approved grounded electrical outlet for the sampler location The connection should be easily accessible Contact a qualified electrician if there is doubt as to whether the power service for the instrument is adequate To turn on the monitor 1 Install an appropriate power cord into the universal power connection on the back of the instrument at the appropriate voltage Note DO NOT attempt to bypass the grounding requirements for the unit A Figure 2 17 F Power connection 279 back of unit 72 lt 2 Install the other end of the power cord into an appropriate easily accessible grounded code approved electrical outlet Note Contact a qualified electrician if there is doubt as to whether the power service for the instrument is adequate a 2 16 Operatine TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Figure 2 18 Power switch 2 SETUP AND INSTALLATION 3 Press the POWER switch on the front panel of the control unit Figure 2 18 The unit will begin its startup routine After a few moments the Title screen will appear on the control unit s display and then the TEOM Data Main screen Refer to Sections 3 and 4 for information on the instrument s software screens 4 Plug the pump into an appropriate power source to draw a sam
182. channel remove the inlet inlet tube and virtual impactor and attach the 1 1 4 inch flow adapter meter to the top of the flow splitter Figure 5 57 Disconnect the bypass line from the side of the flow splitter don t let it fall to the ground and cap the bypass fitting with the 3 8 inch Swagelok cap provided with the system Figure 5 58 Figure 5 57 Flow adapter meter attached to the flow splitter Flow meter adapter Figure 5 58 Bypass line capped Bypass cap 5 48 Operatine Guine TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES b To audit the PM Coatrse flow channel remove the inlet inlet tube and virtual impactor and connect the 1 2 inch Swagelok flow audit adapter to the top of the 1 2 inch coarse flow inlet Connect the flow meter adapter to the flow audit adapter Figure 5 59 c To audit the bypass flow channel remove the bypass line from the flow splitter and connect the 3 8 inch flow adapter to the green tubing of the bypass line Connect the flow meter adapter to the flow audit adapter When the flow meter is attached select the Next gt button Figure 5 59 Flow adapter attached to the 1 2 inch coarse flow inlet 1 2 inch flow adapter THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Operatinc TEOM 1405 DF 5 49 Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES 6 The Measure Flow screen will display Allow the flow to stabilize When the flow is stable press the
183. correct the TEOM 1405 DF for either or Correction for intercept is shown to be beneficial as the intercepts for both instruments are not significantly different from 0 after correction The MCERTS certificate should show the range of required expanded uncertainties both before and after correction for intercept Intercept correction is not required in order to make the Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 100 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific BUREAU UK Report on the Equivalence of the and PM25 TEOM 1405 DF instrument equivalent but it is essential that thorough and frequent on going QA QC procedures are employed as prescribed in fprEN12341 2013 and CEN TS16450 including to precisely quantify analyser baseline performance and ensure the continued correct operation of the FDMS drier As the criterion specifically states that a correction may be made by taking this approach Criterion 5 is fulfilled Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 101 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the and 5 TEOM 1405 DF ULE APPENDICES A Operating Procedures The following text is copied with minor alterations from Section 3 3 of the T V Rheinland Report The measuring device is operated via touch screen at the front of the device The user can retrieve data and instrument information change parameters as well as perform tests and controls of the functionality
184. ded by the TEOM filter while the FDMS system draws dried filtered and cooled ambient air reference flow through the PM 2 5 and PM Coarse sample flow lines This value is a rolling 30 minute average updated every 6 minutes 4 20 Operatine TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC FDMS Cooler Temperature Setting THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 4 SCREENS AND SETTINGS Dryer temperature This field contains the dryer temperature of the PM 2 5 and PM Coarse flow channels Dryer dew point This field contains the current dew point of the air stream exiting the dryer of the PM 2 5 and PM Coarse flow channels Dryer relative humidity This field contains the current relative humidity of the air stream exiting the dryer of the PM 2 5 and PM Coarse flow channels Select the PM 2 5 cooler temp or PM Coarse cooler temp buttons to change the temperature C of the FDMS coolers The default settings for the FDMS cooler temperatures are 4 C If the dewpoint of either of the fine or coarse sample gases are greater than 2 C a status warning will occur Under this condition check and verify the performance of the sample dryers Under certain ambient conditions the capability of the dryers to remove moisture from the sample gases is insufficient resulting is a high sample dewpoint High ambient temperature humidity or both may cause this condition to occur If the high ambient temperature or humidity exists such that
185. der to guarantee a safe separation and secretion of the particulate In general the sampling inlet shall be cleaned according to the manufacturer s instructions while taking into account the local suspended particulate matter concentrations The flow rate was tested on each reference device prior to and after each change of location with a mass flow meter which could be connected to the air inlet of the systems via a hose assembly The measuring devices have been installed in the field test in such a way that only the sampling inlets are located above the roof of the measurement cabinet The central units of the reference systems were installed inside the climate controlled measurement cabinet EN 12341 1998 defines a sampling period of 24 h However at lower concentration levels a longer at higher concentration levels a shorter sampling period is permissible EN 14907 defines a sampling period of 24 h 1 h The sampling period was constantly set to 24 h during the field tests 10 am 10 am for Teddington and Cologne and 7 am 7 am for Bornheim Filters were changed manually within 15 minutes of finishing sampling and were then refrigerated stored inside at 20 C or transferred directly to the filter conditioning room The weighing procedures employed are summarised in Appendix B All paired reference values determined during the field tests were subject to statistical testing according to Grubbs 99 96 to prevent influence
186. device with zero filter at the inlet 12 Every 18 months or if necessary the sampler pump shall be maintained or renewed To carry out the maintenance works the instruction of the manual chapter 5 are to be taken into account All works can usually be carried out with commonly available tools Assessment Maintenance works can be carried out with commonly available tools taking reasonable time and effort For the maintenance works as per points 3 4 6 and 10 the device is switched to setup mode The restart of the normal measuring process occurs after one hour after having finished the check and after having left the setup mode The maintenance works as per points 8 9 11 and 12 can only be done when shutting off the measuring device These works come up every 6 or 12 months In the remaining time maintenance works are limited to the check of contaminations plausibility checks and eventual status error messages Detailed representation of the test results The maintenance works were carried out during the test in accordance with the instructions given in the manual No problems were noticed while following the described procedures All maintenance works could be done with customary tools without taking much time and effort Conclusion for UK Purposes The maintenance interval is defined by necessary maintenance procedures and is 4 weeks and this is this value that should be transferred to the MCERTS certificate This is greater th
187. ditation service UKAS Extracts of the ISO 17025 accreditations are given in Appendix C 8 ISO Standard 17025 2005 General requirements for the competence of testing and calibration laboratories Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 27 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the PM25 TEOM 1405 DF LABORATORY TEST PROGRAMME 6 Parameters Tested in the Laboratory Programme As the Candidate Method is not a variation of the Reference Method only two tests are required to be undertaken in the laboratory in accordance with MCERTS for UK Particulate Matter These include e Constancy of the sample Volumetric Flow and e Tightness of the Sampling System It is also necessary to consider the e Maintenance Interval These tests were undertaken and are discussed in detail in Sections 7 and 8 These tests were undertaken under field conditions rather than laboratory conditions A number of other tests were undertaken by TUV Rheinland in accordance with the requirements of the German Government These tests are e Measured value display e Easy maintenance e Functional test e Setup times warm up times e Instrument design e Unintended adjustment e Data output e Certification ranges e Negative output signals e Failure in the mains voltage e Operating states e Switch over e Instrument software e Repeated standard deviation at zero point e Repeated standa
188. djust this value without contacting Thermo Scientific Frequency wait time This field contains the time interval sec after a valve position change before the instrument begins collecting frequency data The default setting is 90 seconds To adjust the setpoint select the button to display the keypad DO NOT adjust this value without contacting Thermo Scientific Equivalency Designation This field contains the current setting of the equivalency designation display of the instrument Selecting one of the options displays the equivalent mass concentration values on the TEOM Data screen Select the appropriate regional setting to display the proper values To record the calculated equivalent mass concentration values select the appropriate Data Storage variables e XX HrMC This field contains the XX Hr MC parameter This value gives the user a choice of averaging times hours shown on the Main screen following the 1 hour mass concentration average The default value for this parameter is 8 which causes the monitor to compute 8 hour averages The user can set an averaging time of any whole hour greater than 1 hour for this parameter To adjust the setpoint select the button to display the keypad Select the Mass Transducer Constants button to display the Mass Transducer KO Constants screen The Mass Transducer KO Constants screen contains the following information e PM 2 5 TEOM This field contains the calibrat
189. e U S EPA or other agencies For U S EPA PM 2 5 reporting this configuration must be selected and data recorded Refer to Section 4 for instructions to configure this setting If this configuration is not selected this column will not appear on the display THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Figure 4 3 Number entry keypad showing current value and setpoint THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 4 SCREENS AND SETTINGS Users enter values into the settings screens using a number keypad Figure 4 3 Select the button for the value that needs to be changed such as setpoints for flow rates temperatures or pressures and a keypad will automatically display The keypad will display the current setpoint and the current value when applicable Enter the value into the keypad then select the Enter button to set the value or press the Cancel button to exit the keypad screen and return to the screen Cap temperature 0 00 Cap temperature set point 30 00 Operatine Guine TEOM 1405 DF 4 5 Section 4 SCREENS AND SETTINGS Operating Mode the TEOM 1405 DF Monitor displays its current operating mode in the lower left hand corner of TEOM Data screen Figure 4 2 and most of the other instrument screens The unit s operating modes Figure 4 2 are defined as follows e Stabilizing This operating mode indicates that the unit has not begun to compute mass values because the monitor s temperatures and flow rates are stabilizing The t
190. e Value 289 TEOM A Base Mass Conc 374 TEOM B Cooler Setpoint 206 Analog Input 3 Average Value 290 TEOM A Ref Mass Conc 375 TEOM B Base Mass Conc 207 Analog Input 4 Average Value 291 TEOM A 30 Min Base Mass Conc 376 TEOM B Ref Mass Conc 208 Contact Closure Register 1 292 TEOM A 30 Min Ref Mass Conc 377 TEOM B 30 Min Base Mass Conc 209 Contact Closure Register 2 293 TEOM A Raw Base Mass Conc 378 TEOM B 30 Min Ref Mass Conc 210 Contact Closure Compare Operator 1 294 TEOM A Raw Ref Mass Conc 379 TEOM B Raw Base Mass Conc 211 Contact Closure Compare Operator 2 295 TEOM A Raw Base Mass Rate 380 TEOM B Raw Ref Mass Conc 212 Contact Closure Compare Value 1 296 TEOM A Raw Ref Mass Rate 381 TEOM B Raw Base Mass Rate 213 Contact Closure Compare Value 2 309 TEOM B Flow Rate 382 Raw Ref Mass Rate 214 Contact Closure Value 1 310 TEOM B Flow Volumetric 386 Dichot Base Mass Conc 215 Contact Closure Value 2 311 TEOM B Flow Setpoint 387 Dichot Ref Mass Conc 225 TEOM A Flow Rate 312 TEOM B Flow Offset 388 Dichot Mass Conc Base 30 Min 226 TEOM A Flow Volumetric 313 TEOM B Flow Span 389 Dichot Mass Conc Ref 30 Min 227 TEOM A Flow Setpoint 314 TEOM B Flow Audit Adjust 390 Instrument Time 228 TEOM A Flow Offset 321 TEOM Air Tube Temperature 392 TEOM A FEM Mass Conc 229 TEOM A Flow Span 325 TEOM B Filter Pressure 393 TEOM A FEM 30 Min Mass Conc 230 TEOM A Flow Audit Adjust 326 TEOM B Filter Load 394 TEOM A FEM 1 Hr Mass Conc 237 TEOM A Air Tube Temperature 327
191. e ambient temperature humidity sensor is properly installed e Ambient Relative Humidity This field contains the current ambient pressure atm at the site This value cannot be edited and will be correct only when the ambient temperature humidity sensor is properly installed 4 12 Operatine TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 4 SCREENS AND SETTINGS Flows Screen Flows screen Figure 4 11 offers access to the flow rates and flow controls of the unit Figure 4 11 Flows screen lt TEOM 1405 DF Inigiruerent Conditigng Flows ENTIFIC x Back Tabia Mone ERONZOUS 13 53 Select the Flow Rates button to view or adjust the instrument s flow rates Select the Flow Control button to view or adjust the units standard temperature and pressure settings or select active or passive flow control The TEOM 1405 DF Monitor uses mass flow controllers to ensure a constant and precise flow through the instrument The mass flow controllers use the actual acre volumetric flow control setting or average passive volumetric flow control setting temperature and pressure values to regulate the volumetric flow through the system The active volumetric flow control setting directs the unit to use the actual ambient temperature and pressure to regulate the volumetric flow through the system The passive volumetric flow control setting directs the unit to use the average temperature and press
192. e cleaned according to the manufacturer s instructions taking into account the local suspended particulate matter concentrations during suitability test every 4 weeks A monthly change of the TEOM Filter as well when a filter loading gt 90 is reached is necessary Simultaneously with the change of the TEOM filter the cooled 47 mmc filter of the FDMS unit has to be changed According to the manufacturer s instructions a monthly check of the sensors for ambient air and ambient pressure shall be done According to the manufacturer s instructions a monthly leak check shall be done According to the manufacturer s instructions a monthly check of the flow rate shall be done Every 6 months or if necessary the inline filter for PMo5 and the Bypass path shall be changed in order to avoid a contamination of the flow rate regulator Once a year or if necessary the cooler the switching valve and the air inlet system shall be cleaned Once a year the calibration of the mass transducer has to be checked using the Ko check kit Once a year or if necessary the dryer of the FDMS unit shall be changed or refurbished For the monitoring securing of a proper dryer performance the manufacturer recommends to monitor a pump vacuum nominal gt 510 mm Hg and a dew point of the air flow nominal lt 2 C at 4 cooler temperature as well as to carry out periodical at least once a year zero point checks running of the measuring
193. e expanded measuring uncertainties but does not bring a decisive advantage The demonstration of equivalence of the TEOM 1405 DF Ambient Particulate Monitor for and can also be shown without the application of correction factors and terms The respective realization of the above mentioned requirement on on going QA QC in networks is the responsibility of the network operator or of the responsible authority of the member state However TUV Rheinland and BV recommend that the expanded uncertainty for the full data set is referred to for this namely 14 0 5 uncorrected dataset and respectively 11 8 96 5 dataset after offset correction which would require an annual test at three measurement sites and 11 2 96 uncorrected dataset and respectively 8 9 PM o dataset after offset correction which would require an annual test at three measurement sites uncorrected and two measuring sites corrected Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 89 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific 9 UK Report on the Equivalence of the PM and 5 TEOM 1405 DF Detailed representation of the test results Table 26 and Table 27 show the results of the evaluations of the equivalence check after the application of the correction factor for the intercept on the complete data set for 5 and respectively Table 26 Summary of the results of the equivalence check SN 20014 amp SN 20116 measuring a
194. e filter into the filter holder with the top of the cassette and filter surface facing out 7 Line up the notches with the locking disks and install the filter holder into unit Turn the holder clockwise to lock it in place Note Do not overtighten the filter holder The O ring creates the seal not the force of the turn 8 Close the small filter door 9 Repeat steps 1 8 for the other 47 mm filter THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Operatinc TEOM1405 DF 5 17 Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES Cleaning the The PM 10 inlet should be cleaned every time the TEOM filter is changed PM 10 Inlet o as necessary To clean the unit you will need an ammonia based general purpose cleaner cotton swabs a small soft bristle brush paper towels distilled water silicone based stopcock grease a small screwdriver a small adjustable wrench and a pocket knife To clean maintain the PM 10 inlet 1 Remove rain jar from the inlet and the inlet from the sample tube Unscrew the top acceleration assembly from the lower collector assembly Figure 5 24 Figure 5 24 Top of inlet assembly Top plate Lower plate O ring Nozzle 2 Mark the top plate deflector cone and lower plate with a pencil to facilitate proper orientation when reassembling then use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the four pan head screws from the top of the top plate Figure 5 24 Lift the top plate off the four threaded spacer standof
195. e of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs Average of 4 1405Fs yaewoy PM10 Grubbs outlier Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the PM25 TEOM 1405 DF eus Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington eui pue ojeq uelis Sat 02 Jan 10 10 00 Sun 03 Jan 10 10 00 Mon 04 Jan 10 10 00 Tue 05 Jan 10 10 00 Wed 06 Jan 10 10 00 Thu 07 Jan 10 10 00 Fri 08 Jan 10 10 00 Sat 09 Jan 10 10 00 Sun 10 Jan 10 10 00 Mon 11 Jan 10 10 00 Tue 12 Jan 10 10 00 Wed 13 Jan 10 10 00 Thu 14 Jan 10 10 00 Fri 15 Jan 10 10 00 Sat 16 Jan 10 10 00 Sun 17 Jan 10 10 00 Mon 18 Jan 10 10 00 Tue 19 Jan 10 10 00 Wed 20 Jan 10 10 00 Thu 21 Jan 10 10 00 Fri 22 Jan 10 10 00 Sat 23 Jan 10 10 00 Sun 24 Jan 10 10 00 Mon 25 Ja
196. e on the left side of the Main screen To edit a displayed instrument or delete an instrument from the list right click on the instrument and select Edit Instrument or Delete Instrument Figure 3 27 Note To add an instrument from another network connected to the local network select Instrument then New Instrument from the menu bar Refer to the previous section for more information on manually adding an instrument to the configuration Figure 3 27 Adding or deleting an ePort instrument from the list Fille Instrument Help E 1 Group 14054200090602 x 14054200090604 s 14054200090605 14054200 aaae ror 14054200 Delete Instrument 4 To save this list as a configuration select File then Save from the menu bar at the top of the Main screen The Save As screen will display Type in the desired name for the configuration and select Save Note Once you have connected to an instrument or instruments and saved a configuration file select Open Saved Configuration in the ePort Open screen to open that configuration and automatically connect to all the instruments that were saved in that configuration 3 24 Operatine TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 3 Basic OPERATION Setting Up for Data can be manually downloaded from the TEOM 1405 DF monitor Manual Data Downloads through the built in Ethernet connection using the ePort software To set up the software to manually downl
197. e screen Figure 5 3 3 Select the Replace TEOM Filters button to start the TEOM Filter Replacement Wizard Figure 5 5 Select the Next gt button to begin the procedure Note If you are an experienced user and comfortable with changing TEOM filters select the Advanced User Mode button to stop the movement of the mass transducer and proceed with a quick exchange procedure Refer to the next section for a complete explanation of the Advanced User Mode for filter changes A Figure 5 5 TEOM Filter Replacement Wizard starting screen Welcome to the TEOM Filter Replacement Wizard Dichot Ambient Particulate Monitor The instrument will be put Setup mode tor filter replacement i Ensure that the filter exchange ton is clean and tree of any contamenatian that might be transtened to the TEOM fter Ade anced User Mode 5 6 Operatine TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES 4 The Open Mass Transducer screen will display Open the door of the sampler 5 Pull the TEOM latch toward you to open the transducer latch 6 With the mass transducer unlatched swing the bottom of the mass transducer downward exposing the tapered elements TE Figure 5 6 Select the Next gt button Figure 5 6 Opening the mass transducer TEOM filters Conditioned TEOM filters 7 The Remove Old Filters screen will display Carefully insert the lowe
198. e temperature This field visible only when passive is selected contains the average temperature C setting for passive flow control The default setting is 25 C To adjust the setpoint select the button to display the keypad Figure 4 3 Standard pressure This field contains the standard pressure atm setting The default setting is 1 atm To adjust the setpoint select the button to display the keypad Figure 4 3 Operatinc TEOM 1405 DF 4 15 Section 4 SCREENS AND SETTINGS e Average pressure This field visible only when passive is selected contains the average pressure atm setting for passive flow control The default setting is 1 atm To adjust the setpoint select the button to display the keypad Figure 4 3 The instrument is delivered with the following temperature and pressure settings Standard temperature 25 C Standard pressure 1 atmosphere atm Average temperature 25 C Average pressure 1 atmosphere atm The user must choose how they want the monitor to control the volumetric flow actively or passively Active Flow Control uses actual ambient pressure and ambient temperature from instrument sensors to set the flow rates Passive Flow Control uses operator input ambient temperature and ambient pressure to control flow At their discretion operators can input seasonal average temperature and pressure To select active flow control select the Active flow control button Figure 4
199. ean the heated air inlet in the TEOM 1405 DF once a year to remove the buildup of particulate matter on its inner walls You can order a tapered bristle brush that is appropriate for cleaning the air inlet system from Thermo Scientific You will need a piece of plastic or another protective material soapy water alcohol or freon solution a 1 2 inch or adjustable wrench and a soft brush to clean the air inlet Follow these steps to clean the air inlet system 1 Turn off the 1405 DF unit 2 Open the door of the unit Figure 5 35 and locate the thermistors in the top of the mass transducer assembly Figure 5 35 Thermistors on top of mass transducer 3 Using the 1 2 inch wrench remove the thermistors from the top of the mass transducer assembly Note The thermistors have short thread depths Installation removal should take 1 1 2 to 2 1 2 turns A 4 Open the mass transducer refer to the Replacing the TEOM Filters section earlier in this chapter for instructions on opening the mass transducer 5 28 Operatine Guine TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Figure 5 36 Air inlets Nozzles Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES 5 Place a piece of plastic or another protective material over the exposed TEOM filters 6 Using a soapy water alcohol or freon solution clean the entire air inlet Figure 5 36 A soft brush may be used to remove particulate matter
200. eck 1 In the 1405 TEOM Data screen select the Service button to display the Service screen then select the Verification button to display the Verification screen 2 Select the Leak Check button to display the Leak Check Wizard screen Figure 3 2 Select the Next gt button Figure 3 2 Leak Check Wizard start screen Welcome to the Leak Check Wizard This wizard ains you pertenm a leak check on the Series 1405 Ambient Particulate Monitor The instrument will be put in Setup mode for calitration To continue press Next 3 4 Operatine TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 3 Basic OPERATION 3 The Select Valve Position screen will display The current valve position is displayed on the screen To start the leak check select the current valve position leak check button Figure 3 3 Select the Next gt button Note If trying to isolate a leak with the valve in a specific position select the specific valve position desired and proceed Figure 3 3 zm Leak Check Wizard screen with current valve position select 4 The Remove the TEOM filters screen will display Remove the two TEOM filters from the transducer to ensure they aren t damaged during the leak check procedure Select the Next gt button 5 The Disconnect Vacuum Line screen will display Remove the main vacuum line pump connected to the pump from the back of the unit Figure 3 4 Select the Next gt button THER
201. ect the Advanced button then the Mass Transducer Constants button to confirm the current settings of the PM 2 5 and PM Coarse TEOMs The numbers programmed into the unit must match the KO constants on the label near the mass transducer Refer to Section 4 for more information on screens and settings When in the Settings screen select the Data Storage button to display the Data Storage screen Confirm the desired data is selected to be logged by the instrument Refer to Storing Data later in this section for more information on selecting storage variables If you will be setting up the unit to receive an analog input to transmit analog outputs or setting up the unit s contact closure circuits refer to Section 4 for information on the screens and settings used for these parameters THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 3 Basic OPERATION 10 If you will be using the password function to control access to the unit s operation refer to Section 4 for information on setting up the password function 11 Select the TEOM Data button to display the TEOM Data screen The instrument will begin collecting data when the mode status window displays a Fully operational message Note Upon initial instrument start up the values in the mass concentration fields are the running averages that are accumulated until a 1 hour time period has passed The values are visible to provide the user with an indication that the instru
202. ed duplicated or disclosed to anyone in whole or in part other than as authorized in a fully executed Thermo Fisher Scientific End User License Agreement or with the express written permission of Thermo Fisher Scientific 2007 Thermo Fisher Scientific All rights reserved and FDMS are registered trademarks of Thermo Fisher Scientific Other trademarks are the property of their respective holders Mention of specific product names other than Thermo Fisher Scientific products in this manual does not constitute an endorsement or recommendation by Thermo Fisher Scientific of that equipment FEM Statement US EPA Federal Equivalent Method Designation for PM2 5 Sampling Thermo Scientific TEOM 1405 DF Dichotomous Ambient Particulate Monitor with FDMS configured for dual filter sampling of fine PM2 5 and coarse particles using the US EPA PM10 inlet specified in 40 CFR 50 Appendix L Figs L 2 thru L 19 and a virtual impactor with a total flow rate of 16 67 L min fine sample flow of 3 L min and coarse sample flow rate of 1 67 L min and operating with firmware version 1 50 and later operated with or without external enclosures and operated in accordance with the Thermo Scientific TEOM 1405 DF Dichotomous Ambient Particulate Monitor Instruction Manual Federal Register Vol 74 page 28696 06 17 09 Warranty Seller warrants that the Products will operate substantially in conformance with Seller s published specif
203. ed weighing room Ambient conditions are 20 1 and 50 5 relative humidity which conforms to the requirements of Standard EN 14907 The filters used in the field test are weighed manually The filters including control filters are placed on sieves for the purpose of conditioning to avoid overlap The specifications for pre and post weighing are specified beforehand and conform to the Standard Table 34 Pre and post weighing specifications Before sampling pre weighing After sampling post weighing Conditioning 48 h 2 h Conditioning 48 h 2 h Filter weighing Filter weighing Re conditioning 24 h 2 h Re conditioning 24 h 2 h Filter weighing and immediate packaging Filter weighing The balance is always kept ready for use An internal calibration process is started prior to each weighing series The standard weight of 200 mg is weighed as reference and the boundary conditions are noted if nothing out of ordinary results from the calibration process Deviations to prior measurements conform to the Standard and do not exceed 20 ug refer to Figure 80 All six control filters are weighed afterwards and a warning is displayed for control filters with deviations gt 40 ug during evaluation These control filters are not used for post weighing Instead the first three acceptable control filters are used while the others remain in the protective jar in order to replace a defective or deviating filt
204. emperatures and flow rates must remain within a very narrow range of values for 30 minutes before the instrument enters the next operating mode The monitor always starts in Stabilizing Mode when it is turned on or reset Collecting Data This operating mode indicates that the unit has begun to collect data records but the monitor has not yet computed its first mass concentration value Computing Data This operating mode indicates that the unit has computed the first mass concentration value e Fully operational This operating mode indicates that the unit is fully operational The monitor normally resides in this mode All mass values are being computed by the instrument Setup Mode When the unit is in this operating mode it continues to draw a sample flow and maintain operational temperatures but it does not collect any data Certain operating parameters such as temperatures and flow rates can be changed only in this mode because doing so during data collection would adversely affect the quality of the data The instrument will automatically prompt the user to enter the Setup Mode when changing a temperature flow or other adjustable value After the new value is entered and saved it will automatically return to one of the four regular operating modes above If several parameters need to be changed the user can enter the Setup Mode manually avoiding the warning prompts when changing each variable To manually enter the Setup
205. enance interval as The maintenance interval of the measuring system shall be determined during the field test and specified The maintenance interval should be three months if possible but at least two weeks It is therefore recommended that the minimum maintenance interval is defined as 2 2 weeks The following text is copied with minor alterations from Sections 6 1 4 1 2 and 6 1 5 2 7 of the T V Rheinland Report Equipment No additional equipment is required Performance of test This test was done in order to determine which maintenance procedures are required at which period to maintain correct functionality of the measuring system Moreover the results of the drift test for zero and span point according to the long term drift were included into the determination of the maintenance interval Necessary regular maintenance works were carried out according to the instructions of the operating manual Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 38 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 0 BUREAU VERITAS Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the and PM25 TEOM 1405 DF Evaluation No unacceptable drifts were detected for the measuring systems during the entire field test period The following maintenance works should be carried out Check of device status The device status can be monitored and controlled by controlling the system itself or controlling it online In general the sampling inlet shall b
206. ent disaster or event of force majeure misuse fault or negligence of or by Buyer iv use of the Products in a manner for which they were not designed v causes external to the Products such as but not limited to power failure or electrical power surges vi improper storage of the Products or vii use of the Products in combination with equipment or software not supplied by Seller If Seller determines that Products for which Buyer has requested warranty services ate not covered by the warranty hereunder Buyer shall pay or reimburse Seller for all costs of investigating and responding to such request at Seller s then prevailing time and materials rates If Seller provides repair services or replacement parts that are not covered by the warranty provided in Section 9 of the Terms and Conditions of Sale agreement Buyer shall pay Seller therefore at Seller s then prevailing time and materials rates With respect to spare parts the above referenced warranty applies however such warranty is limited to ninety 90 days from the date of shipment ANY INSTALLATION MAINTENANCE REPAIR SERVICE RELOCATION OR ALTERATION TO OR OF OR OTHER TAMPERING WITH THE PRODUCTS PERFORMED BY ANY PERSON OR ENTITY OTHER THAN SELLER WITHOUT SELLER S PRIOR WRITTEN APPROVAL OR ANY USE OF REPLACEMENT PARTS NOT SUPPLIED BY SELLER SHALL IMMEDIATELY VOID AND CANCEL ALL WARRANTIES WITH RESPECT TO THE AFFECTED PRODUCTS THE OBLIGATIONS CREATED BY THIS SECTION
207. ent_services npl co uk Website www npl co uk Testing performed by the Organisation at the locations specified below Locations covered by the organisation and their relevant activities Laboratory locations Mr Tahir Magba Customer Services Manager Tek 44 0 20 8943 6796 Fax 44 0 20 8943 6184 E Mail tahir maqba npl co uk Website www npl co uk Address Local contact University of Huddersfield Lisa Leonard Queensgate Huddersfield Tek 44 0 20 8943 8716 Building T4 04 Fax 44 0 208 614 0482 HD1 E mail lisa leonard nplco uk Quality System Quality Audit Administration Testing Mechanical metallurgical physical and chemical testing Sampling and Testing Stack Emissions Testing Website http www npl co uk huddersfield Site activities performed away from the locations listed above Customer Sites requiring Stack Emissions Testing Stack Emissions Testing Bureau Veritas Air Quality AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Page 1 of 16 Page 116 Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the PM and 5 TEOM 1405 DF WORKPLACE AND AMBIENT ATMOSPHERIC POLUTANTS AND OTHER GAS SAMPLES cont d Volatile organic compounds using pumped sorbent tubes Volatile organic compounds using sorbent sampler tubes Total mercury from glass adsorption tubes containing gold coated silica Weight of suspended particulate matter Bureau Veritas Air Quality AGGX5508189
208. entific UK Report on the Equivalence of the and PM25 TEOM 1405 DF List of Tables Table 1 Summary of the test results The data in this table relate to the instrument without correction for slope and or intercept See Note 1 13 Table 2 Summary of the slope intercept and expanded uncertainties with and without intercept correction Tor PMss dala isis ek 15 Table 3 Summary of the slope intercept and expanded uncertainties with and without intercept Correction Tor PM yj dala ot tito aai ag 16 Table 4 Instrument modifications after field test site 21 Table 5 Device related characteristics TEOM 1405 DF Ambient Particulate Monitor manufacturer s Information ue cei creen Presta S ada 21 Table 6 Field teStSIOSs c r 24 Table 7 Summary of the Flow Check 30 Table 8 Parameter for the total flow measurement 24h average Cologne Winter SN 20014 30 Table 9 Parameter for the total flow measurement 24h average Cologne Winter SN 20116 30 Table 10 Results of the tightness check during field test expressed as l min 36 Table 11 Results of the tightness check during field test expressed 37 Table 12 Field test
209. er if necessary Figure 81 shows an exemplary process over a period of more than 4 months All filters which deviate more than 40 between the first and second weighing are excluded during the pre weighing process Filters which deviate more than 60 ug are not considered for evaluation after post weighing as conforming to standards Weighed filters are packed in separate polystyrene jars for transport and storage These jars remain closed until the filter is placed in the filter holder Virgin filters can be stored in the weighing room for up to 28 days before sampling Another pre weighing is carried out if this period is exceeded Sampled filters can be stored for not more than 15 days at a temperature of 23 or less The filters are stored at 7 in a refrigerator Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 107 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the and PM25 TEOM 1405 DF Filter evaluation The filters are evaluated with the help of a corrective term in order to minimize relative mass changes caused by the weighing room conditions Equation Dust MF post Mrara x MKonpost F1 MKony average mass of the control filters after 48 h and 72 h pre weighing MKonpost average mass of the control filters after 48 h and 72 h post weighing Mrara average mass of the filter after 48 h and 72 h pre weighing MF post average mass of the
210. erate the mass concentration measurements Figure 4 16 FDMS Module Screen TEOM 1405 DF Ingirument Canditieng FDME Medule ECIENTIFIC PR S Ph Co arag Base MC P2 gg 1 02 Referenea 3 24 338 base KC AAN 1 18 330 mirsube pefesenee MC 8 18 peg 5 72 jae Dryer temperatum CC SAX D Dryer doe join dg C 11 11 C Current vahe x Back Hoin slalus OREO 12 53 The FDMS Module screen contains the following information Base MC This field contains the mass concentration value recorded by the TEOM filter while the FDMS system draws dried ambient air base flow through the PM 2 5 and PM Coarse sample flow lines This value is a rolling 1 hour average updated every 6 minutes Reference MC This field contains the mass concentration value recorded by the TEOM filter while the FDMS system draws dried filtered and cooled ambient air reference flow through the PM 2 5 and PM Coarse sample flow lines This value is a rolling 1 hour average updated every 6 minutes 4 30 minute base MC This field contains the mass concentration value recorded by the TEOM filter while the FDMS system draws dried ambient ait base flow through the PM 2 5 and PM Coarse sample flow lines This value is a rolling 30 minute average updated every 6 minutes 4 30 minute reference MC This field contains the mass concentration value recor
211. ernal data logger Operatine Guipe TEOM 1405 DF B 1 Appennix SERIAL COMMUNICATION For AK communication the COM port settings are Figure B 1 gt 2 AL COM Port Settings Port Settings Bits per second 9600 iv Data bits 8 _ Parity None Stop bits 1 Flow control None m The following pages list the common PRC codes and show how RS Para 1 through RS Para 4 are defined in the AK Protocol and also detail the format of the transmission and response messages of the commands listed on the previous page Note TEOM A is the PM 2 5 channel TEOM B is the PM Coarse channel A 2 Operatine Guipe TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Appendix B Serial Communication Table 1 1405 DF Main PRC Codes PRC Code Description PRC Code Description PRC Code Description 1 Serial Number 97 FTS High Flow M 151 Analog Output 8 Maximum 2 Instrument Firmware Version 98 FTS High Flow B 152 Analog Output 1 Cal Low Set 3 Instrument Model 99 FTS Low Flow M 153 Analog Output 2 Cal Low Set 4 Instrument Model Variant 100 FTS Low Flow B 154 Analog Output 3 Cal Low Set 5 AK Station Code 104 Analog Output Calibration 155 Analog Output 4 Cal Low Se 6 AK Channel Number 106 Filter Replace Date
212. es are employed as prescribed in fprEN12341 2013 and CEN TS16450 including to precisely quantify analyser baseline performance and ensure the continued correct operation of the FDMS drier Table 2 Summary of the slope intercept and expanded uncertainties with and without intercept correction for PM s data Calculated Calculated Expanded TEOM 1405 DF Data slope of all all uncertainty of expanded aired data i paired data Ug m all paired data certainties 5 11 0 to Uncorrected data 0 997 1 212 14 096 23 7 Data corrected for intercept by subtracting 1 212 0 997 0 000 11 8 2 ae For the data as the intercept was statistically significantly different from zero based upon 2 standard deviations test results were also subjected to correction coefficients for intercept Expanded uncertainties for the Candidate Method were calculated for both uncorrected datasets as well as data that have been adjusted for intercept The CM fulfils the relevant Data Quality Objective of EU Directive 2008 50 EC when used without correction though the highest individual expanded uncertainty specified in GDE2010 as being required to be below 25 is reduced if correction for intercept by subtracting 1 078 ug m is employed Intercept correction is not required in order to make the instrument equivalent but it is essential that thorough and frequent on going QA QC procedures are employed as prescribed
213. es mass concentration measurements ug m that account for both nonvolatile and volatile PM components Operatine TEOM 1405 DF 1 3 Section 1 INTRODUCTION Overview of Manual This manual describes the installation and operation of the TEOM 1405 1 4 Operatine TEOM 1405 DF DF Monitor Follow the setup instructions contained in Section 2 and 3 before attempting to operate the unit This manual is divided into five sections Sections 1 and 2 explain the system s hardware while later sections describe the system s software and the setup and operation of the monitor The following list provides an overview of the topics handled in each section of the manual Section 1 Introduction This section provides an overview of the TEOM 1405 DF Monitor as well as the theory of operation of the instrument s mass transducer Section 2 Setup and Installation This section describes how to set up and install the system s hardware and sampling system Section 3 Basic Operation This section provides instructions on how to turn on the instrument and initiate a sampling run It also explains how to download data and how to leak check the instrument Section 4 Screens and Settings This section explains how to set up the instrument s firmware and its operating modes Section 5 Maintenance and Calibration Procedures This section describes the routine maintenance and verification procedures for the TEOM 1405 DF Monitor
214. es to 80 50 and 0 of the maximum permissible filter loading specified and the constancy of the sample volumetric flow is recorded as a 3 minute average every 30 minutes for at least 24 hours to remain constant within 3 of the rated value The following text is copied with minor alterations from Section 6 1 5 4 7 of the TUV Rheinland Report Equipment A flow meter was provided Performance of test The sample volumetric flow was calibrated before the first field sampling test site and tested for its accuracy before each field sampling test site using a dry gas meter or a mass flow meter and readjusted if necessary For the measuring device TEOM 1405 DF Ambient Particulate Monitor a total flow rate of 16 67 at the inlet is split in three sub flows the PM25 path with l min the PMgoarse path with 1 67 l min and the Bypass with 12 l min To determine the constancy of the relevant sample volumetric flow a flow rate for and a total flow rate for the test site Cologne Winter which partly was characterized by high concentrations and filter loads up to gt 50 were recorded in the candidates and the flow rates were evaluated on a 24 h basis Evaluation From the determined average for the flow rate average standard deviation and maximum and minimum values were defined Assessment The results from the performed flow rate checks before each field test site are represented in Table 7 Bureau Veri
215. est Uncertainty Calculations 12 4 Introduction The MCERTS for UK Particulate Matter uses the same methodology as that employed in the 2010 version of the A series of five criteria must be fulfilled in order to prove equivalence 1 Of the full dataset at least 20 of the results obtained using the standard method shall be greater than the upper assessment threshold specified in 2008 50 EC for annual limit values i e 28 ug m for and currently 17 g m for PM s 2 The intra instrument uncertainty of the candidate must be less than 2 5 g m for all data and for two sub datasets corresponding to all the data split greater than or equal to and lower than 30 ug m or 18 g m for PM and 5 respectively 3 The intra instrument uncertainty of the reference method must be less than 2 0 ug m 4 The expanded uncertainty Woy is calculated at 50 for and 30 ug m for for each individual candidate instrument against the average results of the reference method For each of the following permutations the expanded uncertainty must be less than 25 96 e Full dataset e Datasets representing PM concentrations greater than or equal to 30 ug m for PMio or concentrations greater than or equal to 18 g m for s provided that the subset contains 40 or more valid data pairs e Datasets for each individual test site 5 Preconditions for acceptance of the full dataset are that the slope b is insign
216. et that is mounted on the tripod each time that you replace a TEOM filter every 30 days Clean the virtual impactor every time you replace the TEOM filters every 30 days Replace the PM 2 5 and PM Coarse flow in line filters and the bypass in line filter every 6 months or as necessary Clean the coolers once a year or as necessary Clean the switching valve once a year Of as necessary Clean the air inlet system inside the mass transducer once a year or as necessary Rebuild the sample pump once every 18 months or as necessary The pump rebuild kit 59 008630 contains instructions for rebuilding the pump Operatine TEOM 1405 DF 5 1 Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES These maintenance intervals are guidelines Requirements for routine maintenance are site specific and may vary from one location to another Maintenance Wizards 1405 DF software allows users to step through the periodic maintenance procedures Select the Service button to display the Service screen When in the Service screen select the Maintenance button to display the Maintenance screen Figure 5 1 TEOM Data screen System Status 30 4in Instrument 1 Hr MC ng Conditians E Hr hat 12 Hr z4 Hr gem Settings Filter boating Frequeney ray sero Figure 5 2 1405 Service screen TEOM Data
217. f varying oe and is not restricted THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Operatine Guipe TEOM 1405 DF B 7 APPENDIX SERIAL COMMUNICATION AK Protocol Set Function Command SFxx RS Para 1 ASCII code for the 1 digit Station Number for example 4 052 The Station Number is always 1 digit in length RS Para 2 75048 ASCII code representation of the 2 digit Channel Number for example KO 075 048 The Channel Number is always 2 digits in length RS Para 3 13010 Optional Up to 3 ASCII codes can be added to response from the instrument In this case CR and lt LF gt ASCII codes 013 and 010 are appended to the response Enter 0 if nothing is to be appended are eee Bsp Set Function command where xx o represents 2 digit code between 4 digit Set Function command with the 00 and 32 These codes are defined 2 digit code corresponding to the function that was set below o pee LE Ar NENNEN 2 digit Channel Number as defined Number of current status conditions of current status conditions DESEE Upto 3 digits appended to the end of the entry for RS Para 3 pee MD pel LISTING OF FUNCTION CODES xx ee ee lt Run gt lt Data Stop gt F1 F5 Stop All gt 1 Set Time 2 3 To Set Time Remotely Ensure that the instrument is in the Stop Mode Transmit the proper values in PRCs 2 through 6 Execute the SF26 comm
218. f PM equivalence datasets This tool has been superseded and is no longer available for download The mathematics within the 2004 tool have been validated by both TUV Rheinland and BV to give an identical result to the equations specified in GDE2010 In CEN TS16450 2013 the same orthogonal methodology is allowed though a number of other orthogonal regression methods are now also permissible In all cases the uncertainty of the reference method was calculated for each individual dataset in accordance with GDE2010 As in all cases there were two reference methods available it was not necessary to use the recommended default uncertainty of 0 67 for any of the calculations The following text is copied with minor alterations from Section 6 1 5 4 10 of the T V Rheinland Report Equipment Not required for this minimum requirement Evaluation The calculation of the in between instrument uncertainty of the reference devices is carried out prior to the calculation of the expanded uncertainty of the candidates The in between instrument uncertainty Uret of the reference devices shall be lt 2 uig m These results are discussed in the detailed description of results below 10 File Test for EquivalenceV31004 xls formerly available to download from http ec europa eu environment air quality legislation assessment htm Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 67 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence
219. fs and set aside 3 Clean the insect screen with brush or water then dry 4 Using a general purpose cleaner and paper towel clean the deflector cone on the inside of the top plate 5 18 Operatine Guine TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES 5 Clean the internal wall surface of the acceleration assembly Figure 5 25 Note Ensure the acceleration nozzle is clean If not use a cotton swab and cleaner to remove any contamination Figure 5 25 Interior wall of inlet 6 Inspect the large diameter impactor nozzle O ring for damage or wear Figure 5 24 Replace it if necessary Apply a thin film of silicone grease to the O ring Also apply a light coating of silicone grease to the aluminum threads of the upper acceleration assembly 7 Using a general purpose cleaner with a paper towel clean the collector assembly walls and plate Figure 5 26 Note Most of the contamination in the inlet is usually found on the collector plate Figure 5 26 Inside of inlet collector assembly Collector plate THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Operatinc TEOM 1405 DF 5 19 Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES 8 Clean the three vent tubes Figure 5 26 You may need to use a cotton swab to clean these vent tubes 9 Clean the bottom side of the collector assembly Figure 5 27 Inspect the two inlet tube sealing O rings for damage or wear If necessary
220. fter intercept correction PM2 5 1405DF 30 2 17 ug m3 Orthogonal Regression Betw een Instrument Uncertainties FDMS Intercept Corrected WCM 96 Slope b ub Intercept a ua Reference Candidate All Data 338 0 976 lt 18 ug m3 247 0 8921 1 094 0 023 0 786 0 235 gt 18 ug m3 91 0 955 1 015 0 023 0 882 0 748 Orthogonal Regression Limit Value of 30 ug m3 Dataset EN Slope b ub Intercept a ua WCM 96 gt 17 ug m 3 Bornheim Winter 0 990 1 055 0 014 0 102 Cologne Winter 0 983 1 029 0 016 0 329 Individual Datasets Bornheim Summer 0 972 1 080 0 020 0 364 Teddington 0 957 0 851 0 016 lt 18 ug m3 247 0 8721 1 086 0 025 0 490 0 254 17 50 4 5 Combined Datasets gt 18 ug m3 0 948 1 029 0 025 0 876 0 819 17 90 100 0 All Data 338 0 9721 1 006 0 009 0 140 0 176 13 02 30 2 Orthogonal Regression Limit Value of 30 ug m3 Dataset LINES Slope b ub Intercept a ua WOM 96 96 gt 17 ug m 3 Bornheim Winter 0 992 1 028 0 012 0 861 Cologne Winter 0 982 1 003 0 016 0 241 Individual Datasets Bornheim Summer 0 972 1 084 0 020 0 802 Teddington 0 968 0 861 0 014 lt 18 ug m3 250 0 899 1 112 0 022 1 175 0 229 17 49 4 4 Combined Datasets gt 18 ug m3 0 958 1 005 0 022 0 975 0 717 16 50 100 0 All Data 341 0 977 0 991 0 008 0 172 0 158 11 85 29 9 Bureau Veritas
221. g input 3 22 Analog input 3 ground 10 Analog input 4 23 Analog input 4 ground 11 Digital 1 0 1 24 Digital 1 0 1 12 Digital 1 0 2 25 Digital 1 0 2 13 THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Operatine Guine TEOM 1405 DF 3 35 Section 3 Basic OPERATION 3 36 Operatine TEOM 1405 DF When 25 pin Phoenix Contact connector is attached to the unit with the wired digital or analog device connections the inputs outputs must be set up using the TEOM 1405 software screens When in the Instrument Conditions screen select the Analog Inputs button to set up the analog inputs 1 4 and convert the incoming voltage to the desired scale The analog inputs self calibrating When in the Settings screen select the Analog amp Digital Outputs screen to set up the analog outputs 1 8 and digital outputs contact closures 1 2 e When in the Analog amp Digital Outputs screen select the Analog Outputs button to seta minimum and maximum value for the output for the desired output channel Refer to Section 5 for information on calibrating the analog outputs e When in the Analog amp Digital Outputs screen select the Contact Closure 5 5 button to select a variable operator and compare value for the desired contact closure channel 1 2 Refer to Section 4 for complete information on setting the inputs outputs in the Analog Inputs and Analog amp Digital Outputs screens THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section4 Screens and Setting
222. g m3 SN 20116 Dataset ee e Slope b ub Intercept a ua WCM gt 28 ug m 3 Bornheim Winter 0 993 1 032 0 011 Other Cologne Winter 74 0 988 1 023 0 013 Individual Datasets Bornheim Summer 75 0 974 1 113 0 021 Teddington 124 0 942 0 896 0 020 lt 30 ug m3 262 0 914 1 047 0 019 0 603 0 330 13 91 3 4 Combined Datasets gt 30 ug m3 76 0 950 1 014 0 026 0 880 1 176 12 43 100 0 All Data 338 0 976 1 013 0 008 1 105 0 221 10 75 25 1 Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 70 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the PM and PM TEOM 1405 DF The check of the five criteria from Section 12 1 resulted as follows Criterion 1 Greater than 20 of the data are greater than 28 Criterion 2 The intra instrument uncertainty of the candidates is smaller than 2 5 uig m Criterion 3 The intra instrument uncertainty of the reference is smaller than 2 0 uig m Criterion 4 All of the expanded uncertainties are below 25 Criterion 5 For both candidates at the evaluation of the All data set the intercepts are significantly greater than allowed for SN 20014 the slope is significantly greater than allowed The evaluation of the All data set for both candidates together shows that the AMS demonstrates a very good correlation with the reference method with a slope of 1 016 and an intercept of 1 078 at an expended tota
223. ge 64 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the and PM TEOM 1405 DF VERITAS Figure 42 Results of the parallel measurements with the candidates SN 20014 SN 20116 measured component test site Bornheim Summer 1405 DF SN 20014 SN 20116 Bornheim Summer Raw data X Measured values Regression line y x Candidate 2 ug m MH MM MMHM M MM 4 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 Candidate 1 g m7 Figure 43 Results of the parallel measurements with the candidates SN 20014 SN 20116 measured component test site Bornheim Winter 1405 DF SN 20014 SN 20116 Bornheim Winter Raw data Measured values Regression line y x Candidate 2 ug m 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 Candidate 1 ug m Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 65 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the and PM TEOM 1405 DF VERITAS tz Figure 44 Results of the parallel measurements with the candidates SN 20014 SN 20116 measured component PM 9 all test sites gt 30 g m 1405 DF SN 20014 SN 20116 Alle test sites gt 30 Raw data 130 120 110 100
224. gemaB des Gesetzes her die Akkreditierungsstelle AkkStelleG vom 31 Juli 2009 BGBl 5 2625 sowie der Verordnung Nr 765 2008 des Europ ischen Parlaments und des Rates vom 9 Juli 2008 ber die Vorschriften f r die Akkreditierung und Markt berwachung im Zusammenhang mit der Vermarktung von Produkten Abl L 218 vom 9 Juli 2008 5 30 Die ist Unterzeichnerin der Multilateralen Abkommen zur gegenseitigen Anerkennung der European co operation for Accreditation EA des International Accreditation Forum und der International Laboratory Accreditation Cooperation ILAC Die Unterzeichner dieser Abkommen erkennen ihre Akkreditierungen gegenseitig an Der aktuelle Stand der Mitgliedschaft kann folgenden Webseiten entnommen werden EA www european accreditation org ILAC www ilac org IAF www iaf nu Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 115 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the and 5 TEOM 1405 DF BUREAU EAN Figure 84 ISO17025 Accreditation deeds of NPL excerpts Schedule of Accreditation issued by United Kingdom Accreditation Service 21 47 High Street Feltham Middlesex TW13 4UN UK NPL Management Ltd Issue No 047 Hampton Road Teddington Middlesex TW11 OLW Accredited to ISO IEC 17025 2005 Issue date 22 October 2012 Contact Customer Helpline Tel 44 0 20 8943 7070 Fax 44 0 20 8943 6184 E Mail measurem
225. ges reference measurement Furthermore the evaluation of the following data sets is done Each test site respectively comparison individually 1 Data set with measured values lt 18 g m for PM25 Basis averages of reference measurement 1 Data set with measured values lt 30 ug m for PM Basis averages of reference measurement The in between instrument uncertainty Ups is calculated from the differences of all 24 hour results of the simultaneously operated candidate systems according to the following equation Y Fi Yi 2n and yi results of the parallel measurements of individual 24h values i n number of 24h values Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 58 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the and 5 TEOM 1405 DF Assessment The in between uncertainty between the candidates is with a maximum of 1 05 g m for and with a maximum of 1 06 ug m for below the required value of 2 5 uig m3 Detailed representation of the test results Table 20 and Table 21 show the calculated values for the uncertainty between systems under test Ups The graphical representation is shown in Figure 32 through to Figure 45 Table 20 Uncertainty between systems under test for the candidates SN 20014 and SN 20116 measured component PM 5 values pow 25 771 usan emm ac Single test sites 20014 20116 145 Classification via reference value 2
226. ghts in and over the Report and its contents Any questions or matters arising from this Report should be addressed in the first instance to the Project Manager Bureau Veritas UK Limited Telephone 44 0 207 661 0700 Registered Office Fax 44 0 207 661 0741 Brandon House Registered in England 1758622 180 Borough High Street www bureauveritas co uk London SE1 1LB Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the and 5 TEOM 1405 DF This page is left blank intentionally Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the and PM25 TEOM 1405 DF Table of Contents 11 EXECUTIVE SUMMARY onere decret tdeo doctus ep aparece 12 GENERAL INFORMA TION T 17 1 Summary of Principles of the Candidate 17 1 1 Measuring Principle e 17 1 2 Functionality of the Measuring 2 2 44 400 18 1 3 Candidate Instrument Scope and Layout nennen 19 2 Scope of Equivalence 24 3 Conditions for which Equivalence is 25 4 Sources of Uncertainty for the Reference 26 5 Competencies of the L
227. gt button Figure 5 55 Flow Audit Wizard Welcome to the Flow Audit Wizard This wizard helps you pertonm flow audits on the TEGH Dichos Ambient Farticuiate Monitor The instrument will bx put in Setup mode for the audit continue press gt Cancel 5 46 Operatine Guine TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES 3 The Select a Flow Audit Device screen will display Select a flow audit device Select Direct Flow Device to audit the flow using a direct flow measuring device reading l min adjusted for temperature and pressure such as the Streamline Pro Select FTS to audit the flow using the FTS system FTS users will enter the device calibration constant and the change in pressure from the FTS Select the Next gt button 4 The Select Flow to Audit screen will display Select which flow to audit Press the Next gt button Note If you selected the FTS option in the previous screen you will be prompted to enter the correct calibration constants before proceeding with the audit Figure 5 56 Figure 5 56 Enter FTS Constants Enter FTS Constants screen THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Operatinc TEOM 1405 DF 5 47 Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES 5 The Connect Flow Audit Device screen will display Attach a flow meter to the appropriate flow channel a To audit the PM 2 5 flow
228. he or 5 concentrations during individual campaigns are within the range prescribed in Table 28 below for a specific site type There is also the requirement that at least 6 calendar months of data should be available though allowances are made for instruments that were tested before MCERTS for UK Particulate Matter was published Table 28 Range of geometric mean concentrations for each site type in the UK calculated using 2007 2010 data with this data factored to estimate the geometric mean ranges Site Type Geometric Mean PM Range ug m Geometric Mean PM Range ug m Background urban or suburban 11 9 25 7 8 4 18 1 Industrial 13 8 24 6 9 7 17 4 Additionally there is a requirement that at least one of the four field tests of at least 40 data pairs has at least 10 of days where there was a high percentage and at least one of the four field tests of at least 40 data pairs has at least 10 of days where there was a low percentage of e Wind Speed e Ambient Temperature and Ambient Dew Point Further there is a requirement that at least one of the four field tests of at least 40 data pairs has at least 5 of days where there was a high percentage and at least one of the four field tests of at least 40 data pairs has at least 5 96 of days where there was a low percentage of e Semi Volatile PM component The low and high thresholds are summarised in Table 29 For wind speed differen
229. he 1 hour mass concentration averages for the PM 2 5 and PM Coatse channels as well as the 10 average This is a sliding average that is updated every 60 minutes on the hour This value cannot be changed by the user 08 Hr MC ug m This field contains the XX hour mass concentration averages for the PM 2 5 and PM Coatse channels as well as the PM 10 average The user may set value to any whole number greater than 1 This is a sliding average that is updated every 60 minutes on the hour This value cannot be changed by the user Note Mass concentration averages of less than 24 hours can be averaged using data logging equipment to compute sliding 24 hour averages and 24 hour averages that do not necessarily start and end at midnight as well as averages on other user defined time scales A 12 Hr MC ug m This field contains the 12 hour mass concentration averages for the PM 2 5 and PM Coatse channels as well as the PM 10 average This is a sliding average that is updated every 60 minutes on the hour This value cannot be changed by the user 24 Hr MC ug m This field contains the 24 hour mass concentration averages for the PM 2 5 and PM Coatse channels as well as the PM 10 average This is a sliding average that is updated every 60 minutes on the hour This value cannot be changed by the user Frequency This field contains the oscillating frequency of the tapered element TE in the mass transducer This value varies from one
230. he TEOM filters The filter loading percentage value indicates the percentage of the TEOM filter s total capacity that has been used You can check the TEOM filter loading percentage on the monitor s TEOM Data screen Figure 5 4 Because this value is determined by the pressure drop of the main sample flow line the instrument always shows a non zero value even if no TEOM filter is mounted in the mass transducer New TEOM filters generally exhibit filter loading percentages of 15 to 30 at a main flow rate of 3 1 min and less at lower flow rates TEOM 1405 DF nd TEOM Data System Status B0 Mim pgi E 1 bas ugima 1z Hr z4 Hr MC Instrument Conditions Settings Filter kondan Fregnipieey Note TEOM filters must be replaced before the filter loading percentage reaches 100 to ensure the quality of the data generated by the instrument At some point above 100 the main flow drops below its set point If the filter loading percentage is higher than 30 at a main flow rate of 3 l min when a new TEOM filter is placed on the mass transducer or if the lifetime of consecutive TEOM filters becomes noticeably shorter you may need to replace the in line filter Refer to Exchanging the In Line Filters later in this section THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES Filters s
231. he implications of the findings of TUV Rheinland for the UK Bureau Veritas wish to thank TUV Rheinland and NPL for their contributions to this report 1 Annex to the MCERTS Performance standards for Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Systems Requirements of the UK Competent Authority for the Equivalence Testing and Certification of Automated Continuous and Manual Discontinuous Methods that Monitor Particulate Matter Ambient Air httpz uk air defra gov uk documents MCERTS_for 20UK_Particulate_Matter_final pdf 2 Report on the suitability test of the ambient air quality measuring system TEOM 1405 DF Ambient Particulate Monitor with PM pre separator and virtual impactor of the company Thermo Fisher Scientific for the components and PMs Report number 936 21209885 A dated 11 March 2012 www qal1 de en hersteller thermo htm Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 12 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 BUREAU VERITAS le Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the and 5 TEOM 1405 DF The following tables and notes summarise the findings in relation to MCERTS for UK Particulate Matter Certification Range PM 0 to 1000 ug m Ambient temperature range 8 C to 25 C Table 1 Summary of the test results The data in this table relate to the instrument without correction for slope and or intercept See Note 1 Results MCERTS Specification 4500196 To remain constant within volumetric flow 3 of the
232. he last data download Select the OK button Figure 3 34 Select Data screen Select Data Downiiads Gan contain the data from ingirument g database or only he data onlected since the lasi download Download data 4 The instrument will display downloading data message and begin transferring data to the USB drive Note Do not remove the USB drive from the instrument while the data is downloading 5 When the data download is complete the instrument will display a Download complete message and display the file name as it is stored on the USB flash drive The file name format is the instrument serial number followed by a date time stamp Remove the USB flash drive and select the OK button to continue 3 32 Operatine TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 3 Basic OPERATION Viewing Data files are downloaded and saved as csv files txt files through USB Downloaded Data that can be opened and viewed with Microsoft Excel The file name format is the instrument setial number followed by a date time stamp The data files will be saved to the folder selected using the Download Setup Wizard Refer to the Setting Up for a Data Download section for information on setting up a data folder The default folder location is C Program Files VThermo ePortV Data Figure 3 35 Data csv file opened in Excel SO Se _ an Ses Gd Ga os Hc ae
233. heim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer eu pue ojeq uelis Wed 27 Jul 11 07 00 Thu 28 Jul 11 07 00 Fri 29 Jul 11 07 00 Sat 30 Jul 11 07 00 Sun 31 Jul 11 07 00 Mon 01 Aug 11 07 00 Tue 02 Aug 11 07 00 Wed 03 Aug 11 07 00 Thu 04 Aug 11 07 00 Fri 05 Aug 11 07 00 Sat 06 Aug 11 07 00 Sun 07 Aug 11 07 00 Mon 08 Aug 11 07 00 Tue 09 Aug 11 07 00 Wed 10 Aug 11 07 00 Thu 11 Aug 11 07 00 Fri 12 Aug 11 07 00 Sat 13 Aug 11 07 00 Sun 14 Aug 11 07 00 Mon 15 Aug 11 07 00 Tue 16 Aug 11 07 00 Wed 17 Aug 11 07 00 Thu 18 Aug 11 07 00 Fri 19 Aug 11 07 00 Sat 20 Aug 11 07 00 Sun 21 Aug 11 07 00 Mon 22 Aug 11 07 00 Tue 23 Aug 11 07 00 gui Drl SA1 S ZNd 14 3 17 5 10 2 9 8 12 7 10 3 17 0 8 7 8 6 2 8 2 8 2 7 5 3 5 5 3 0 2 6 6 0 6 0 14 7 9 0 6 6 10 4 10 9 19 2 ui Drl Z SA1 13 7 19 0 7 9 9 5 11 4 10 1 16 6 8 4 10 6 3 1 4 0 3 2 6 4 5 2 3 8 3 6 5 4 6 0 14 0 8 7 6 2 10 3 10 8 19 1 Wed 24 Aug 11 07 00 6 7 7 4 Bureau Veritas Air Quality AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 L ESAT OLWd 21 5 26 5 16 8 13 3 1
234. hermo 1405 Installer screen X Welcome to the Thermo 1405 Installer 1405 This wizard will guide you through the process of installing Installer new software on your Thermo instrument All configuration data will be restored All other stored data will be erased Note This application calls 7 Zip an archive utility licensed under the GNU LGPL The source code for 7 Zip be SCIENTIFIC downloaded from www 7 zip org Thermo Bectron Corporation 7 The Software File screen will display Select the Browse button to locate and select the file from the CD or the file that was downloaded from the company website For firmware updates using ePort the file is named etx dichotFDMS_ePort rc When the file is selected it will display in the window below Choose the File to Upload Select the Next gt button 4 38 Operatine TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 4 SCREENS AND SETTINGS 8 The Upload Software screen will display Figure 4 32 The software will restart the instrument then install the firmware The Upload Progress bar will show the status of the upload When the process is complete select the Next gt button Figure 4 32 _ Thermo 1405 Installer Upload Software screen Upload Software Upload the new software file to the instrument Settings Filename rpco dev rc 9 Restarting Instrument This may take a few minutes Upload Progress
235. hould be stored inside the unit for easy access and to keep them dry and warm TEOM filter life depends upon the nature and concentration of the particulate matter sampled as well as the flow rate settings TEOM filters must be replaced when the filter loading value approaches 100 This generally corresponds to a total mass accumulation on the filter of approximately 3 5 mg TEOM filter at a main flow rate of 3 l min is generally 21 days at an average PM 10 concentration of 50 ug m TEOM filter life is longer at lower flow rates because the particulate matter accumulation on the TEOM filter is slower TEOM filters must be replaced before the filter loading percentage on the status line of the Main screen reaches 100 When the filter loading percentage is greater than 90 the unit will trigger a status condition You must replace the 47 mm filter every time that you replace a TEOM filter Note Do not handle new TEOM filters with your fingers Use the filter exchange tool provided with the instrument to replace filters Operatine Guipe TEOM 1405 DF 5 5 Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES Changing the TEOM Filters install a TEOM filter 1 Ensure that the filter exchange tool is clean and free of any contamination that might be transferred to the TEOM filter 2 In the 1405 TEOM Data screen select the Service button to display the Service screen then select the Maintenance button to display the Maintenanc
236. ications when subjected to normal proper and intended usage by properly trained personnel for 12 months from date of installation or 13 months from date of shipment whichever is less the Warranty Period Seller agrees during the Warranty Period provided it is promptly notified in writing upon the discovery of any defect and further provided that all costs of returning the defective Products to Seller are pre paid by Buyer to repait or replace at Seller s option defective Products so as to cause the same to operate in substantial conformance with said specifications Replacement parts may be new or refurbished at the election of Seller All replaced parts shall become the property of Seller Shipment to Buyer of repaired or replacement Products shall be made in accordance with the provisions of Section 5 of the Terms and Conditions of Sale agreement Lamps fuses bulbs and other expendable items including the dryers are expressly excluded from the warranty under Section 9 of the Terms and Conditions of Sale agreement Seller s sole liability with respect to equipment materials parts or software furnished to Seller by third party suppliers shall be limited to the assignment by Seller to Buyer of any such third party supplier s watranty to the extent the same is assignable In no event shall Seller have any obligation to make repairs replacements or corrections required in whole or in part as the result of i normal wear and tear it accid
237. ificantly different from 1 b 1 2 u b and the intercept a is insignificantly different from 0 a lt 2 u a If these preconditions are not met the candidate method may be calibrated using the values obtained for slope and or intercept of all paired instruments together The fulfilment of the 5 criteria is checked in the following Sections Criteria 1 and 2 are discussed in Section 12 2 Criteria 3 4 and 5 are discussed in Section 12 3 Criterion 5 is further discussed in Section 12 4 12 2 Determination of uncertainty between systems under test Ups In this Section Criteria 1 and 2 are assessed namely 1 Of the full dataset at least 20 96 of the results obtained using the standard method shall be greater than the upper assessment threshold specified in 2008 50 EC for annual limit values i e 28 ug m for and currently 17 ug m for PM s 2 The intra instrument uncertainty of the candidate must be less than 2 5 g m for all data and for two sub datasets corresponding to all the data split greater than or equal to and lower than 30 ug m or 18 g m for PM and PM respectively The following text is copied with minor alterations from Section 6 1 5 4 9 of the T V Rheinland Report Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 57 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific 2 UK Report on the Equivalence of the PM and 5 TEOM 1405 DF Equipment Not required for this minimum requirement Performance of test
238. impactor install the impactor on the flow splitter and install the inlet on the top of the adapter tube Figures 5 28 Note When assembling the virtual impactor ensure that the positions of the parts are correct since incorrect assembly will result in invalid sample data Figure 5 29 Virtual impactor lt p B THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC TEOM 1405 DF 5 23 Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES Exchanging In Line Filters Figure 5 29 Back of 1405 unit PM Coarse flow filter 5 24 Operatine Guine TEOM 1405 DF The small PM 2 5 and PM Coarse flow in line filters 32 010745 and the large bypass flow filter 32 010755 should be changed every 6 months or as necessary They are located on the back of the unit Figure 5 29 These filters prevent contamination from reaching the flow controllers For convenience replace the large in line filters immediately following one of the regularly scheduled TEOM filter exchanges This allows you to exchange the in line filters during the 30 minute flow and temperature stabilization period Bypass filter PM 2 5 flow filter THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES To exchange the in line filters 1 Unplug the sample pump 2 Unscrew and temove the small filter covets for both the PM 2 5 and PM Coarse flow channels on the back of the unit Figure 5 30 Figure 5 30 Removing the f
239. in fprEN12341 2013 and CEN TS16450 including to precisely quantify analyser baseline performance and ensure the continued correct operation of the FDMS drier 3 CEN Final Draft Standard fprEN12341 2013 Ambient air Standard gravimetric measurement method for the determination of the or PM25 mass concentration of suspended particulate matter 4 CEN Technical Specification CEN TS16450 2013 Ambient air Automated measuring systems for the measurement of the concentration of particulate matter PM2 5 Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 15 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 BUREAU VERITAS Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the and PM25 TEOM 1405 DF Table 3 Summary of the slope intercept and expanded uncertainties with and without intercept correction for data Calculated Calculated Expanded Range of TEOM 1405 DF Data slope of all 2 uncertainty of a Pie paired data 3 all paired data pange ug m uncertainties 9 6 to Uncorrected data 1 016 1 078 11 2 23 8 7 0 to Data corrected for intercept by subtracting 1 078 1 016 0 000 8 9 19 7 Note 2 The leak test procedure for the 1405 DF is an internal manufacturers procedure implemented in the instruments in order to avoid serious damage to the instrument The check on tightness must be performed using this internal procedure All of the leak tests conducted passed the manuf
240. in the line when it enters the enclosure Connect the bypass tubing to the bypass fitting on the flow splitter using the 3 8 inch Swagelok fitting Figure 2 28 Insert the other end through the fitting on the roof Figure 2 26 and into the enclosure about 4 to 6 inches Connect the coiled tubing from the water trap filter to the bypass line near the top of the shelter with the quick connect fitting Ensure that the coiled water trap tubing is vertical Figure 2 20 2 24 Operatine TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC 2 SETUP AND INSTALLATION 14 Locate the ambient temperature and humidity sensor Connect the sensor to the flow splitter using the U bolt provided with the 1405 unit Figure 2 28 15 Attach the sensor cable to the sensor and run the sensor cable to the instrument through the opening in the back of the enclosure Figure 2 29 Attach the sensor to the sensor connection on the back of the TEOM 1405 DF unit Figure 2 30 Note The opening in the back of the enclosure can also be used for other connections such as Ethernet connections A Figure 2 29 Temperature humidity sensor cable entering the outdoor enclosure Sensor cable Figure 2 30 Temperature humidity sensor connection of the back of the TEOM 1405 DF unit Temperature humidity cable connection THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Operatinc TEOM 1405 DF 2 25 Section 2 SETUP AND INSTALLATION 16 Install the sample
241. inc TEOM 1405 DF 5 39 Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES Aud it Calibration Thermo Scientific recommends the following regular maintenance Procedures 2 01 for the TEOM 1405 DF Ambient temperature Audit calibrate the ambient temperature Ambient pressure Flow Leak check Analog outputs Mass transducer 5 40 Operatine Guine TEOM 1405 DF measurement once per month The temperature must be calibrated before a flow calibration Audit calibrate the ambient pressure measurement once per month The pressure must be calibrated before a flow calibration Audit calibrate the PM 2 5 PM Coatse bypass flows once a month Perform a leak check once a month or as necessaty refer to Section 3 for leak check instructions Calibrate the analog output channels once a yeat or as necessary for example any time the voltage range setting is changed Audit the calibration of the mass transducer once a yeat THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES The TEOM 1405 DF software allows users to step through the standard calibration and audit procedures Select the Service button to display the Service screen When in the Service screen select the Verification or Calibration buttons to display the Verification and Calibration screens Figure 5 49 and 5 50 Figure 5 49 Calibration screen 1405 DF Service Calibration Mene
242. ince the last download Select the Next gt button 5 The Select Location screen will display Use the Browse button to select a location for the data file downloaded by the software Select the Next gt button 6 The Download Type screen will display Select manual downloads Select the Next gt button 7 The Completing the Download Setup Wizard screen will display Select the Finish button 3 26 Operatine TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 3 Basic OPERATION Setting Up for Users can set up automatic downloads for the TEOM 1405 DF monitor Automatic Data THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Downloads using the ePort software To set up the software to automatically download data 1 Ensure that PC and the instrument ate connected to the same network using the Ethernet connection on the back of the instrument Refer to the previous section for information on connecting the instrument to a network Use the ePort PC software to connect to the instrument and display the ePort Main screen Figure 3 28 Refer to the previous sections for information on connecting to the instrument or instruments Select Download Setup in the Commands window of the ePort Main screen The Download Setup Wizard will display Figure 3 29 Select the Next gt button The Select Data screen will display Select the data to download either all data on the instrument or the data since the last download Select the
243. ine and coarse filter covers 3 Unsctew the filter mounts for both the PM 2 5 and the PM Coarse flow channels Figure 5 31 Figure 5 31 Removing the filter mounts THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Operatinc TEOM 1405 DF 5 25 Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES 4 Slide the filter cartridges off the mounts and install new cartridges onto the mounts Figure 5 32 Figure 5 32 Filter cartridge and mount Filter cartridge Mount EL 5 Install the mounts into the unit then install the covers 6 Unscrew and remove the large filter cover from the bypass flow channel on the back of the unit Figure 5 33 Figure 5 33 Bypass in line filter Large filter cover 5 26 Guine TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES 7 Unscrew the filter mount for the bypass flow channel 8 Slide the large filter cartridge off the mount and install a new cartridge onto the mount Figure 5 34 Figure 5 34 Bypass filter mount with clean and dirty filter cartridges Clean filter cartridge Dirty filter cartridge j 9 Install the mount into the unit then install the cover for the bypass flow 10 Plug in the sample pump and return to normal operation THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Operatinc TEOM 1405 DF 5 27 Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES Cleaning the Air Inlet You must cl
244. ing from the enclosure package onto the piece of 19 inch section of pipe that came with the enclosure Lightly tighten the screws Install the elbow fitting and support pipe onto the flow splitter and enclosure top Figure 2 27 Slide the support pipe up or down until the flow splitter is sitting plumb then attach the arm to the shelter and tighten all the screws on Figure 2 27 the support arm Support pipe connections 2 Adjustable elbow n fitting E Y ia 2 7 gt Flow splitter Support pipe Male swivel fitting THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Operatinc TEOM 1405 DF 2 23 Section 2 SETUP AND INSTALLATION 12 Install the virtual impactor on the top of the flow splitter and the coarse sample fitting The flow splitter and coarse sample tube must be fully seated into the impactor Figure 2 28 Note The coarse flow channel is the right channel as you face the instrument with the 1 2 inch Swagelok connection on the bottom of the virtual impactor Figure 2 28 Virtual impactor temperature humidity sensor and sample tubes Virtual impactor Temperature humidity sensor Flow splitter Coarse sample tube Bypass connection 13 Cut a piece of tubing from the remaining section of bypass tubing step 8 long enough to reach from the bypass connection to the top of the 1405 unit The section should be long enough to include a loop Figure 2 28 to ensure there will be no kinks
245. inter Dichot 20014 6 min Col W 2011 Total flow s Limit Total Flow 15 0 1 17 2011 2 16 2011 3 18 2011 4 17 2011 5 17 2011 Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 32 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the and 5 TEOM 1405 DF Figure 8 Time Series of the PM concentration ug m3 Candidate SN 20116 Cologne Winter Dichot 20116 6 min Col W 2011 Dichot 20116 tmoTEOMAMC 0 Dichot 20116 tnoTEOMBMC 0 0 t M 1 4 2011 6 16 2011 Figure 9 PM 5 flow rate at candidate SN 20116 Cologne Winter PM2 5 Dichot 20116 6 min Col W 2011 tmoTEOMAFlowMass 0 e imit TEOM A Flow 2 8 1 17 2011 2 16 2011 3 18 2011 4 17 2011 5 17 2011 Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 33 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the and 5 TEOM 1405 DF Figure 10 PMcoarse flow rate at candidate SN 20116 Cologne Winter 1 5 1 17 2011 2 16 2011 PMGrob Dichot 20116 6 min Col W 2011 3 18 2011 4 17 2011 tmoTEOMBFlowMass_0 e Limit TEOM B Flow 5 17 2011 Figure 11 Total flow rate at candidate SN 20116 Cologne Winter 15 0 1 17 2011 2 16 2011 Dichot 20116 6 min Col W 2011 3 18 2011 4 17 2011 Total flow e Limit Total Flow 5 17
246. inter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter Bornheim Winter eu pue uelis Mon 19 Dec 11 07 00 Tue 20 Dec 11 07 00 Wed 21 Dec 11 07 00 Thu 22 Dec 11 07 00 Fri 23 Dec 11 07 00 Sat 24 Dec 11 07 00 Sun 25 Dec 11 07 00 Mon 26 Dec 11 07 00 Tue 27 Dec 11 07 00 Wed 28 Dec 11 07 00 Thu 29 Dec 11 07 00 Fri 30 Dec 11 07 00 Sat 31 Dec 11 07 00 Sun 01 Jan 12 07 00 Mon 02 Jan 12 07 00 Tue 03 Jan 12 07 00 Wed 04 Jan 12 07 00 Thu 05 Jan 12 07 00 Fri 06 Jan 12 07 00 Sat 07 Jan 12 07 00 Sun 08 Jan 12 07 00 Mon 09 Jan 12 07 00 Tue 10 Jan 12 07 00 Wed 11 Jan 12 07 00 Thu 12 Jan 12 07 00 Fri 18 Jan 12 07 00 Sat 14 Jan 12 07 00 Sun 15 Jan 12 07 00 Mon 16 Jan 12 07 00 Bureau Veritas Air Quality AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 gui Drl SA1 S ZNd 7 6 6 6 3 4 42 8 3 2 3 4 44 6 3 7 5 13 0 12 1 6 1 4 8 6 8 12 1 20 6 ui Drl Z SA1 8 0 7 7 2 5 41 2 1 9 3 2 2 6 5 0 7 0 11 6 10 7 5 9 4 7 6 4 12 2 22 3 L ESAT OLINd 2 SA10LWd 15 5 15 3 11 4 11 0 11 2 11 1 8 5 7 6 50 2 50 1 6 2 5 2 6 8 6 8 7 9 8 3 14 2 14 2 13 6 13 2 16 9 17 4 17 8 15 5 8 5 9 6 10 7 11 4 17 5 17 7 19 3 19 9 28 9 28 1 71002 NS 9 2 3 4 7 0 4 8 6 9 9 8 5 7 5 3 7 8 45 4 1 2 4 8 4 0 4 7
247. inty of the candidate must be less than 2 5 g m for all data and for two sub datasets corresponding to all the data split greater than or equal to and lower than 30 or 18 ug m for PM and PM respectively The intra instrument uncertainty of the reference method must be less than 2 0 ug m 4 expanded uncertainty Wem is calculated at 50 ug m for and 30 for 5 for each individual candidate instrument against the average results of the reference method For each of the following permutations the expanded uncertainty must be less than 25 96 e Full dataset Datasets representing PM concentrations greater than or equal to 30 ug m for or concentrations greater than or equal to 18 g m for 5 provided that the subset contains 40 or more valid data pairs e Datasets for each individual test site 5 Preconditions for acceptance of the full dataset are that the slope b is insignificantly different from 1 b 1 2 u b and the intercept a is insignificantly different from 0 a lt 2 u a If these preconditions not met the candidate method may be calibrated using the values obtained for slope and or intercept of all paired instruments together As at least 20 of the results obtained using the standard method are greater than 28 ug m for PM and 17 for PM s criterion 1 is fulfilled There is no requirement in MCERTS for UK Particulate Matter for this i
248. inutes and measures a mass concentration of 5 ug m Base MC 5 Then the unit draws a reference flow for six minutes and measures a mass concentration of 1 ug m Ref MC 1 Therefore the mass concentration is 6 ug m THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Operatine Guine TEOM 1405 DF 1 7 Section 1 INTRODUCTION Mass Transducer The weighing principle used in the unit s tapered element oscillating microbalance mass transducers Figure 1 2 is similar to that of a 0 pe ration laboratory microbalance in that the mass change detected by the sensor is the result of the measurement of a change in a parameter in this case frequency that is directly coupled via a physical law or from first principles to that mass change Figure 1 2 Schematic of mass transducer _ Exchangeable TEOM Filter Cartridge 1 8 Operatinc Guipe TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 1 INTRODUCTION The tapered element at the heart of the mass detection system is a hollow tube clamped on one end and free to oscillate at the other An exchangeable TEOM filter cartridge is placed over the tip of the free end The sample stream is drawn through this filter and then down through the tapered element The tapered element oscillates precisely at its natural frequency much like the tine of a tuning fork An electronic control circuit senses this oscillation and through positive feedback adds sufficient energy to
249. ion Tanz Settings THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Service Jb aiia Hund cites Tar Tumscwr vez Operatine TEOM 1405 DF Section 3 Basic OPERATION 3 Start the ePort PC software using the icon on the PC desktop or the Start menu of the PC The ePort Main screen with the Open screen will Figure 3 22 display Figure 3 22 ePort Main screen with Open screen Frei Sampler UpenSmwedCconkgursion Saved Configadon 4 In the ePort Open screen Figure 3 22 select create new configuration A blank ePort Main screen will display 3 20 Operatine TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 3 Basic OPERATION 5 Select Instrument then New Instrument from the menu bar at the top of the ePort Main screen Figure 3 23 Figure 3 23 Selecting New Instrument from the menu bar aP ePort Edit Instrument Delete Instrument New Group Refresh All Instruments 6 The Add New Instrument screen will display Figure 3 24 Enter the IP address the name assigned to the instrument and the group if any assigned to the instrument and select the OK button Figure 3 24 E Add New Instrument screen ap Add New Instrument SJ Instrument Name 1405 IP Address 10 210 96 144 Group Engineering THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Operatine Guine TEOM 1405 DF 3 21 Section 3 Basic OPERATION Figure 3 25 ePort Main screen with instrument information dis
250. ion constant K Section 1 for the PM 2 5 left TEOM e PM Coarse TEOM KO This field contains the calibration constant K Section 1 for the PM Coarse right TEOM Note You can find your monitor s KO numbers on the label located on the mass transducer under the insulation Each 1405 DF monitor has a unique KO for each of the two TEOMs in the unit The constants listed in the Mass Transducer 0 Constants screen must match the value shown on the label near the mass transducer or the mass concentration data will be incorrect To adjust the values select the button to display the keypad Operatinc TEOM 1405 DF 4 31 Section 4 SCREENS AND SETTINGS Service Screen The Service button displays the Service screen Figure 4 25 and provides access to maintenance and verification wizards and procedures as well as advanced troubleshooting and service tools Figure 4 25 Service screen TEOM 1405 DF Senvice 0 When in the Service screen select the Maintenance Verification Calibration Advanced and Instrument Control buttons to reach the desired screens Figure 4 26 Note Refer to Section 5 for information on the Maintenance Verification and Calibration screens accessible through those buttons 4 32 Operatine TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 4 SCREENS AND SETTINGS 26 4 igure F Screens accessible through the Service screen
251. it is unable find a stable frequency the second time the unit will fail the KO audit Figure 5 90 A 5 70 Operatine Guine TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Replace Sample Filter screen THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES 13 The Replace Sample Filter screen will display Figure 5 87 Remove the calibration filter with the calibration filter removal tool Correctly install and properly seat a new TEOM filter onto the PM 2 5 left side of the mass transducer using the regular filter exchange tool Follow the instructions for changing a filter earlier in this section Select the Next gt button Note DO NOT use the calibration filter exchange tool for installing or removing ANY filter other than the pre weighed calibration filter A Note If the frequency doesn t stabilize the wizard will display a screen with instructions to re seat the filter Re seat the filter and select the Next button The Stabilizing screen will display If the unit is unable find a stable frequency the second time the unit will fail the KO audit Figure 5 90 A Figure 5 87 Replace Sample Filter Do not use the ca tiration iter exchange fool te installing or removing any fiber other than the calibration filter Open the instrumant door and mass transducer Correctly install and sant new regular filter onic the leii side of the mass transducer Close the mass transducer and ins
252. ite 2000006 candidate SN 20116 measured component test site Cologne candidate SN 200 4 measured component test ste Bornheim candidate SN 20116 measured component Pl test ste Bornheim candidate SN 200 4 measured component Pl test site Bornheim candidate SN 20116 measured component P test ste Bornheim candidate SN 20014 measured component PM values gt 30 g m 85 candidate SN 20116 measured component PM values gt 30 g m 85 Main window of the user 102 Menu System status here software version 1 51 sss 102 Warning messages display triangular warning symbol button View Warnings 103 Figure 75 Menu Instrument conditions 103 Figure 76 Men SONGS i c aetate e Eau v pud 104 Figure 77 Menu ee 104 Figure 78 Zero filler during field 8 105 Figure 79 Set of filters for the check of the calibration constant 106 Figure 80 Stability of standard enters 108 Figure 81 Stability of the control filters 109 Figure 82 Distribution for Emfab filters of A Pre spread weighed relative to the check weight B Post spread weighed relative to the sse 113 Figure 83 19017025 Accreditation deed of T V Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH
253. itor is a true gravimetric instrument that draws ambient air through two filters at constant flow rate continuously weighing the filters and calculating near real time mass concentrations of both PM 2 5 and PM Coarse particulate matter By adding these two values the concentration of PM 10 is also determined In addition the instrument computes the 1 hour 8 hour 12 hour and 24 hour averages of the mass concentrations for all three sizes of PM The sensor unit contains the two mass measurement hardware systems that monitor particles that continuously accumulate on both PM 2 5 and PM Coarse particulate filters The PM Coarse and PM 2 5 fractions of PM 10 split by a virtual impactor each accumulate on the system s exchangeable TEOM filters By maintaining a flow rate of 1 67 1 min through the coatse sample flow channel and 3 1 min through the PM 2 5 sample channel and measuring the total mass accumulated on each of the TEOM filters the device can calculate the mass concentration of both the PM 2 5 and PM Coarse sample streams in near real time Utilizing the FMDS allows the TEOM 1405 DF to provide representative measurement of the particulate matter PM mass concentration as it exists in the ambient air The FDMS unit automatically generates mass concentration measurement ug m that account for both nonvolatile and volatile PM components To accomplish this the FDMS unit constantly samples ambient air and using a switching valve t
254. know the IP address of the instruments and connect to the unit manually using the New Instrument function of the software Figure 3 23 Refer to the previous section for information on connecting to an instrument off the local network Instruments on a network must have a unique IP address or be connected through a router To locate all instruments on the network 1 Open the ePort software program and select Find Samplers in the Open screen Figure 3 22 2 The ePort Main screen will display with a Searching for Figure 3 26 Instruments message As instruments are located by the software ePort Main screen with they will be added to the list in the Instrument frame on the left side of Searching for Instruments the screen Figure 3 26 message utrurert w E Gupi v wp 1406400010085 1234567890 DichotFDMS 1052001 0805 Serial Number 123455793 wb 105A 00180808 ab 123657831 10210924 Uns Status wb 1404200100608 ab 123687980 Lormessandds Downined Det ads FY Conricad Date 4 34 oce Last Rewete rote gt Upgrade A co Searching fer Instruments THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Operatine Guine TEOM 1405 DF 3 23 Section 3 Basic OPERATION 3 All instruments located on the local network will be displayed in the Instrument fram
255. l uncertainty of 11 2 96 The January 2010 version of The Guidance is ambiguous with respect to which slope and intercept should be used to correct a candidate should it fail the test for equivalence After communication with the convenor of the EC working group which is responsible for setting up the Guide Theo Hafkenscheid it was decided that the requirement of the November 2005 version of The Guidance are still valid and that the slope and intercept from the orthogonal regression of all the paired data should be used These are shaded gold and marked other in the key on the above Table 22 The 2006 UK Equivalence Report highlighted that there was flaw in the mathematics required for equivalence as per the November 2005 version of The Guidance as it penalised instruments that were more repeatable Appendix E Section 4 2 therein This same flaw is copied in the June 2010 version It is the opinion of T V Rheinland and BV that the TEOM 1405 DF Ambient Particulate Monitor for 5 and is indeed being penalised by the mathematics for being highly repeatable It is proposed that the same pragmatic approach is taken here that was previously undertaken in earlier studies Namely as some of the individual data set slopes are greater than 1 and some are less there should be no need to correct the data for this slope offset According to Table 22 due to the determined significance a correction of the intercept for shall be pe
256. lation of the operation maintenance and malfunction times The measuring systems have been operated over a time period of 454 measuring days SN 20014 and SN 20116 during field test This time period includes 17 days of zero filter operation as well as 6 days which had to be rejected due to the change to zero filter refer to Annex 5 Data loss caused by external influences which cannot be attributed to the devices themselves have been recorded on 19 01 2010 10 03 2011 and 14 03 2011 power outage Therefore the total operating time is reduced to 447 measuring days The following malfunctions of the devices have been observed SN 20014 e On 28 09 2011 the device had to be stopped in order to fix a leak e On 22 12 2011 the device was stopped temporarily in order to fix again a leak e On 06 01 2012 on 11 01 2012 unscheduled checks of the flow rate were performed SN 20116 No malfunctions of the device has been observed No further malfunctions of the devices have been observed 9 DIRECTIVE 2008 50 EC OF THE EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT AND OF THE COUNCIL of 21 May 2008 on ambient air quality and cleaner air for Europe http eur lex europa eu LexUriServ LexUriServ do uri OJ L 2008 152 0001 0044 EN PDF Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 55 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 0 BUREAU VERITAS Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the PM25 TEOM 1405 DF The regular cleaning of the sampling inlets
257. lect the Date Format button to choose whether to display the date in the Month Day Year or the Day Month Year format The unit must be restarted for this change to take effect Operatinc TEOM 1405 DF 4 25 Section 4 SCREENS AND SETTINGS Analog amp Digital The Analog amp Digital Outputs screen Figure 4 20 allows users to set the Outputs Screen basic parameters of the unit Figure 4 20 Analog amp Digital Outputs screen TEOM 1405 DF Sellinge Analog amp Digital Oulpauts SCIENTIFIC a Sifting Hand talus md TUR PONE 14417 When in the Analog amp Digital Outputs screen select the Analog Outputs or Contact Closure buttons to set up the analog output and contact closure functions Select the RS232 button to set up the unit for serial connections using RPComm or other programs using AK protocol 4 26 Operatine TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Analog Outputs Screen Figure 4 21 Analog Outputs screen THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 4 SCREENS AND SETTINGS Select the Analog Outputs button to display the Analog Outputs screen Figure 4 21 In the Analog Outputs screen use the buttons to select a variable and set a minimum and maximum value for the output for the desired output channel 1 8 Refer to Section 5 for information on calibrating the analog outputs Sattings utput Analog Outputs Instrument Variable Minimum value value 4 amme
258. ll have a unique status code or set of status codes that go with it Ce sie bo p pP pe Ro mem ho p pem Rho p pe bk em C ho emm ewm o p emm e Jmm Operatine TEOM 1405 DF A 3 APPENDIX A TROUBLESHOOTING D h ring When the unit shows more than one status code it adds the codes together Status C od es and displays them as a decimal sum For example if the unit displays a Memory status code listed as hexadecimal number H 1 on the instrument s specific status code table and a Valve A status code listed as hexadecimal number 4 on the instrument s specific status code table at the same time the two status codes when downloaded would be displayed as the decimal number 5 The decimal number 5 must then be converted back to hexadecimal in this case also 5 to match the status code table Only two status codes would add up to a value of 5 Table A 2 By looking at instrument s specific table and breaking down the downloaded status codes you will be able to decipher which status codes the unit has displayed Repeat the operation for each place the hexadecimal code 10 s 100 etc Example For example decipher the following decimal status code 8433666 for an instrument with the given example status code
259. loaded filter after 48 h and 72 h post weighing Dust corrected dust mass of the filter This shows that the method becomes independent from weighing room conditions due to the corrective calculation Influence due to the water content of the filter mass between virgin and loaded filter can be controlled and do not change the dust content of sampled filters Hence Point EN 14907 9 3 2 5 is fulfilled The below example of the standard weight between November 2008 and February 2009 shows that the allowed deviation of not more than 20 ug on the previous measurement is not exceeded Figure 80 Stability of standard weight Stability of standard weight between Nov 08 and Feb 09 0 20010 0 20005 of 9 9 9 9 9 99 e Standard weight E 0 20000 Mean standard weight Weight g 0 19995 0 19990 15 No of weighing Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 108 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific 09 BUREAU UK Report on the Equivalence of the and 5 TEOM 1405 DF Table 35 Stability standard weight Date Weighing Standard Difference to the previous No weight g weighing 12 11 2008 0 20002 13 11 2008 0 20001 10 10 12 2008 0 20002 10 11 12 2008 0 20002 0 17 12 2008 0 20003 10 18 12 2008 0 20002 10 07 01 2009 0 20001 10 08 01 2009 COIN
260. lower than 30 uig m for and lower than 18 g m for s criterion 2 is fulfilled These six intra instrument uncertainties should be placed on the MCERTS certificate 12 3 Calculation of the expanded uncertainty of the instruments In this Section Criteria 3 4 and 5 are assessed namely 3 The intra instrument uncertainty of the reference method must be less than 2 0 ug m 4 The expanded uncertainty Woy is calculated at 50 ug m for and 30 ug m for 5 for each individual candidate instrument against the average results of the reference method For each of the following permutations the expanded uncertainty must be less than 25 96 e Full dataset Datasets representing PM concentrations greater than or equal to 30 g m for PMio or concentrations greater than or equal to 18 g m for 5 provided that the subset contains 40 or more valid data pairs e Datasets for each individual test site 5 Preconditions for acceptance of the full dataset are that the slope b is insignificantly different from 1 b 1 2 u b and the intercept a is insignificantly different from 0 a lt 2 u a If these preconditions are not met the candidate method may be calibrated using the values obtained for slope and or intercept of all paired instruments together The Excel functions used to calculate the orthogonal regression was taken directly from the JRC Excel tool published in 2004 to calculate expanded uncertainties o
261. lters manufactured by Pall Port Washington New York USA These instruments are single shot samplers that require the filters to be changed manually and are defined in the current and 5 standards EN12341 1998 and EN14907 2005 While Emfab filters are not listed in the 1998 standard they are allowed in the later standard as well as the final draft of the revised and 5 standard fprEN12341 2013 The weighing procedures employed are summarised in Appendix B The weighing procedures herein were conducted to the PMes standard EN14907 2005 The final draft of the revised and 5 standard fprEN12341 2013 requires weighing procedure that is almost identical to that of EN14907 2005 and differs primarily in that the RH range has been reduced from 45 55 to 45 50 In terms of the physical differences between the LVS3 and the final draft of the revised and 5 standard the final draft of the revised and standard states the following The present European Standard represents an evolution of earlier European Standards EN 12341 1998 and EN 14907 through the development of the 2 3 sampler to include sheath air cooling the ability to cool filters after sampling and the ability to monitor temperatures at critical points in sheath air cooling the sampling system It is recommended that when equipment is procured that it complies fully with the present European Standa
262. mbient Temperature 222 niihi iiio ies 5 44 Calibrating the Ambient PresSUfEc nets 5 45 Auditing the Flow see eb tre eet es 5 46 the Flow 5 52 Calibrating the Analog 5 58 Verifying the Calibration Constant m otim erras inb traba 5 64 Troubleshooting std ciae DK UE A 1 Converting Decimal Hexadecimal Numbers rre A 3 Deciphering Status Codes Example A 4 AppendixB Serial Communication eene B 1 X Operatine Guine TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section Introduction The TEOM 1405 DF Dichotomous Ambient Particulate Monitor with FDMS is a mass measurement monitor that incorporates the patented Tapered Element Oscillating Microbalance TEOM to measure particulate matter mass concentrations continuously The TEOM 1405 DF Monitor is a true gravimetric instrument that draws ambient air through a sample filter for collection at a constant flow rate The monitor continuously weighs the filter calculating near real time mass concentrations Unlike conventional sampling systems the design of the TEOM 1405 DF contains two unique features that greatly expands the functionality of the monitor The TEOM 1405 DF incorporates two mass sensors coupled with a vit
263. measured by the instrument for the average temperature and pressure variables in equation above A TEOM 1405 DF 1 11 Section 1 INTRODUCTION Mass Concentration Reporting 1 12 Operatine TEOM 1405 DF The 1405 DF continuously monitors PM 2 5 10 and PM Coarse mass concentrations These mass concentrations are reported to different agencies using different standards For example PM 2 5 and PM Coarse data are required to be reported to the U S EPA based on the actual conditions present at the time of collection PM 10 mass concentration data reported to the U S EPA must be referenced to standard cubic meters of air based on a standard temperature and pressure of 25 C and 1 Atmosphere atm respectively For the instrument to report mass concentrations according to this EPA standard the user must ensure that the standard temperature Std Temp and standatd pressure Std Pres entered in the instrument equal 25 C and 1 Atmosphere Section 4 These are the default values for the instrument Std Temp 273 15 r latm Flow Rate Flow_Rate x m 273 15 Std Pres The flow rates referenced internally by the instrument to 0 C are converted to EPA standard conditions Note When reporting concentrations to actual conditions the system must be set for Active flow control Section 4 This will ensure that the monitor uses the current actual values for temperature
264. measurement device Flows can be individually audited for accuracy using the flow audit wizard For changing or calibrating the values refer to the following sections Refer to the flow temperature and pressure calibration section for information on how to attach external measurement devices to the TEOM 1405 DF unit TEOM 1405 DF Service gt Verification xinetrument Audit dee jeni bemgerabure C Aub lent pressure 100 abm Pid z 5 wol flow rate n n ipo vol flow rate 0 00 Bypass volumetric Bow rate 0 00 ipe Vacuum pump pressurg 10 00 abe 5 Ko Pid Coarse TEOM Ko T0000 0 Back Sing Hone slalus 13 38 Operatinc TEOM 1405 DF 5 43 Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES Calibrating the Ambient Temperature Figure 5 53 Ambient Calibration screen 5 44 Operatine Guine TEOM 1405 DF Perform the ambient air temperature calibration pressure calibration and leak check Section 3 before executing the flow calibration procedure To calibrate the ambient air temperature 1 In the TEOM Data screen select the Service button to display the Service screen then select the Calibration button to display the Calibration screen Figure 5 49 Select the Ambient Calibration button to display the Ambient Calibration screen Figure 5 53 TEOM 1405 DF Service Calibration Ambien Click the button
265. ment is functioning after instrument power up or reset These raw values are used for internal calculations only A Note If configuring the instrument for U S EPA FEM sampling for PM 2 5 the instrument needs to be configured to calculate and record the FEM values Press Settings and select U S EPA Turn off and back on for this change to take effect A THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Operatine Guine TEOM 1405 DF 3 3 Section 3 Basic OPERATION Perfo The TEOM 1405 DF should be leak checked once a month or as needed Leak Check system comes with flow audit leak check adapters for the 1 1 4 inch flow splitter 1 2 inch coarse sample tube and the 3 8 inch bypass line The Leak Check Wizard compares the measured difference between the units zero flow with the vacuum disconnected and flow through the instrument with the inlet blocked which should also be zero The leak check passes if the PM Coarse and PM 2 5 flows ate within 0 15 1 min and the bypass flow is within 0 60 1 min of their zero value with the vacuum disconnected In order to ensure proper performance of the instrument and ensure no leaks the instrument prompts the operator to perform a leak check with the FDMS valve in both the base and reference positions Note The Leak Check Wizard automatically disables the switching valve during a leak check Performing a leak check without the wizard can damage the switching valve To perform a leak ch
266. mm filter of the FDMS unit have to be changed Every 4 weeks plausibility check of temperature pressure sensors if necessary re calibration Every 4 weeks leak check Every 4 weeks check of the flow rate if necessary re calibration Apart from that follow the manufacturer s directions and recommendations Further maintenance works The following works are necessary in addition to the regular works in the maintenance interval Every 6 months or when necessary the Inline filter for PM 5 PMcoarse and Bypass path shall be changed to avoid a contamination of the flow rate regulator Once a year or when necessary the cooler the switching valve and the air inlet system are to be cleaned Once a year the calibration of the mass measuring transducer is to be checked using the Ko test kit The dryer inside the FDMS unit has to be change or refurbished once a year or when necessary For the monitoring securing of a correct dryer performance the manufacturer recommends to observe the pump vacuum nominal 510 mm Hg and the dew point of the air flow nominal lt 2 at 4C cooler temperatu re and periodically perform a zero point test operation of the measuring device with zero filter at the entrance e Every 18 months or when necessary the sampling pump must be maintained or renewed Further details are provided in the user manual Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 120 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Repo
267. move the standard TEOM filter from the PM 2 5 left side of the mass transducer Refer to the section on installing removing TEOM filter for assistance on removing the filter Close the mass transducer without installing another filter Select the Next gt button Note DO NOT use the calibration filter exchange tool for installing or removing ANY filter other than the pre weighed calibration filter A 9 The Stabilizing screen will display Figure 5 84 While the instrument waits to mesaure the frequency of the system with no TEOM filter installed a countdown timer on the screen will show the progress of the stabilization step When the stabilization Complete message displays select the Next gt button Figure 5 84 Stabilizing screen Wail Tar ingirument t stanze 5 68 Operatine TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES 10 The Enter Filter Weight screen will display Figure 5 85 Select the Filter Weight button The keypad will display Enter the weight of the pre weighed filter into the system and press the Enter button to save the value and exit the keypad Select the Next gt button Figure 5 85 Enter Filter Weight A preweigned filter is part oT the mags calibration verification kill Enter Filter Weight screen THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Operatinc TEOM 1405 DF 5 69 Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES
268. mployed for the testing of the 5 TEOM 1405 DF 5 calculations for Cologne Chorwelier arealso SHOWN 94 Table 31 Site Name Country Site Classification number of days number of calendar days prescribed range and geometric mean for reference method measurements of made in each site employed for the testing of the TEOM 1405 DF calculations for Cologne Chorwelier are 95 Table 32 Wind Speed Ambient Temperature Ambient Dew Point and Semi Volatile calculations for the PMa5 TEOM 1405 DF 96 Table 33 Wind Speed Ambient Temperature Ambient Dew Point and Semi Volatile calculations for the PMis TEOM 1405 DF iiic riter ricca iir RES 96 Table 34 Pre and post weighing specifications 107 Table 35 Stability standard weight esses esee entente nnne nenne 109 Table 36 Stability of the control filters esses 110 Table 37 conditioning and weighing timescales essen enne 111 Table 38 Site Start Date LVS3 Concentration CM concentration Ambient Temperature RH Ambient Dew Point and Volatile Components used 121 Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 7 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 wj BUREAU VERITAS Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equi
269. n 1 INTRODUCTION The mass flow controllers MFCs in the TEOM 1405 DF Monitor are internally calibrated for a standard temperature and pressure of 25 C and 1 Atmosphere 1013 2 millibars or 760 mm Hg The system can operate on Active or Passive flow to maintain constant volumetric flow at sample inlet For Passive flow control the user must enter the seasonal average temperature Ave Temp and average barometric pressure Ave Pres at the measurement site to allow the instrument to sample at the correct volumetric flow rate Section 4 The microprocessor calculates the correct mass flow set point Flow_Rate following formula srp With this information using the Temp 273 15 FlowSP FlowSPy x YS wp Temp vg 273 15 where FlowSP passys Control set point to mass flow controller equivalent flow at 25 C and 1 Atmosphere FlowSP Volumetric flow rate set point l min Temp ivg Average temperature entered by the user C Tempe Standard temperature 25 C Seasonal average barometric pressure entered by the user Atmospheres where 1 Atmosphere 1013 2 millibars or 760 mm Hg Po Standatd pressure 1 Atm Alternately Active flow control can be set up to automatically measure the ambient temperature and pressure using the hardware supplied Note When using actual conditions for active volumetric flow control substitute the actual local temperature and pressure as
270. n 10 10 00 Tue 26 Jan 10 10 00 Wed 27 Jan 10 10 00 Thu 28 Jan 10 10 00 Fri 29 Jan 10 10 00 Sat 30 Jan 10 10 00 Bureau Veritas Air Quality AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 gui Drl SA1 S ZNd 15 6 15 3 14 6 7 1 16 0 45 7 43 2 48 0 14 1 14 6 6 5 11 0 21 0 20 4 26 6 20 5 7 8 21 0 16 2 36 1 50 7 27 1 8 3 5 7 12 4 Z ESAT 15 5 15 7 14 9 6 9 16 1 46 2 43 6 48 3 14 4 14 4 6 1 10 5 20 4 20 2 27 0 20 9 7 6 20 9 15 9 35 8 51 1 27 3 8 0 6 0 12 5 L ESAT OLWd 20 1 19 2 19 4 18 3 14 6 19 5 51 8 48 1 53 4 16 2 26 9 13 5 20 6 27 1 26 5 32 0 27 5 9 7 25 8 20 7 42 0 60 4 38 9 13 9 9 4 17 6 Z ESAT OLWd 18 7 19 3 20 1 18 4 14 9 19 2 51 3 48 0 53 0 16 3 27 1 13 6 20 6 26 9 26 6 31 9 27 9 9 8 25 1 20 3 42 4 60 4 39 1 14 1 9 6 17 6 71002 NS ah 16 2 14 8 14 8 14 6 7 0 15 1 43 6 42 3 43 5 15 0 13 1 7 0 8 8 18 7 23 8 19 0 8 0 18 2 14 7 33 5 43 2 24 5 7 7 6 3 11 5 gui Drl 91102 NS 11 4 15 2 18 1 12 6 14 8 14 4 7 2 15 7 42 8 42 1 43 5 15 2 13 1 7 4 10 1 20 0 24 1 19 5 7 8 18 9 14 7 34 1 44 1 25 7 8 6 6 3 11 1 OLINd 1002 NS 16 2 20 9 19 5 18 8 18 7 18 1 14 0 17 8 50 0 48 1 51 5 17 6 21 8 12 1 17 8 25 2 29 3 24 7 10 2 23 5 19 1 40 7 53 2 34 7 14 5 10 3 14 8 gui Drl OLINd
271. n as to the specific findings of the Pollution Climate calculations 2 There is a requirement for there to be only at least one UK field test The TEOM 1405 DF had one UK test and therefore meets this requirement This information should be included on the MCERTS certificate 3 There is no requirement that two collocated reference methods are used for each field test though two reference methods were used in all four tests This information should be included on the MCERTS certificate 4 There is no requirement for there to be at least 90 data availability though these Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 99 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the and PM TEOM 1405 DF calculations were presented in Section 11 where it was shown that the availability of both candidate instruments was greater than 90 This information should be included on the MCERTS certificate The field test data were discussed in Section 12 MCERTS for UK Particulate Matter uses the same methodology as that employed in the 2010 version of the A series of five criteria must be fulfilled in order to prove equivalence 1 Ofthe full dataset at least 20 of the results obtained using the standard method shall be greater than the upper assessment threshold specified in 2008 50 EC for annual limit values i e 28 g m for and currently 17 for PM 5 2 intra instrument uncerta
272. n be set A measurement range of 0 to 1000 g m is recommended in the T V Rheinland Report as a default setting of the analogue output for European conditions It is recommended that this is also adopted for UK purposes While the concentrations observed in the four field campaigns were significantly lower than these measurement ranges as the equivalence calculations have been made relative to the 24 hour Reference Method we suggest that the TEOM 1405 DF is certified for the measurement range e 0 to 1000 ug m The pollution climate calculations are presented in Section 15 These calculations show that the requirements for the sites to be of a similar pollution climate to the UK and for there to be a suitable range of wind speed temperature dew point and volatile components are all met The field test sites utilised cover urban background rural and traffic locations We propose therefore that this instrument is suitable for use at urban background rural and traffic locations within the UK Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 25 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the 5 TEOM 1405 DF 4 Sources of Uncertainty for the Reference Method The reference methods used in the field tests were the Small filter device Low Volume Sampler LVS3 manufactured by Sven Leckel GMBH Berlin Germany The samplers were operated with 47 mm Emfab Teflon coated glass fibre fi
273. n the Equivalence of the and 5 TEOM 1405 DF Thermo Fisher Scientific 010Z 0 9 0102 2 0 amm 01 02 91 9 0102 6 9 0102 2 9 0102 92 6 0102 61 6 0102 2119 0LOZ G G 0102 82 0102 12 OLOZ PL P 0102 2 0102 18 0102 2 0102 71 OLOZ OL E 0102 0102 2 2 0102 71 2 0102 01 2 0102 2 0102 2 1 0102 02 1 0102 6171 0102 9 1 6002 06 21 6002 E7 z L 6002 91 21 600 6 21 100 102 82 1 102 2 1 1 102 6 1 c LOZ L L L LOZ YZ Z L LOZ 9L Z L L LOZ 8 Z L LOC OE L L 10 2 11 E E uo w 9 9 w r5 Q c 42 S Q e lo N n ES w o E Time Series of concentrations at the test site Teddington O st CO motorway parking lot winter O oc or O O st AN S ZNd OLINd 2U09 Figure 15 Figure 16 42 Bureau Veritas Air Quality AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 BUREAU VERITAS UK Report on the Equivalence of the PM25 TEOM 1405 DF Thermo Fisher Scientific t LOc S S LLOO v LL LLOc 8c V 09 89 01 0 12 01 LLOZ 7L OL LLO L 7 102 2 01 LL0c 0 6
274. n via RP Comm or HyperTerminal software 1 x Ethernet interface for the connection to a PC for the data transfer and remote control via ePort software 2 x USB interfaces for direct data download and firmware update For the external zero point check of the measuring system and for the check of the calibration constant Ko a zero filter is installed at the instrument inlet The use of this filter enables the provision of particulate free air Figure 78 Zero filter during field test Eg Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 105 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the PM and 5 TEOM 1405 DF By means of the available shut off valve a leak test of the measuring system according to chapter 3 the manual can also be performed with the zero filter To check the calibration constant a special filter kit with pre weighed TEOM filters is used Figure 79 Set of filters for the check of the calibration constant Ko Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 106 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the and PM25 TEOM 1405 DF B Filter Weighing Procedures The following text is copied with minor alterations from Appendix 2 of the TUV Rheinland Report Figures that were in German have been replaced with Figures in English B 1 German test sites Cologne and Bornheim Carrying out the weighing All weightings are done in an air condition
275. nced screen select the Mass Calculation Variables Mass Transducer or Serial Number buttons to set advanced frequency parameters and check KO constants or the serial number Select the Serial Number button to display the Serial Number screen The screen shows the instrument s serial number DO NOT adjust this value Select the Mass Calculation Variables button to display the Mass Calculation Variables screen The Mass Calculation Variables screen contains the following control buttons System wait time This field contains the length of time sec in which the temperatures and flow rates must remain within a range around their setpoints before the instrument changes from Stabilizing Mode to Col lecting Data Mode The default setting is 1800 seconds To adjust the setpoint select the button to display the keypad Note Thermo Scientific recommends that the user set the Wait Time to 1000 or higher to avoid damaging the instrument and to maintain accurate data reporting THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 4 SCREENS AND SETTINGS Frequency gate time The basis of mass change is raw frequency Raw frequency is calculated by compating cycle counts of a highly stable 10 megahertz Mhz clock to the cycle counts of the oscillating tapered element TE The gate time controls how often the comparisons are made To adjust the setpoint select the button to display the keypad DO NOT a
276. nect the Vacuum Line screen will display Install the two pieces of tubing at the top of the Y adapter with the orifice fitting provided in the instrument package into the top quick connect fitting of each of the cooler assemblies Figure 5 41 Figure 5 41 Y adapters installed Y adapter with orifice Y adapter for 8 Install the main dryer vacuum line removed in step 6 into the bottom of the other Y adapter Figure 5 41 and install the two pieces of tubing into the bottom quick connect fitting of each of the cooler assemblies Select the Next gt button Note Ensure that you use the Y adapter with the orifice provided with the unit It restricts the flow through the coolers to the proper rate THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Operatinc TEOM 1405 DF 5 33 Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES 9 The system will automatically begin heating the coolers to 50 C to clean the coolers The wizard will display a timer screen to show how much time is left to complete the cleaning Figure 5 42 Cleaning channels screen 10 When the procedure is finished select the Next gt button 11 The Close Unit screen will display Disconnect the Y adapters and reinstall the tubing into the cooler assemblies as described by the wizatd 12 Reinstall the 47 mm filter cassettes with new filters installed into the unit Refer to the Replacing the 47 mm Filters section earlier in this cha
277. nformation to be placed upon the MCERTS certificate As the intra instrument uncertainty of the candidate method is less than 2 5 g m for all PM and all data as well as for the sub datasets corresponding to all the data split greater than or equal to and lower than 30 g m for and lower than 18 g m for s criterion 2 is fulfilled These six intra instrument uncertainties should be placed on the MCERTS certificate As the intra instrument uncertainty of the reference method is less than 2 0 ug m for the all data dataset for both and criterion 3 is fulfilled Further the intra instrument uncertainty of the reference method is less than 2 0 g m for two sub datasets corresponding to all the data split greater than or equal to and lower than 30 g m for and 18 g m for 5 though there is no requirement for this objective to be achieved These six intra instrument uncertainties should be placed on the MCERTS certificate The required expanded uncertainties are all less than 25 and as such criterion 4 is fulfilled These should be shown on the MCERTS certificate The expanded uncertainties of the datasets less than 30 ug m for and 18 g m for 5 were also calculated These should also be shown on the MCERTS certificate but there is no requirement that they be below 25 95 As the required expanded uncertainties were all below 25 before correction for intercept it is not compulsory to intercept
278. ngsstelle GmbH Beliehene gem 5 8 Absatz 1 AkkStelleG i V m 1 Absatz 1 AkkStelleGBV Unterzeichnerin der Multilateralen Abkommen von EA ILAC und IAF zur gegenseitigen Anerkennung Akkreditierung R Die Deutsche Akkreditierungsstelle GmbH best tigt hiermit dass die TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH mit ihrer Messstelle f r Immissionsschutz Environmental Protection Am Grauen Stein 51105 K ln und ihrer unselbst ndigen Messstelle Robert Koch Strafse 27 55129 Mainz die Kompetenz nach DIN EN ISO IEC 17025 2005 besitzt Pr fungen in folgenden Bereichen durchzuf hren Bestimmung Probenahme und Analytik von anorganischen und organischen gas oder partikel f rmigen Luftinhaltsstoffen im Rahmen von Emissions und Immissionsmessungen Probenahme von luftgetragenen polyhalogenierten Drbenzo p Dioxinen und Dibenzoturanen bei Emissionen und Immissionen Probenahme von faserf rmigen Partikeln bei Emissionen und Immissionen Ermittlung von gas oder partikelf rmigen Luftinhaltsstoffen mit kontinuierlich arbeitenden Messger ten Bestimmung von Geruchsstoffen in Luft Kalibrierungen und Funktionspr fungen kontinuierlich arbeiten der Messger te f r Luftinhaltsstoffe einschlie lich Systemen zur Datenauswertung und Emissionsfern berwachung Eignungspr fungen von automatisch arbeitenden Emissians und immissionsmesseinrichtungen einschlie lich Systemen zur Datenauswertung und Emissionsfern berwachung Feuerraummessungen E
279. ns In addition the hardware has been tested for personal or fire safety hazards in accordance with EN61010 1 2001 Safety in fulfillment of EC Directive 73 23 EEC This product is required to comply with the European Union s Waste Electrical amp Electronic Equipment WEEE Directive 2002 96 EC It is marked with the WEEE symbol Thermo Fisher Scientific has contracted with one or recycling disposal companies in each EU Member State and this product should be disposed of or recycled through them Further information on Thermo Fisher Scientific s compliance with these Directives the recyclers in your country and information on Thermo Fisher Scientific products which may assist the detection of substances subject to the RoHS Directive are available at www thermo com WEEEROHS Operatine TEOM 1405 DF VII Preface Service Info rm ation When you purchase Thermo Scientific products you can depend on quality Section Revision List VIII OPERATING TEOM 1405 DF products and expert setvice We know that your product s performance is critical to your business and that you require it to deliver timely and reliable data We are dedicated to helping you realize a maximum value in your technology investment by providing a high level of personal attention premium technical assistance and fast reliable response Thermo Scientific offers a full suite of warranty and service contract programs designed to meet your
280. nt Control screen allows users to change the unit operating mode and restart or shut down the instrument TEOM 1405 DF l SCIENTIFIC Service Cantral Harea status TEAREN When in the Instrument Control screen select the Run Setup Stop Reboot or Shut Down buttons to change the instrument operating mode The Instrument Control screen contains the following control buttons e Run This button returns the instrument to normal operating mode Fully Operational Refer to the beginning of this section for more information on operating modes e Setup This button manually puts the instrument in Setup Mode Refer to the beginning of this section for more information on operating modes e Stop This button manually puts the instrument in Stop All Mode Refer to the beginning of this section for more information on operating modes e Reboot This button IMMEDIATELY restarts the instrument Pressing the button returns the unit to Stabilizing Mode and will require the full warm up period before restarting data collection THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 4 SCREENS AND SETTINGS Service Advanced Select the Advanced button to display the Advanced screen Figure 4 28 Screen The Advanced screen allows users to manually adjust the status temperatures or flows of several instrument components Figure 4 28 Advanced screen TEOM 1405 DF Service Advarced
281. nts with the candidates SN 20014 SN 20116 measured component s test site Bornheim Winter 62 Figure 37 Results of the parallel measurements with the candidates SN 20014 SN 20116 measuring component all sites values gt 18 62 Figure 38 Results of the parallel measurements with the candidates SN 20014 SN 20116 measured component s all test sites values lt 18 63 Figure 39 Results of the parallel measurements with the candidates SN 20014 SN 20116 measured component PM o all test 63 Figure 40 Results of the parallel measurements with the candidates SN 20014 SN 20116 measured component test site 64 Figure 41 Results of the parallel measurements with the candidates SN 20014 SN 20116 measured component 10 test site Cologne Winter sess 64 Figure 42 Results of the parallel measurements with the candidates SN 20014 SN 20116 measured component test site Bornheim 5 65 Figure 43 Results of the parallel measurements with the candidates SN 20014 SN 20116 measured component test site Bornheim Winter 65 Figure 44 Results of the parallel measurements with the candidates SN 20014 SN 20116 measured component PM o all test sites gt 30
282. nuary 2010 requires that when operating in networks a candidate method needs to be tested annually at a number of sites and that the number of the instruments to be tested is dependent on the expanded measurement uncertainty of the device The respective realisation is the responsibility of the network operator or of the responsible authority of the member state However TUV Rheinland and their UK partners recommend that the expanded uncertainty for the full data set is referred to for this namely 14 0 for 5 which would require an annual test at 3 measurement sites and 11 2 for which again would require an annual test at 3 measurement sites GDE2010 Chapter 9 9 2 Table 6 Detailed representation of the test results Table 24 and Table 25 show an overview on the uncertainties between the reference devices Ure from the field tests The datasets are show graphically in Figure 46 to Figure 71 The uncertainty between the reference devices ure is for all test sites lt 2 Table 24 In between instrument uncertainty of the reference devices for PM25 Reference Test site Amount Uncertainty device values 1 2__ Bornheim Summer 87 06 Teddington Table 25 In between instrument uncertainty of the reference devices for PM Reference Test site Amount Uncertainty Ups dme aes PN Eg Ef 1 2__ Summe 82 066 1 2 Bomheim Winer 6
283. o change the path of the fine and coarse sample flows automatically compensates for the semi volatile faction of the collected sample Every six minutes the switching valve alternates the sample flows between the base and reference sample periods During the base period sample is collected normally and the base mass concentration is determined During the reference period the flow is diverted through a chilled filter to remove and retain the non volatile and volatile PM Under normal operation the chiller is maintained at a temperature of 4 C However under ambient conditions of high temperature and humidity operating the chiller at 10 C is recommended to prevent condensation in the chiller during instrument operation Based upon mass concentration MC measurements obtained during the base and reference periods the FDMS system updates a one hour average of the following results every six minutes e Base mass concentration Base MC PM concentration of the particle laden sample stream e Reference mass concentration Ref MC PM concentration of the particle free sample stream after passing through the chilled filter THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 1 INTRODUCTION e Mass concentration MC Base mass concentration Base MC adjusted by the reference mass concentration Ref MC Base MC usually positive minus Ref MC negative when mass volatilizes from the filter For example the unit draws a base flow for six m
284. o the standard method 2 Wom gt Candidate method is not accepted as equivalent to the standard method The specified expanded relative uncertainty Waqo for particulate matter is 25 92 Assessment The determined uncertainties Wcy without application of correction factors lay for all observed data sets beneath the defined expanded relative uncertainty Waqo of 25 for particulate Table 22 and Table 23 show an overview of the results of the equivalence check for the candidate TEOM 1405 DF Ambient Particulate Monitor for 5 and For the case that a criterion is fulfilled or not the text is represented in green or red colour Furthermore the five criteria from Section 12 1 are shaded as per the key Overview equivalence test TEOM 1405 DF Ambient Particulate Monitor for PM 5 Table 22 PM2 5 1405DF FDMS All Data 18 ug m3 gt 18 ug m3 SN 20014 Individual Datasets Combined Datasets SN 20116 Individual Datasets Combined Datasets 30 2 gt 17 ug m3 WCM nc s Dataset Bornheim Winter Cologne Winter Bornheim Summer Teddington 18 ug m3 18ygm3 All Data Dataset Bornheim Winter Cologne Winter Bornheim Summer Teddington 18 ug m3 gt 18 ug m3 All Data Bureau Veritas Air Quality AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Orthogonal Regression 338 0 976 Slope b ub Intercept a ua 247 0 892 1 094 0 023 0 426 0 235 91 0 955 1 015
285. oad data 1 Ensure that the PC and the instrument are connected to the same network using the Ethernet connection on the back of the instrument Refer to the previous section for information on connecting the instrument to a network 2 Use the ePort PC software to connect to the instrument and display the ePort Main screen Figure 3 28 Refer to the previous two sections for information on connecting to the instrument or instruments Figure 3 28 ePort Main screen 1405200100605 DichotFDMS Serial erben 14642910505 IP Address 10 210 9 145 Stabes Ative Cormmaancs Downined Des ads Dorica Date LM lt L Last download E reat ace Deor gt Upgrade Setup Lest Downlosd or Selected Date Tine Next desendowd will start with dete alter 51 Jen 2007 6126120 THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Operatine Guine TEOM 1405 DF 3 25 Section 3 Basic OPERATION 3 Select Download Setup in the Commands window of the ePort Main screen The Download Setup Wizard will display Figure 3 29 Select the Next gt button Figure 3 29 Download Setup Wizard S Download Setup Wizard 2 Welcome to the Download Setup Wizard This wizard helps you setup downloads from the instrument in easy steps 4 The Select Data screen will display Select the data to download either all data on the instrument or the data s
286. of the 5 TEOM 1405 DF A linear correlation y a bx is assumed between the results of both methods in order to evaluate the comparability of the candidates y and the reference procedure x The correlation between the average values of the reference devices and the candidates is established by orthogonal regression Regression is calculated for All test sites Each test site separately 1 data set with measured values PM2 5 gt 18 Basis average value of reference measurement e 1 data set with measured values gt 30 g m Basis average value of reference measurement For further evaluation the results of the uncertainty s of the candidates compared with the reference method are described with the following equation which describes as a function of the PM concentration x 295 v6 a b tx n 2 RSS Sum of the relative residuals from orthogonal regression u x random uncertainty of the reference procedure if value Ups which is calculated for using the candidates can be used in this test The sum of the relative residuals RSS is calculated by the following equation RSS XU 2 00 Uncertainty s is calculated for All test sites Each test site separately 1 data set with measured values PM25 gt 18 ug m Basis average value of reference measurement 1 data set with measured values gt 30 ug m Basis average value of reference measurement
287. olatilising ammonium nitrate from the sampled filters and it is expected that losses due to the absence of sheath air cooling would be minimal Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 26 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 BUREAU VERITAS Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the and 5 TEOM 1405 DF 5 Competencies of the Laboratories Involved Two organisations TUV Rheinland and NPL were involved in the field and laboratory testing TUV Rheinland Energie und Umwelt GmbH are accredited for the following work areas according to ISO 17025 e Determination of emissions and ambient airs of air pollution and odour substances e Inspection of correct installation function and calibration of continuously running emission measuring devices including systems for data evaluation and remote monitoring of emissions e Suitability testing of measuring systems for continuous monitoring of emissions and ambient airs and of electronic systems for data evaluation and remote monitoring of emissions The accreditation is valid up to 31 01 2013 DAkkS register number D PL 11120 02 00 The National Physical Laboratory are accredited for the following work areas according to ISO 17025 e determination of particulate mass collected on filters and e determination of particulate analyser flow rates These services were last accredited on the 22 October 2012 and the 28 November 2012 respectively by the United Kingdom Accre
288. ologne parking Toy und Rm 41 Figure 14 Time Series of the 5 Reference at the test site Bornheim motorway parking lol SUImmter 41 Figure 15 Time Series of the concentrations Reference at the test site Bornheim Motorway parking lot entre nnns sn sinn 42 Figure 16 Time Series of concentrations at the test site Teddington 42 Figure 17 Time Series of the PM 9 concentrations at the test site Cologne parking lot winter 43 Figure 18 Time Series of the PM 9 concentrations at the test site Bornheim motorway parking Teo Buc 43 Figure 19 Time Series of the at the test site Bornheim motorway parking lot Winter m 44 Figure 20 Field test site 44 Figure 21 Field test site Cologne 45 Figure 22 Field test site Bornheim motorway parking lot essem 45 Figure 23 Grubbs test results for the reference method Teddington 50 Figure 24 Grubbs test results for reference method Cologne 50 Figure 25 Grubbs test results for the reference method Bornheim Summer 51 Figure 26 Grubbs test results for the reference method Bornheim Winter 51 Figure 27 Grubbs test results for the PM
289. on setting up downloads The message window will display a Downloading Data message while the software is downloading data from the instrument When the download is complete it will display a Download Complete message Select the Done button to exit the Download Data screen 3 30 Operatine TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 3 Basic OPERATION Downloading Data The TEOM 1405 DF also supports data downloads using the USB To a Flash Drive connection on the front of the instrument and a USB flash drive Note Due to the size of the storage buffer downloading all stored data may take 30 minutes or more To download data using the USB connection 1 Plug a flash drive into the USB connection on the front of the instrument The Download Data to USB Flash Drive screen will display Figure 3 33 Figure 3 33 Download Data to USB TEOM 1405 DF Flash Drive screen Download Data to USB Flash Drive Sd A USB flash drive detected Are you sure you want to download the dala 2 To continue with the download select the Yes button To cancel select the No button then remove the USB drive THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Operatine TEOM 1405 DF 3 31 Section 3 Basic OPERATION 3 The Select Data screen will display Figure 3 34 Select the From the beginning button to download all the data on the instrument Select the From last download button to download only the data stored since t
290. on the insides of the walls 7 Allow the air inlet to dry 8 Remove the protective material from the exposed TEOM filter 9 Close the mass transducer and latch the latch 10 Install the air thermistors into the cap of the mass transducer assembly and tighten lightly with the wrench 11 Close and latch the door to the unit Keep the door open for as short a time as possible to minimize the temperature change in the system 12 Turn on the TEOM 1405 DF unit Operatinc TEOM 1405 DF 5 29 Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES Cleaning the Coolers coolers should be cleaned once per year or as necessary The Cooler Cleaning Wizard describes all the steps necessary to clean the cooler Some additional information is included below Follow these steps to clean the coolers 1 In the 1405 TEOM Data screen select the Service button to display the Service screen then select the Maintenance button to display the Maintenance screen Figure 5 3 2 Select the Clean Coolers button to start the Cooler Cleaning Wizard Figure 5 37 Select the Next gt button to begin the procedure Figure 5 37 Cooler Cleaning Wizard Welcome to the Cooler Welcome screen Cleaning Wizard This wizard nans you purae the coolers pi semi volatile partiches thal have and accumulated on ihe inside The instrument will be put Setup mode for cleaning To continue prese Next
291. or 5 Manufacturer Sven Leckel Gmbh Gas meter dry German Sites 1 mass flow rate measuring device Type 4043 Manufacturer TSI German Sites 1 mass flow rate measuring device Type Bios volumeter Manufacturer BIOS Butler New Jersey USA UK Sites 1 mass flow rate measuring device Type TetraCal venturi Manufacturer BGI Waltham Massachusetts USA UK Sites Measuring device Metratester 5 Manufacturer company Gossen Metrawatt for the determination of power consumption Zero filter for external zero point check and Ko check kit The installation of the cabinet and trailer and the arrangement of the sampling probes were characterized by the following dimension Height cabinet roof 2 50 m Height of the sampling for the Candidate 1 10 m above the cabinet roof and 3 61 m above ground Height of the sampling for the Candidate 0 5 m above the cabinet roof and 3 01 m above ground Height of the wind vane 4 5 m Germany and 2 5 m UK above ground Reference Method The following devices were used during the field test in accordance with EN 12341 1998 and EN14907 Small filter device Low Volume Sampler LVS3 for Manufacturer Ingenieurb ro Sven Leckel LeberstraBe 63 Berlin Germany Date of manufacture 2007 PM o Sampling inlet Small filter device Low Volume Sampler LVS3 for 5 Manufacturer Ingenieurb ro Sven Leckel LeberstraBe 63 Berlin Germany Date of manufacture 2007 PM S
292. ork To install the ePort software 1 Locate and double click on the setup ePort XX exe file where XX is the version number on the software CD that came with the TEOM 1405 DF monitor The Welcome to InstallShield Wizard screen will display Figure 3 15 ie ePort 0 12 8 InstallShield Wizard Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for ePort 0 12 8 The InstallShield R Wizard will install ePort 0 12 8 on your computer To continue click Next WARNING This program is protected by copyright law and international treaties Cancel 2 Select the Install button 3 The wizard will display the software license agreement Select Yes then select the Next gt button THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Figure 3 16 Windows Update notice THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 3 Basic OPERATION 4 The Windows update screen will display Figure 3 16 If you have recently updated your Windows XP software select the Next gt button Note The ePort software MUST be installed on a PC with the latest Windows XP or later updates If you have not updated your Windows system select the Cancel button and use the Windows Update function of the PC to update the operating system before attempting to install the ePort software i ePort 0 12 8 InstallShield Wizard Readme Information Please read the Following readme information carefully Important Note Supported Operating Systems o Windows
293. ot specified 230 ug m lt 25 Individual sites Bornheim Winter lt 25 Cologne Winter lt 25 Bornheim Summer lt 25 Teddington lt 25 Expanded uncertainty calculated at 50 ug m for Instrument SN 20116 for Full data set lt 25 30 ug m Not specified 230 ug m lt 25 Individual sites Bornheim Winter lt 25 Cologne Winter lt 25 Bornheim Summer lt 25 Teddington lt 25 Other Requirements Data Availability SN20006 98 2 290 Data Availability SN20107 99 1 290 Number of UK Tests Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 14 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the and 5 TEOM 1405 DF Note 1 For the 5 data as the intercept was statistically significantly different from zero based upon 2 standard deviations test results were also subjected to correction coefficients for intercept Expanded uncertainties for the Candidate Method were calculated for both uncorrected datasets as well as data that have been adjusted for intercept The CM fulfils the relevant Data Quality Objective of EU Directive 2008 50 EC when used without correction though the highest individual expanded uncertainty specified in GDE2010 as being required to be below 25 is reduced if correction for intercept by subtracting 1 212 ug m is employed Intercept correction is not required in order to make the instrument equivalent but it is essential that thorough and frequent on going QA QC procedur
294. ow 25 96 Criterion 5 For both candidates at the evaluation of the All data set the intercepts are significantly greater than allowed Other The evaluation of the All data set for both candidates together shows that the AMS demonstrates a very good correlation with the reference method with a slope of 0 997 and an intercept of 1 212 at an expended total uncertainty of 14 0 96 Table 23 Overview equivalence test TEOM 1405 DF Ambient Particulate Monitor for PM 25 3 gt 28 ug m3 Orthogonal Regression Betw een Instrument Uncertainties PM10 1405DF WCM 96 nc s 12 Slope b ub Intercept a ua Reference Candidate Criterion 1 All Data 336 0 976 30 ug m3 260 0 916 1 042 0 019 0 706 0 327 gt 30 ug m3 76 0 945 1 026 0 028 0 453 1 239 Criterion 2 Criterion 3 Orthogonal Regression Limit Value of 50 ug m3 Slope b ub Intercept a ua WCM gt 28 ug m3 L Criterion 4 SN 20014 Dataset Bornheim Winter 0 993 1 057 0 011 1 154 Cologne Winter 0 985 1 027 0 015 0 575 Criterion 5 Individual Datasets Bornheim Summer 0 977 1 109 0 020 0 348 Teddington 0 930 0 875 0 021 3 180 lt 30 ug m3 260 0 908 1 043 0 020 0 709 0 342 13 85 3 5 Combined Datasets gt 30 ug m3 0 935 1 042 0 031 0 144 1 376 14 94 100 0 All Data 336 0 973 1 021 0 009 1 010 0 241 12 15 25 3 Orthogonal Regression Limit Value of 50 u
295. ow controller to divide the PM 2 5 bypass flow into two components after the air stream passes through the size selective inlet and virtual impactor The two sample flow components are the PM 2 5 flow 3 1 min that flows to the PM 2 5 TEOM mass transducer and the bypass flow 12 1 min The PM Coatse flow 1 67 l min moves straight line through the virtual impactor into the top of the 1405 DF The 1405 DF is designed to have the sample tube installed 6 inches from the top of the flow splitter for ease of installation It MUST be between 5 75 and 6 25 inches from the top of the flow splitter Figure 2 5 Flow splitter Sample tube Bypass flow outlet I2 sample tube Sample tube 2 6 Operatine TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC 2 SETUP AND INSTALLATION The tubing package is designed to use the short sample tube in the flow splitter To set up the flow splitter assembly 1 Locate the flow splitter Figures 2 5 and 2 6 2 Loosen the 1 2 inch sample tube fastener nut and slide the short 31 inch sample tube down into the flow splitter so that the top of the installed sample tube or flow adapter is 15 5 cm 6 from the top of the flow splitter it must be between 5 75 and 6 25 inches from the top of the flow splitter Figure 2 7 3 Tighten the 1 2 inch sample tube nut Ensure that the top of the flow adapter remains 6 inches from the top of the flow splitter Figure 2
296. pactor and Impactor 1 Set the 1405 DF unit on a bench or other support directly below the location of the inlet on the roof of the sampling structure Figure 2 1 In its finished state the entrance to the sample inlet must be 1 8 to 2 1 m 70 to 82 inches above the roof Note This measurement may vary based on the inlet height required by the local regulatory agency A 2 Install the assembled flow splitter into the tripod and lightly tighten the knob to ensure the flow splitter stays in place Figure 2 9 Figure 2 9 Bottom of the flow splitter Flow splitter Sample tube THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Operatine TEOM 1405 DF 2 9 Section 2 SETUP AND INSTALLATION 3 Measure and mark two points 1 3 4 inches on center on the roof directly above the two 1 2 inch sample lines on the top of the instrument Figure 2 10 Note In this example a hole was cut in the roof to accommodate a 4 inch PVC pipe and seal The cap of the PVC pipe was then drilled to accommodate the sample lines A similar 3 inch PVC cap with the necessary fittings is available from Thermo Fisher Scientific 59 011003 4 Drill the holes in the roof for the two 1 2 inch sample lines and another hole for the 3 8 inch bypass line tubing The bypass tubing may also be run through a window or other opening Note The holes for the 1 2 sample lines MUST BE DRILLED 1 3 4 INCHES ON CENTER directly above the sample lines on the top of the ins
297. performed using the tightness check assistant to avoid damages of the instrument Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 35 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the PM and 5 TEOM 1405 DF Detailed representation of the test results Table 10 contains the determined values from the tightness check Table 10 Results of the tightness check during field test expressed as l min SN 20014 SN 20116 Limit Limit l min l min Teddington 0 15 0 15 Dec 2009 0 15 0 15 Teddington Apr 2010 Cologne winter PM coarse Bypass 25 Bornheim summer PMcoarse Bypass Leak was fixed Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 36 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific 2 UK Report on the Equivalence of the PM and PM TEOM 1405 DF Table 11 shows the same results as Table 10 expressed as a percentage by dividing by the flow rate This table is not presented in the TUV Rheinland Report and is included here for UK purposes Table 11 Results of the tightness check during field test expressed as SN 20014 SN 20116 Limit Basis Refer Limit Basis Refer ence ence l min l min l min l min l min l min Teddington PM2 5 5 00 1 67 1 67 5 00 1 00 0 67 Dec 2009 PMcoarse 8 98 2 99 2 99 8 98 2 40 1 80 Bypass 5 00 0 00 0 00 5 00 5 08
298. played 7 The ePort Main screen will display with the selected instrument displayed in the top window Figure 3 25 Repeat the process to add additional instruments to the list 8 save this as a configuration select File then Save from the menu bar at the top of the Main screen The Save As screen will display Type in the desired name for the configuration and select Save Note Once you have connected to an instrument or instruments and saved a configuration file select Open Saved Configuration in the ePort Open screen to open that configuration and automatically connect to all the instruments that were saved in that configuration 1405200100605 DichotFDMS Serial hemden 1406200100605 IP Address 10 210 96 145 States Corrmeands Download Des ads Deeanisud folder Location C Program Fissi Tharmcl J Last dosenbowd E rin 2 mirurart Prrsvare we Setup cedat Las Download oF Selected Date and Tine Ment dosenload will start with dete alter 3i Jen 2007 62620 Ex 3 22 Operatine TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 3 Basic OPERATION Finding Instruments You may use the ePort software to search for all instruments connected to On a Network the local network This function will only locate instruments on a local network To connect to instruments on other connected networks you must
299. ple stream through the system Power switch The TEOM Data screen will show a warning message Section 4 because the flow rates and temperatures are outside of tolerance ranges The warning may remain active during the first 30 minutes after the power switch is pressed while the monitor warms up The status warning icon automatically disappears after all flow rates and temperatures reach tolerance ranges The monitor waits until the flow rates and temperatures stabilize within a narrow range before starting data collection This ensures the validity of all data points computed by the system Note Upon initial instrument start up the values in the mass concentration fields are the running averages that are accumulated until a 1 hour time period has passed The values are visible to provide the user with an indication that the instrument is functioning after instrument power up or reset These raw values are used for internal calculations only Operatinc TEOM 1405 DF 2 17 Section 2 SETUP AND INSTALLATION Turning Off the Instrument Restarting the Instrument Figure 2 19 Instrument Control screen 2 18 Operatine TEOM 1405 DF If the instrument needs to be turned off turn the power switch on the front of the unit to off 0 Note Wait at least 1 minute after shutdown before reapplying power to the unit The instrument may also be restarted without turning it off To restart the instrument In the
300. ponse Enter 0 if nothing is to be appended Transmission to Instrument Response from Instrument sre ep em tm _ 1 digit Station Number RS Para 1 1 digit Station Number RS Para 1 RS Para 2 75048 Ask Register command 4 digit Ask Register command Number of current status conditions of current status conditions eee em a fee k 2 digit Channel Number as defined Se DE AL i hose value is being requested The Program Register Code of the a RC 86 od NNNM variable whose value is being PRC may BE up 03 digits lang ig requested The PRC may be up to 3 S not right filled in the response digits long Do not right fill if the d IL Current value of the variable referenced length os e 3 j ed O THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Operatine Guine TEOM 1405 DF B 5 APPENDIX SERIAL COMMUNICATION AK Protocol Ask Register Command AREG continued Transmission to Instrument Response from Instrument Description Description ASCII code 003 Up to 3 digits appended to the end of the response transmission according to the entry for RS Para 3 Description of Status Codes PRC 008 AR K 1 Mass Transducer 2 Temperature 4 Flow Rate 8 Filter Exchange 16 Voltage wo mM MO ol oOo k ers wiol IATA
301. pr 11 10 00 Mon 11 Apr 11 10 00 Bureau Veritas Air Quality AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 gui Drl SA1 S ZNd 18 2 37 4 50 7 28 4 20 4 22 4 41 7 20 3 18 6 27 6 24 6 20 5 44 7 15 6 6 0 8 5 14 6 8 8 11 0 13 0 13 7 19 0 11 1 15 2 ui Drl Z SA1 20 0 37 8 49 6 28 1 20 3 22 3 41 6 20 4 20 2 27 5 24 8 20 7 44 2 15 6 5 1 7 7 13 7 9 0 11 4 12 9 13 1 19 8 11 8 15 1 L ESAT OLWd 27 7 44 1 67 3 68 0 38 4 28 6 34 7 55 7 33 1 33 3 36 9 35 6 32 4 65 4 24 0 10 5 13 3 22 1 17 9 19 2 23 6 23 2 34 9 23 4 31 3 Z ESAI 25 6 43 1 65 8 67 1 38 4 28 0 34 3 54 8 31 6 32 7 37 2 35 4 31 9 65 6 23 4 9 3 13 0 22 4 16 6 19 0 23 8 24 2 34 8 22 3 31 5 71002 NS 39 4 57 5 53 9 29 5 13 0 20 0 23 3 42 0 21 3 21 5 28 0 13 5 25 9 21 3 46 8 15 6 7 2 8 4 16 6 15 6 10 4 12 4 14 7 15 1 16 8 gui Drl 91102 NS 36 5 56 3 52 5 28 9 13 4 20 4 23 2 41 4 21 5 20 5 28 5 12 9 25 7 214 46 7 15 1 6 8 8 4 16 9 15 2 9 9 12 9 14 9 13 7 16 0 1002 NS 46 5 67 9 68 3 38 6 18 8 28 8 35 6 57 9 33 7 35 4 38 8 19 4 37 2 33 2 68 5 24 7 10 4 13 4 34 7 20 2 17 2 19 1 24 6 23 7 35 7 91102 NS 44 1 67 3 67 5 38 2 19 6 29 9 36 1 57 5 34 4 34 4 39 6 19 0 37 2
302. pter for more information on removing the filter cassettes 13 Reinstall the tower cover 5 34 Operatine TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES 14 Select the Next gt button The wizard will display a message showing the procedure is complete Figure 5 43 Select the Finish button to exit the wizard and return to the Maintenance screen or select the lt Back button to move backward one step the procedure Figure 5 43 Complete screen Completing the Cooler Cleaning Wizard The Cooler Cleaning Wizard has completed sucessiuly The instrument will ba put im Run mada when this wizard is finished To close thig wizard press Finish THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Operatinc TEOM 1405 DF 5 35 Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES Cleaning the Switching Valve Figure 5 44 Valve Cleaning Wizard Welcome screen 5 36 Operatine Guine TEOM 1405 DF The switching valve should be cleaned once a year or as necessary Follow these steps to clean the switching valve 1 In the 1405 TEOM Data screen select the Service button to display the Service screen then select the Maintenance button to display the Maintenance screen Figure 5 3 2 Select the Clean the Switching Valve button to start the Valve Cleaning Wizard Figure 5 44 Select the Next gt button to begin the procedure Welcome to the Valve Cleaning Wiza
303. r fork of the filter exchange tool under one of the used TEOM filter so that the filter disk is between the fork and the upper tab of the filter exchange tool Figure 5 7 The tines of the fork should straddle the hub of the filter base Figure 5 7 Opening the mass transducer 8 Gently pull straight up lifting the TEOM filter from the tapered element TE Do not twist or tilt the filter exchange tool from side to side while removing the filter from the TE This will damage the TE THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Operatine TEOM 1405 DF 5 7 Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES 9 Repeat the removal procedure for the second used TEOM filter Select the Next gt button 10 The Replace Filters screen will display Pick up a new conditioned TEOM filter from one of the filter holders with the filter exchange tool so that the filter disk lies between the fork and the upper tab of the tool and the hub of the filter lies between the tines of the fork Figures 5 8 and 5 9 Note TEOM filters must be preconditioned to avoid excessive moisture buildup prior to their use in the system Refer to the next section A Note Do not touch the filter with your fingers while picking it up with the filter exchange tool A 11 Hold the filter exchange tool in line with the tapered element Figures 5 8 and 5 9 and lightly place the hub of the filter onto the tip of the tapered element Select the Next gt button Figure 5 8
304. r PM Reference Cologne Winter PM Reference Bornheim Summer PM Reference Teddington PM Reference The data pairs removed are described in Table 16 and Table 17 and are shown graphically in Figure 23 to Figure 30 Table 16 Removed data pairs reference according to Grubbs Test site Date Reference 1 ug m Reference 2 ug m Teddington 22 12 2009 32 7 Teddington 21 06 2010 14 1 Teddington 28 06 2010 17 9 Cologne winter 04 03 2011 83 3 Bornheim summer 19 10 2011 19 8 Bornheim summer 23 10 2011 Table 17 Removed data pairs reference PM according to Grubbs Test site Date Reference 1 ug m Reference 2 ug m Teddington 06 01 2010 13 5 16 0 Cologne winter 16 03 2011 55 0 57 8 Cologne winter 05 05 2011 11 2 14 8 Bureau Veritas Air Quality AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Page 49 Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the and 5 TEOM 1405 DF Figure 23 Figure 24 Bureau Veritas Air Quality Grubbs test results for the reference method Teddington Wd 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 Not Outlier Outlier Deleted Outlier Not Deleted 1 to 1 Line 30 40 50 60 70 Reference 1 80 90 100 Grubbs test res
305. r PMss though there is no requirement for this objective to be achieved These six intra instrument uncertainties should be placed on the MCERTS certificate The required expanded uncertainties are all less than 2596 These should be shown on the MCERTS certificate As such criterion 4 is fulfilled The expanded uncertainties of the datasets less than 30 ug m for and 18 ug m for PM25 were also calculated These should also be shown on the MCERTS certificate but there is no requirement that they be below 25 95 The intercept of the All Data dataset is statistically different from 0 at both and 5 This requires further investigation and this is covered in Section 12 4 Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 86 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 wj BUREAU VERITAS Thermo Fisher Scientific 2 UK Report on the Equivalence of the and 5 TEOM 1405 DF 12 4 Application of correction factors and terms In this Section Criterion 5 is assessed namely 5 Preconditions for acceptance of the full dataset are that the slope b is insignificantly different from 1 b 1 lt 2 u b and the intercept a is insignificantly different from 0 lt 2 u a If these preconditions are not met the candidate method may be calibrated using the values obtained for slope and or intercept of all paired instruments together The following text is copied with minor alterations from Section 6 1 5 4 11 of the T V Rheinland Report Eq
306. r cut only Thermo PM2 5 Grubbs outlier Inlet gt Zero filter Zero filter Zero filter Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the PM25 TEOM 1405 DF eus Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Bornheim Summer Bornheim Summer eu pue ojeq neis Tue 12 Apr 11 10 00 Wed 13 Apr 11 10 00 Thu 14 Apr 11 10 00 Fri 15 Apr 11 10 00 Sat 16 Apr 11 10 00 Sun 17 Apr 11 10 00 Mon 18 Apr 11 10 00 Tue 19 Apr 11 10 00 Wed 20 Apr 11 10 00 Thu 21 Apr 11 10 00 Fri 22 Apr 11 10 00 Sat 23 Apr 11 10 00 Sun 24 Apr 11 10 00 Mon 25 Apr 11 10 00 Tue 26 Apr 11 10 00 Wed 27 Apr 11 10 00 Thu 28 Apr 11 10 00 Fri 29 Apr 11 10 00 Sat 30 Apr 11 10 00 Sun 01 May 11 10 00 Mon 02 May 11 10 00 Tue 03 May 11 10 00 Wed 04 May 11 10 00 Thu 05 May 11 10 00 Fri 06 May 11 10 00 Sat 07 May 11 10 00 Sun 08 May 11 10 00 Mon 25 Jul 11 07 00 Tue 26 Jul 11 07 00 Bureau Veritas Air Quality AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 gui Drl SA1 S ZNd 9 0 12 5 19 6 13 3 17 0 17 5 20 0 19 6 17 0 16 2 19 0 12 9 6 7 9 3 9 0 11 4 13 7 19 1 12
307. rance to the sample inlet is 1 8 to 2 1 m 70 to 82 inches above the roof Figure 2 12 Note This measurement may vary based on the inlet height required by the local regulatory agency Figure 2 12 Inlet installed Inlet entrance 1 8 to 2 1 m above the Inlet roof Sample tube 2 12 Operatine TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC 2 SETUP AND INSTALLATION 10 Center the tripod over the roof holes Measure and cut the sample tube extensions from the top of the instrument making sure to clean and deburr the cut ends of the sample tube extensions Install them through the roof and connect the left PM 2 5 channel sample tube to the flow splitter sample tube and the right PM Coarse channel sample tube to the sample tube installed into the virtual impactor Note The flow splitter and coarse sample tube extension should be seated firmly into the bottom of the virtual impactor Figure 2 13 A Figure 2 13 Coarse sample tube flow splitter and virtual impactor installed Sample tube extension coarse channel Flow splitter extension tube PM 2 5 channel THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Operatinc TEOM 1405 DF 2 13 Section 2 SETUP AND INSTALLATION 11 Connect the end of the green bypass tubing the other end is attached to the coiled tubing of the water trap filter to the bypass fitting on the flow splitter using the 3 8 inch Swagelok fitting Figure 2 14 Note Ensure that the
308. rd This wizard helps you clean the switching valve on the TEOM Dichat Ambient Particulate Monitor The instrument will be put Setup mode for Ta continue press Next gt Cancel THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES 3 The Remove Front Cover screen will display Remove the front cover from the unit and locate the switching valves fittings and tubing connections Figure 5 45 4 Remove the tubing from both of the top two quick connect fittings on the switching valve Select the Next gt button Figure 5 45 Interior of 1405 tower ven THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC TEOM 1405 DF 5 37 Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES 5 The Remove Valve screen will display Using a 1 inch wrench or an adjustable wrench completely loosen the two Swagelok fittings on the top of the switching valve and the two Swagelok fittings on the bottom of the switching valve Figures 5 45 and 5 46 Figure 5 46 Removing a valve Swagelok fitting 6 Loosen the fine and coarse sample tube fittings on the top plate of the 1405 DF towet then push the dryers back while lifting the switching valve slightly then partially remove it from the tower It will still be connected by two of the tubes leading to the coolers Select the Next gt button 7 The Clean Valve screen will display Clean the two chambers
309. rd However older versions of these 2 3 m h samplers that do not employ sheath air cooling the ability to cool filters after sampling or the ability to monitor temperatures at critical points in the sampling system have a special status in terms of their use as reference samplers Historical results obtained using these samplers will remain valid These samplers can still be used for monitoring purposes and for equivalence trials provided that a well justified additional allowance is made to their uncertainties As the field tests of the TEOM 1405 DF pre date the publication of the finalised standard and it s enacting through a revised Air Quality Directive it is not necessary to consider the difference between the instrument used and the future standard However for completeness the potential effects are as follows In the herein described field tests the filters were manually changed in the LVS3s within 15 minutes of the sampling stopping and immediately transferred to the filter conditioning room both UK and Germany refrigerated UK or stored inside at 20 C Germany This removes the need for the instrument to automatically change filters and then cool the sampled filters A difference between the reference method used and the future PM standard is that there is sheath air cooling in the later standard As the filters were changed between 7 and 10 am each morning this is before the ambient temperature reached a level capable of v
310. rd deviation at reference point e Linearity Lack of fit e Sensitivity coefficient of the surrounding temperature e Sensitivity coefficient of the electric voltage e Standard deviation from paired measurements e Long term drift e Equivalency of the sampling system e Reproducibility of the sampling systems e Calibration e Cross sensitivity e Averaging effect These tests are not detailed in this report and further details can be found in the TUV Rheinland Report Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 28 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 BUREAU VERITAS Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the and 5 TEOM 1405 DF 7 Laboratory Test Procedures Used The laboratory test was carried out with two identical devices of TEOM 1405 DF Ambient Particulate Monitor measuring system with the serial numbers SN 20014 and SN 20116 These are the same two devices as were used in the field tests In order to improve the clarity of the report the Laboratory test procedures used Section 7 and the Laboratory test results Section 8 are considered together for each of the three tests in turn 8 Laboratory Test Results 8 1 Constancy of Sample Volumetric Flow MCERTS for UK Particulate Matter lists the following requirement for constancy of the sample volumetric flow Constancy of the sample volume flow is tested as specified in the MCERTS Standard using selective filters loaded with particulat
311. re met they are shaded green and where they are not met they are shaded red In order to prevent weighting the calculations to specific days of the year for each day of the year if more than one year s worth of reference method data was available then the geometric mean of all available years was taken for this day The geometric mean was then calculated for the entire year using these geometric means for each day of the year In all cases the geometric means are within the prescribed range All of the sites employed in the testing of the TEOM 1405 DF are only used for equivalence testing purposes and as such while greater than 6 months worth of data have been collected at each site the number of calendar days is slightly lower than 6 months worth for Bornheim and for Cologne Parking Lot In order to demonstrate that the area around Cologne is within the prescribed range a Nord Rhein Westphalia NRW network site for which three years of and 5 reference method data are available Cologne Chorweiler in a suburban area to Cologne is also presented This site is within the prescribed range of 130 km to all Cologne Bonn area field test sites and as such the data from all sites in the Cologne area are shown to have a similar pollution climate to the UK Further evidence can be found in the extensive study of the UK Pollution Climate where data from the Cologne area were proven to be of a similar pollution climate to the
312. rectly to a personal computer or through a modem The following AK Protocol commands are presented in detail on the following pages e AREG Ask Register Command The user can query the TEOM 1405 Monitor for the current value of any system variable e EREG Enter Register Command The user can assign a new value to any system variable Great care must be taken when using this command as the value of variables should only be changed when the monitor is in the appropriate operating mode SFxx Set Function xx Command The user can send commands using the RUN key and the DATA STOP key to the instrument Each command is designated by a two digit code xx e ASTO Ask Storage Command The user can download a specified number of records from the internal data logger from the current position of the data storage pointer The location of this storage pointer may be defined by the SSTO command The values on each line of output are delimited by commas e SSTO Set Storage Command The user can change the location of the data storage pointer in the internal data logger and is used in conjunction with the ASTO command described above The data storage pointer is always located immediately after the last record transmitted through the RS232 port via the AK Protocol If the circular buffer overwrites this location or if the ASTO or SSTO commands have not been used the data storage pointer is positioned at the oldest recotd in the int
313. replace the O rings Figure 5 27 Bottom of collector assembly with O rings 10 Clean the weep hole in the collector plate where the moisture runs out to the moisture trap Figure 5 26 11 Clean the rain jar Inspect the rain jar cover s brass nipple fitting to ensure that it is secure and free from blockages Figure 5 28 Figure 5 28 Rain jar cover 5 20 Operatine Guipe TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC 12 13 14 15 16 17 Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES Apply a light coating of silicone grease to the O rings Figure 5 27 to ensure that a seal is made when they are reinstalled on the flow splitter Clean the lower collector assembly s threads to ensure a tight seal when the two halves are reassembled Reassemble the top and bottom inlet assemblies until the threads tighten Hand tighten only Reinstall the insect screen and align the top plate markings with the lower plate markings Install the top plate onto the lower plate and tighten the four pan head screws Place a light coating of silicone grease on the gasket inside the cap of the rain jar This will ensure a leak free fit Reinstall the rain jar Place the inlet on the flow splitter Take care not to damage the internal O rings Operatinc TEOM 1405 DF 5 21 Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES Cleaning the Virtual Impactor Figure 5 28 Inlet assembl
314. rformed Similarly for according to Table 23 a correction of the intercept shall be performed due to the determined significance A correction of the slope due to the calculated significance for the candidate SN 20014 is waived though since in the single data sets some of the slopes are greater than 1 and others on the other hand smaller than 1 and therefore a correction of the slope would not lead to an improvement It is noted that the determined uncertainties Woy without the application of correction factors for all observed data sets lay under the set expanded relative uncertainty Waqo of 25 for both PM and For 5 The intercept for the All data comparison is 1 212 Therefore in Section 12 4 an additional evaluation using the respective intercept calibration factor for the datasets is performed For PM o The intercept for the All data comparison is 1 078 Therefore in Section 12 4 an additional evaluation using the respective intercept calibration factor for the datasets is performed 11 D Harrison R Maggs 2006 UK Equivalence Programme for Monitoring of Particulate Matter Final report for Defra and the Devolved Administrations http uk air defra gov uk reports cat05 0606130952 UKPMEquivalence pdf Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 71 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific 2 UK Report on the Equivalence of the PM and 5 TEOM 1405 DF The reworked version of the Guide of Ja
315. riate temperature and humidity level for sampling A THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Operatinc TEOM 1405 DF 5 15 Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES Replacing the 47 Install new 47 mm filters into the TEOM 1405 DF unit before running the mm Filters first sample run and every time that you install a new TEOM filter into the unit To install the 47 mm filters 1 Locate the two doors on the left side of the TEOM 1405 DF unit Open one of the small filter doors Figures 5 20 Figure 5 20 Filter door open Notch Locking disk 2 Turn the filter holder counterclockwise until the notches line up with the locking disk Figure 5 21 and then pull outward to remove the holder from the unit Figure 5 21 Removing the 47 mm filter Filter Blue filter cassette 5 16 Operatine Guine TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES 3 Locate blue filter cassette and remove the used 47 mm filter 4 Insert a new 47 mm filter into the cassette Be sure to install the 47 mm filter into the cassette with the face of the filter paper facing the top of the cassette The top of the cassette fits 2 0 the bottom of the cassette Figure 5 22 Figure 5 22 1 47 mm filter cassette 0 with filter and screen Filter Screen Bottom 5 Close the filter cassette Figure 5 23 Figure 5 23 Closing the filter cassette 6 Install th
316. ritas Air Quality AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 ui Brl ESAT S ZNd 32 7 19 5 6 2 5 4 7 0 19 9 22 7 17 0 64 0 61 2 36 5 25 3 20 1 29 0 24 1 31 9 25 2 33 4 30 1 gui Drl 2 SA1S ZINd 33 2 18 9 5 9 5 1 7 9 20 0 22 3 16 0 62 4 60 2 36 6 25 1 20 2 28 9 25 6 32 4 25 7 34 4 32 6 gui Drl ESAT 0LINd 44 3 28 9 8 6 11 4 11 7 20 9 28 3 29 3 24 1 69 2 71 2 44 2 31 6 25 6 37 6 31 3 41 3 37 6 43 6 38 7 gui Drl Z SA10LINd 45 6 26 4 9 5 12 9 13 5 21 5 25 5 27 6 24 3 69 8 71 6 42 8 31 4 25 3 36 7 30 1 40 4 35 5 42 7 37 7 ui Brl S ZNd t LO0Z NS 34 8 19 7 6 9 5 0 6 8 8 3 17 4 22 5 23 7 18 2 16 5 68 5 65 2 39 1 26 1 21 0 26 9 32 6 26 7 35 1 26 9 34 1 33 0 ewr 91102 NS 34 0 18 6 6 7 3 7 6 5 8 7 15 4 20 6 22 6 17 2 15 8 65 2 61 7 37 0 24 3 20 7 28 5 32 7 24 3 31 7 25 0 33 5 31 2 OLINd 71002 NS 48 8 30 0 11 3 8 6 13 9 14 9 25 7 29 1 29 6 26 6 22 4 75 8 75 8 47 0 33 1 27 1 34 4 38 9 33 7 44 4 37 9 42 9 39 2 gui Drl 91102 NS 48 5 28 7 11 6 8 0 14 0 15 7 24 0 27 4 29 1 25 7 22 3 72 9 72 7 45 9 31 1 26 8 37 3 39 4 31 5 41 2 35 7 42 7 37 5 jueiquiy 0 6 7 2 3 1 7 3 6 4 4 2 2 3 2 5 2 6 2 3 1 6 0 4 0 1 2 7 5 2 7 0 8 5 8 5 7 9 8 9 7 6 5 7 5 4 H
317. rmittlung der Emissionen und Immissionen von Ger amp uschen Ermittlung von Ger uschen und Vibrationen am Arbeitsplatz Modul Immissionsschutz Die Akkreditierungsurkunde gilt nur in Verbindung mit dem Bescheid vom 13 05 2011 mit der Akkreditierungsnummer D PL 11120 02 und ist g ltig bis 31 01 2013 Sie besteht aus diesem Deckblatt der R ckseite des Deckblatts und der folgenden Anlage mit insgesamt 32 Seiten Registrierungsnummer der Urkunde D PL 11120 02 00 A Berlin 13 05 2011 Andrea Valbuena Abteilungsieiterin mt der Poches Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 114 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report the Equivalence of the and PM25 TEOM 1405 DF Deutsche Akkreditierungsstelle GmbH Standort Berlin Standort Frankfurt am Main Standort Braunschweig Spittelmarkt 10 Gartenstra e 6 Bundesallee 100 10117 Berlin 60594 Frankfurt am Main 38116 Braunschwelg Die auszugsweise Ver ffentlichung der Akkreditierungsurkunde bedarf der vorherigen schriftlichen Zustimmung der DAKKS Deutsche Akkreditierungsstelle GmbH Ausgenommen davon ist die separate Weiterverbreitung des Deckblattes durch die umseitig genannte Konformitatsbewertungsstelle in unver nderter Form Es darf nicht der Anschein erweckt werden dass sich die Akkreditierung auch auf Bereiche erstreckt die ber den durch die DAkkS bestatigten Akkreditierungsbereich hinausgehen Die Akkreditierung erfolgte
318. rompt you to attach a flow meter to the appropriate flow channel a To calibrate the PM 2 5 flow channel remove the inlet inlet tube and virtual impactor and attach the 1 1 4 inch flow adapter meter to the top of the flow splitter Figure 5 65 Disconnect the bypass line from the side of the flow splitter don t let it fall to the ground and cap the bypass fitting with the 3 8 inch Swagelok cap provided with the system Figure 5 66 Figure 5 65 Flow adapter meter attached to the flow splitter Flow meter adapter Figure 5 66 Bypass line capped Bypass cap 5 54 Operatine Guine TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES b To calibrate the PM Coarse flow channel remove the inlet inlet tube and virtual impactor and connect the 1 2 inch Swagelok flow audit adapter to the top of the 1 2 inch coarse flow inlet Connect the flow meter adapter to the flow audit adapter Figure 5 67 Figure 5 67 Flow adapter attached to the 1 2 inch coarse flow inlet 1 2 inch flow adapter c To calibrate the bypass flow channel remove the bypass line from the flow splitter and connect the 3 8 inch flow adapter to the green tubing of the bypass line Connect the flow meter adapter to the flow audit adapter When the flow audit device is attached to the correct channel select the Next gt button THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC TEOM 1405 DF 5 55 Section 5
319. round for the purposes of the Pollution Climate calculations as this is the closest category for which a comparison is available Ambient dew points were calculated from the ambient temperature and the relative humidity It is recognised that during periods of 100 relative humidity this will lead to an underestimation of the ambient dew point and therefore the percentage of days with the ambient dew point higher than the prescribed threshold may in actuality be greater In all cases the wind speed data are assumed to be urban rather than rural The reason for this is that MCERTS for UK Particulate Matter calculations of rural wind speed were performed on data obtained from anemometers in coastal locations Conversely all of the sites employed in the field tests were non coastal and exhibited a large degree of surface roughness Semi volatile component calculations were obtained by averaging the reference channel of the four and 5 1405 FDMSs For the UK field tests on days where these volatile fraction data were not available the average of the 8500 series FDMSs at nearby London Teddington and London Bloomsbury were used For the German field tests on days where these volatile fraction data were not available the ammonium nitrate concentration obtained from the analysis of the reference method filters at Cologne Chorweiler was used These remote sites are significantly within the 130 km distance restriction from imposed upon the u
320. rt PC software to connect to the instrument and display the ePort Main screen Figure 3 31 Refer to the Connecting to the TEOM 1405 DF Unit section for information on connecting to the instrument Note Once you have connected to an instrument or instruments and saved a configuration file select Open Saved Configuration in the ePort Open screen to open that configuration and automatically connect to all the instruments that were saved in that configuration 1405200100605 DichotFDMS Serial Nemden 14056200100805 1P Address 10 210 96 145 States the Commands Connicad Data Remote ge Ponh Prrevara 500 Download Details Decanload folder Location Program les tharrelaPeet _ Last download Pectomabed dossloads Last noad ox Selected Date and Tie Next downloud wil start with dete after 31 Jen 2007 0626 20 ex Operatine TEOM 1405 DF 3 29 Section 3 Basic OPERATION 3 Select Download Data in the Commands window of the ePort Main screen The Download Data screen will display Figure 3 32 Figure 3 32 Download Data screen Download Data To download data from PL 1405 click Begin Download Begin Download 4 Select the Begin Download button The ePort software will download data based on the settings created the Download Setup wizard Refer to the previous section for information
321. rt on the Equivalence of the PM25 TEOM 1405 DF E Field Test Data Table 38 aus Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington VERITAS Site Start Date LVS3 Concentration CM concentration Ambient Temperature RH Ambient Dew Point and Volatile Components used pue ajeq ues Wed 09 Dec 09 10 00 Thu 10 Dec 09 10 00 Fri 11 Dec 09 10 00 Sat 12 Dec 09 10 00 Sun 13 Dec 09 10 00 Mon 14 Dec 09 10 00 Tue 15 Dec 09 10 00 Wed 16 Dec 09 10 00 Thu 17 Dec 09 10 00 Fri 18 Dec 09 10 00 Sat 19 Dec 09 10 00 Sun 20 Dec 09 10 00 Mon 21 Dec 09 10 00 Tue 22 Dec 09 10 00 Wed 23 Dec 09 10 00 Thu 24 Dec 09 10 00 Fri 25 Dec 09 10 00 Sat 26 Dec 09 10 00 Sun 27 Dec 09 10 00 Mon 28 Dec 09 10 00 Tue 29 Dec 09 10 00 Wed 30 Dec 09 10 00 ew 6r SA1 S ZNd 11 3 16 4 11 8 6 4 8 6 27 9 39 8 24 9 5 7 11 6 10 3 6 2 17 7 29 4 ui Drl Z SA1 11 6 16 2 11 7 6 5 9 1 28 3 38 8 24 5 5 6 11 9 11 0 6 4 17 7 28 9 ew 6rl ESAT OLWd 27 5 25 4 20 3 13 5 13 4 35 3 47 6 30 0 10 2 16 9 15 4 11 1 20 2 Z SAT OLINd 27 5 25 4 20 2 13 6 13 9 35 3 47 4 30 3 10 1 17 0 14 9 11 0 20 4 Thu 31 Dec 09 10 00 6 0 6 5 15 2
322. s This section describes the screens shown in the instrument software and the system s operating modes as well as how to change instrument settings When the instrument is started it will display the Title screen for a few seconds Figure 4 1 after the initialization process Figure 4 1 Title screen SERIES 1405 DF 1 01 Dichotomous Ambient Particulate Monitor wath FDIS propan peiris fe took This curren bb SOL Caina Saren Cage 2 Fre A hoe eee ee ee ri Ju OG Puto Fisher Sostis The Title screen includes the instrument model and the firmware version of the instrument THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC TEOM 1405 DF Section 4 SCREENS AND SETTINGS TEOM Data Screen Figure 4 2 TEOM Data screen with menu buttons status and operating and lock modes highlighted MENU MENU BUTTONS Instru 4 2 Operatine TEOM 1405 DF After the Title screen the Data screen will automatically display Figure 4 2 The TEOM Data screen shows the basic operating information as well as status conditions and the instrument operating mode The TEOM Data screen can be displayed by selecting the TEOM Data button in any of the other four main screens System Status Instrument Conditions Settings Service
323. s The candidate instruments were operated and maintained in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 54 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific d UK Report on the Equivalence of the and PM TEOM 1405 DF 11 Data Availability of the Candidate Method MCERTS for UK Particulate Matter lists the following requirement for the Availability of the measuring system The fraction of the total and consecutive monitoring time during all the field trials involved in the equivalence testing programme for which data of acceptable quality are collected The times required for scheduled calibrations and maintenance shall not be included The method for calculating this fractional time is given in Section 5 2 Eq 2 Availability defined here is the same as the minimum data capture requirements given in the data quality objectives in Directive 2008 50 EC for the relevant pollutant Where Directive 2008 50 EC defines a data capture of 90 95 The following text is copied with minor alterations from Section 6 1 5 2 8 of the T V Rheinland Report Equipment Not required for this test Performance of test Start time and end time of the availability tests were defined by the start and end of the field tests at each test site All measurement interruptions e g due to system outage or maintenance works were considered for this test Evaluation Table 18 and Table 19 show a compi
324. s followed by lt CR gt lt LF gt ee THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Operatine Guine TEOM 1405 DF B 9 Appenpix SERIAL COMMUNICATION AK Protocol Set Storage Marker Command SSTO COM 2 WAY SETTINGS RS Para 1 ASCII code for the 1 digit Station Number for example 4 052 The Station Number is always 1 digit in length RS Para 2 75048 ASCII code representation of the 2 digit Channel Number for example 075 048 The Channel Number is always 2 digits in length RS Para 3 13010 Optional Up to 3 ASCII codes can be added to response from the instrument In this case CR and lt LF gt ASCII codes 013 and 010 are appended to the response Enter 0 if nothing is to be appended Transmission to Instrument Response from Instrument m _ _ LE w Number of current status conditions s mre e eme oo ow Up to 3 digits appended to the end of 2 digit Channel Number as defined New location of the Storage Marker 1 lt LF gt the response transmission according to B move to beginning of storage ETX the entry for RS Para 3 buffer E move to end of storage 12 buffer Enter positive numbers such as 1000 to move backwards by 1 1000 records Do not right fill 1 B 10 Operatine TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC SERIAL COMMUNICATION AK Protocol Response if Command Addressed
325. s of obviously implausible data on the measuring results Paired values which are identified as significant outliers can be discarded until the critical value of the test statistic is exceeded The January 2010 version of the Guidance stipulates that not more than 2 5 of the paired values in total for each field test site may be identified and removed as outliers It was agreed between T V Rheinland and BV not to discard any measured value for the candidates unless the implausibility is caused due to technical reasons Table 14 and Table 15 show an overview on the amount of paired values reference which were recognized and removed as significant outliers at each test site Table 14 Results Grubbs outlier test Reference Graph Number Sampler Number 2 Maximum Number Number Identified Number Deleted Number of galar pairs that can be deleted pairs remaining 66 2 0 0 Bornheim Winter Reference Cologne Winter PM Reference Bornheim Summer PM Reference Teddington PM Reference Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 48 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 0 BUREAU VERITAS Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the 5 TEOM 1405 DF Table 15 Results Grubbs outlier test Reference Number of data Maximum Number pairs that can be deleted Number of data Graph Number Sampler A pairs remaining Number Identified Number Deleted Bornheim Winte
326. s wizard heips you verithy the ca tration constants KOs on the TEOM Dichot Ambient Particulate hMeonitor The instrument will be put in Setup mode for verification T6 continue press Operatinc TEOM 1405 DF 5 65 Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES 6 The Select TEOM screen will display Figure 5 81 Select the channel 2 5 or for which the KO number will be verified Select the Next gt button Note The following screens show a fine KO verification Figure 5 81 Select TEOM The wizard will verity each TEOM independantly Select TEOM screen 7 The Install Pre Filter screen will display Figure 5 82 Remove the inlet and install the flow audit adapter onto the sample inlet tube then install the pre filter assembly the filter and short length of silicone tubing onto the flow audit adapter Figure 5 83 Select the Next gt button Figure 5 82 install Pre Filter Install Pre Filter screen A preliller Now audit adapter and shori length of sane tubing are supplied with the instrument 5 66 Operatine TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES Figure 5 83 TEOM 1405 inlet assembly THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Operatinc TEOM 1405 DF 5 67 Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES 8 The Remove Sample Filter screen will display Open the mass transducer and re
327. se of volatile fraction data from remote sites In recognition that both ammonium and nitrate ions can form compounds with nitrate and ammonium respectively e g ammonium sulphate or sodium nitrate the ammonium nitrate calculation was taken as whichever was the lower of 1 assuming all ammonium ions were a part of ammonium nitrate and 2 assuming all nitrate ions were a part of ammonium nitrate For nearly all days the lower value for ammonium nitrate was obtained by assuming all nitrate was held in ammonium nitrate The results are summarised in Table 32 and Table 33 where criteria are met they are shaded green and where they are not met they are shaded red As discussed in Section 15 1 there is the requirement that for each instrument type at least one site of at least 40 data pairs must meet the high threshold for each criteria and at least one site of at least 40 data pairs must meet the low threshold for each criteria For the TEOM 1405 DF for both and 5 at least one site of at least 40 data pairs meets the lower threshold and at least one site of at least 40 data pairs meets the higher threshold for each of Wind Speed Ambient Temperature Ambient Dew Point and Semi Volatile As such the Wind Speed Ambient Temperature Ambient Dew Point and Semi Volatile criteria are fully met for the TEOM 1405 DF Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 95 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 9 BUREAU VERITAS Thermo Fisher Scientific
328. software The Microsoft NET Framework Welcome screen will display Figure 3 19 Select the Next gt button Figure 3 19 gog Microsoft NET Framework 2 0 Setu 1 Microsoft NET Framework _ Welcome screen Welcome to Microsoft NET Framework 2 0 Setup This wizard will quide you through the installation process Came 9 Select Install The system will begin installing the Microsoft NET Framework software The wizard will post progress messages during the installation Note If the Microsoft NET Framework software is already installed on the PC the wizard will ask you to Repair or Remove the software Select Repair to ensure the latest version is installed on the PC or select Cancel to skip the Microsoft NEW Framework installation A THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Operatine TEOM 1405 DF 3 17 Section 3 Basic OPERATION Figure 3 20 Microsoft NET Framework Setup Complete screen 3 18 Operatine TEOM 1405 DF 10 When the installation is complete the Setup Complete screen will display Figure 3 20 Select the Finish button to complete the ePort and Microsoft NET Framewotk installation 19 Microsoft NET Framework 2 0 Setup Setup Complete Microsoft NET Framework 2 0 has been successfully installed It is highly recommended that you download and install the latest service packs and security updates for this product For more information visit
329. specific support needs and keep your instrumentation operating at peak performance Contact Thermo Scientific 27 Forge Parkway Franklin Ma 02038 www thermofisher com As Thermo Scientific s instrumentation changes so do our operating manuals However these changes may affect only one aspect of an instrument while leaving the instrument as a whole unchanged To explain these individual changes to our customers Thermo Scientific will update only those sections of its operating manuals that are affected by the instrument updates or improvements To help our customers keep track of the changes to the 1405 DF monitor and its operating guide following is a list of the sections with their respective revision numbers Section Number and Description Revision Number Section 1 Introduction A 003 Section 2 Setup and Installation A 003 Section 3 Basic Operation A 003 Section 4 Screens and Settings A 003 Section 5 Maintenance and Calibration Procedures A 003 Appendix A Troubleshooting A 003 Appendix B Serial Communication A 003 THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Preface Table of Contents CIEN i 1 1 Overview OT Manual M 1 4 Application a 1 5 Theory of ODbEIIbdOf sedare ribns 1 6 Mass Transd cer Bosco i T 1 8 Mass Flow Controllers 1 11 Mass Concentration
330. t requirements are placed on whether the anemometer was mounted at a height of 10 m 5 m or 2 5 above ground level and as to whether the measurements were undertaken in a rural or urban area 12 Characterising the PM climate in the UK for Equivalence Testing D Green amp G Fuller King s College London Environmental Research Group June 2012 uk air defra gov uk reports cat13 1207190952 DefraCharacterisingThePMClimatelnTheUKForEquivalenceTestingV3 pdf Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 93 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the and PM25 TEOM 1405 DF Table 29 Low and high thresholds and the requisite number of daily means for PM and 5 equivalence tests to be carried out outside these thresholds whichever is appropriate as a percentage of the number of measurements within one comparison for semi volatile PM mass concentrations and for selected meteorological conditions Semi volatile Wind speed m s Ambient Ambient Dew Nitrate ug m 3 Temperature Point Threshold Threshold SEES 25 mees Uer erm cero Threshold Urban Rural Urban Rural Urban Rural efe efe elo mfe sfe re RNC All of the concentration and meteorological data measured in the field tests for this study are given in Appendix E 15 2 Geometric Mean Calculations The results of the geometric mean calculations are summarised in Table 30 and Table 31 Where criteria a
331. tas Air Quality Page 29 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 le BUREAU VERITAS Thermo Fisher Scientific 2 UK Report on the Equivalence of the PM and 5 TEOM 1405 DF Table 7 Summary of the Flow Check Results Flow rate check before SN 20014 SN 20116 l min Deviation from l min Deviation from Test site nominal value nominal value 6 96 Teddington Dec 2009 1 0 1 3 0 6 0 6 1 6 1 1 Teddington April 2010 4 0 0 3 4 8 0 0 4 6 3 4 Cologne winter 0 3 1 3 0 6 0 0 0 8 1 0 Bornheim summer 4 0 2 3 3 0 0 0 1 0 0 4 Detailed representation of the test results In Table 8 and Table 9 the determined parameter for the flow are shown Figure 4 to Figure 11 on the following pages show the graphical representation of the flow measurements at both candidates SN 20014 and SN 20116 Table 8 Parameter for the total flow measurement 24h average Cologne Winter SN 20014 No of 24h values Average l min Dev from nominal value Std Dev l min Max l min Min l min 16 67 0 001 16 82 16 53 Table 9 Parameter for the total flow measurement 24h average Cologne Winter SN 20116 No of 24h values Average l min Dev from nominal value Std Dev l min Max l min l min 16 67 0 001 16 93 16 41 Conclusion for UK Purposes As the highest deviation from the nominal value is 0 001 it is this value that should be tr
332. tatus Operating mode Stabilizing R amp z32 mode Hone Vacuum pump prexsure DE Enclosure temperatume 0 0 Inztruemaent Probection level Linlorkved Conditions address 182 188 133 179 Serial number 12 0587890 Insbrumernt firmare version Settings Service a Hairi To view the current status warnings select the View Warnings button or touch the warning triangle or the title bar when it is visible in any screen The Warnings screen will display Figure 4 7 Select the lt Previous Warning and Next Warning gt buttons to view the status warnings ENTIFIC Syebem Statue s Warnings Cope Bow The current coarse sore tham Tros ther set penis x Back s sm esti moe Operatine TEOM 1405 DF 4 9 Section 4 SCREENS AND SETTINGS Instru Ment The Instrument Conditions button displays the Instrument Conditions screen Figure 4 8 and provides access to several temperature and flow Cond itions Sc reen settings and the current ambient air conditions for the instrument Figure 4 8 Instrument Conditions screen TEDN Oma TEOM 1205 ingirumeni Conditions System Status Instrument Conditions Settings Service SEE Hund s ORR SMI 123 When in the Instrument Conditions screen select the Ambient Conditions Instrument Temperatures Flows Analog Inputs and FDMS Module bu
333. ter lists the following requirement for the Maintenance Interval of the measuring system Frequency of the QA QC checks etc shall be the same as those intended for the operational field conditions to the extent that it is demonstrated that no additional uncertainty terms would arise during subsequent field operation e g greater drift occurs between calibrations due to longer periods between checks Otherwise an extra uncertainty term shall be added to provide the overall uncertainty during operational field conditions and this then shall conform to the Directive s data quality objectives Directive 2008 50 EC Annex I and GDE2010 Annex Dj Within Directive 2008 50 EC there is no guidance as to the maintenance interval Within GDE2010 it is recommended that maintenance is required as per the manufacturer s instructions There is however no guidance as to an absolute maintenance interval Within 5164504 there is very clear guidance namely The maintenance interval is the longest time without intervention as recommended by the manufacturer During this period the instrument shall not need any maintenance or adjustment The minimum maintenance interval is defined as at least 14 days For the MCERTS certification process for instruments assessed prior to the launch of MCERTS for UK Particulate Matter the minimum maintenance interval was defined as two weeks Further the T V Rheinland Report defines the minimum maint
334. the system to overcome losses An automatic gain control circuit maintains the oscillation at a constant amplitude A precision electronic counter measures the oscillation frequency with a 10 second sampling period The tapered element is in essence a hollow cantilever beam with an associated spring rate and mass As in any spring mass system if additional mass is added the frequency of the oscillation decreases This can be seen by observing the frequency on the display of the TEOM 1405 DF unit Section 4 and operating the monitor both with and without a filter in place In a spring mass system the frequency follows the equation f K where f frequency K spring rate M mass K and M are in consistent units The relationship between mass and change in frequency can be expressed as where 1 1 dm K a f fo dm change in mass K spring constant including mass conversions f initial frequency Hz f final frequency Hz Guine TEOM 1405 DF 1 9 Section 1 INTRODUCTION When this equation is rearranged you can solve for the spring constant K dm K 1 1 Thus K the calibration constant for the instrument be easily determined by measuring the frequencies with and without a known mass pre weighed TEOM filter cartridge 1 10 Operatine TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Mass Flow Controllers Sectio
335. thout application of correction factors The evaluation of the All data comparison for both candidates nevertheless delivers a significant intercept for both measuring components and PMi The intercept for all data comparison is 1 212 for 5 see Table 22 The intercept for all data comparison is 1 078 for see Table 23 For this reason an intercept correction for the All data comparison was performed and all data sets re evaluated with the corrected values All data sets comply with the specifications on the data quality after the correction The improvement of the expanded measuring uncertainty is significant for some of the test sites though for the test site Teddington it gets worse GDE 2010 requires that when operating in networks a candidate method needs to be tested annually at a number of sites corresponding to the highest expanded uncertainty found during equivalence testing These criteria are banded in 5 steps GDE 20105 point 9 9 2 table 6 For the highest determined expanded uncertainty was in the range 20 to 25 both before as well as after the correction of the intercept For the highest determined expanded uncertainty after correction was in the range of 15 to 20 whereas before the correction it laid in the range 20 96 to 25 96 The application of a correction factor for the TEOM 1405 DF Ambient Particulate Monitor for PM and therefore slightly improves th
336. tions 5 12 Operatine Guine TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES AdvancedFilter Change For experienced users who are comfortable with the filter change operation the monitor offers an advanced filter change mode When the users selects the advanced mode in the TEOM Filter Replacement starting screen Figure 5 5 the system automatically stops the TEOM filters and displays a screen to prompt the filter change operation Figure 5 16 Replace Filters Open the mass trangducer and replace filters Figure 5 16 Advanced filter change screen How tlvai the Insirussent in sebup mde and tle are Hopped you elsange iie Sers x Back gt Cancel When the screen displays change the filters and select the Next gt button The finished screen will display Figure 5 17 Figure 5 17 Wizard complete message Completing the TEOM Filter Replacement Wizard You have sucesstulhy completed the TEGH Fitter Replacement Wizard You should how replace the 47 mm i fibers and clean the sample inlet ag 4A deserted in the TEOM Series 1405 Operating Guide THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Operatinc TEOM 1405 DF 5 13 Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES Figure 5 18 TEOM Data screen 5 14 Operatine Guine TEOM 1405 DF Note The advanced filter wizard DOES NOT automatically check the frequency Users MUST ensure
337. to Instrument is Unrecognizable COM 2 WAY SETTINGS RS Para 1 ASCII code for the 1 digit Station Number for example 4 052 The Station Number is always 1 digit in length RS Para 2 75048 ASCII code representation of the 2 digit Channel Number for example KO 075 048 The Channel Number is always 2 digits in length RS Para 3 13010 Optional Up to ASCII codes can be added to response from the instrument In this case CR and lt LF gt ASCII codes 013 and 010 are appended to the response Enter 0 if nothing is to be appended ere quem mmm Pe meer Le 1 isses rai Question marks inserted in place of unrecognizable command C eC 1 Number of current status conditions RN Syntax error the response transmission according to the entry for RS Para 3 ES E Up to 3 digits appended to the end of ES THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Operatinc TEOM 1405 DF B 11 SERIAL COMMUNICATION 12 Operatine TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC
338. ton Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Teddington Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter Cologne Winter eu pue uelis Sun 20 Jun 10 10 00 Mon 21 Jun 10 10 00 Tue 22 Jun 10 10 00 Wed 23 Jun 10 10 00 Thu 24 Jun 10 10 00 Fri 25 Jun 10 10 00 Sat 26 Jun 10 10 00 Sun 27 Jun 10 10 00 Mon 28 Jun 10 10 00 Tue 29 Jun 10 10 00 Wed 30 Jun 10 10 00 Thu 01 Jul 10 10 00 Thu 27 Jan 11 10 00 Fri 28 Jan 11 10 00 Sat 29 Jan 11 10 00 Sun 30 Jan 11 10 00 Mon 31 Jan 11 10 00 Tue 01 Feb 11 10 00 Wed 02 Feb 11 10 00 Thu 03 Feb 11 10 00 Fri 04 Feb 11 10 00 Sat 05 Feb 11 10 00 Sun 06 Feb 11 10 00 Mon 07 Feb 11 10 00 Tue 08 Feb 11 10 00 Wed 09 Feb 11 10 00 Thu 10 Feb 11 10 00 Fri 11 Feb 11 10 00 Sat 12 Feb 11 10 00 Bureau Veritas Air Quality AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 gui Drl SA1 S ZNd 9 1 7 5 8 1 6 9 14 6 20 9 10 4 4 9 44 6 9 8 9 28 3 62 0 81 6 61 9 20 6 14 1 6 1 8 4 9 7 18 0 21 2 19 4 10 5 Z ESAT 28 5 62 1 81 8 62 0 20 1 13 4 6 2 8 5 10 0 17 3 21 9 20 8 11 3 L ESAT OLNd 15 5 13 1 15 3 11 5 23 0 29 1 8 9 9 6 11 0 12 8 36 3 82 7 95 5 75 3 25 2 20 1 11 0 14
339. tput 5 Maximum 192 Analog Input 1 Constant B 94 Bypass Flow Audit Adjust 149 Analog Output 6 Maximum 193 Analog Input 2 Constant B 96 Vacuum Pump Pressure 150 Analog Output 7 Maximum 194 Analog Input 3 Constant B Thermo Fisher Scientific Operating Guide TEOM 1405 DF 3 Appendix B Serial Communication B 4 Operating Guide TEOM 1405 DF PRC Code Description PRC Code Description PRC Code Description 195 Analog Input 4 Constant B 268 TEOM A KO Verification Date 355 Dichot 30 Min Mass Conc 196 Analog Input 1 Constant 271 TEOM A Dryer Temperature 356 Dichot 1 Hr Mass Conc 197 Analog Input 2 Constant 272 TEOM A Dryer Dew Point 357 Dichot XX Hr Mass Conc 198 Analog Input 3 Constant 273 TEOM A Dryer Relative Humidity 358 Dichot 12 Hr Mass Conc 199 Analog Input 4 Constant C 274 Valve Position Current 359 Dichot 24 Hr Mass Conc 200 Analog Input 1 Value 275 Valve Position Desired 360 Dichot Mass Rate 201 Analog Input 2 Value 276 Clean Cooler Date 361 TEOM B Dryer Temp 202 Analog Input 3 Value 277 Clean Valve Date 362 TEOM Dryer Dew Point 203 Analog Input 4 Value 287 TEOM A Cooler Temperature 363 TEOM Dryer Relative Humidity 204 Analog Input 1 Average Value 288 TEOM A Cooler Setpoint 373 TEOM B Cooler Temp 205 Analog Input 2 Averag
340. trument 5 Set the tripod on the roof above the 1405 unit and adjust the legs so the top of the tripod is above the roof opening Figure 2 10 Installing the sample tubes and bypass line through the roof Flow splitter with bypass Sample tube extensions 1 3 4 inch centers 2 10 Operatine TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC 2 SETUP AND INSTALLATION 6 Install the virtual impactor on the top of the flow splitter Figure 2 11 7 Install one of the 1 2 inch sample tube extensions into the coarse sample fitting on the virtual impactor The tube must be inserted through the fitting and fully seated into the base of the virtual impactor Note The coarse flow channel is the right channel as you face the instrument with the 1 2 inch Swagelok connection on the bottom of the virtual impactor The 1 2 inch sample tube will run parallel to the PM 2 5 bypass channel of the flow splitter just next to the tripod and when attached should be even with the bottom of the sample tube in the flow splitter A 8 Install the sample inlet tube on the top of the virtual impactor Figure 2 11 Figure 2 11 Virtual impactor and sample inlet tube Sample inlet tube Virtual impactor Flow splitter Coarse sample tube THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Operatinc TEOM 1405 DF 2 11 Section 2 SETUP AND INSTALLATION 9 Set the inlet on top of the sample inlet tube and adjust the tripod so the ent
341. trument door Operatinc TEOM 1405 DF 5 71 Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES 14 The Select TEOM screen will display again Figure 5 88 The channel that was just verified will be grayed out on the screen to show it was verified during this verification session If you want to verify the other TEOM KO number select the other KO channel and then the Next gt button Follow steps 6 14 and the wizard to complete the other KO verification Otherwise ensure that no KO buttons are selected and select the Next gt button Figure 5 88 Select The wizard will verify each TEOM independantly Select TEOM screen 5 72 Operatine TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES 15 When the final verification has been performed the Completing the Verification Wizard screen will display The screen will display either a pass Figure 5 89 or a fail Figure 5 90 message for each KO number Select the Finish button Note If one or both of the KO verifications fail repeat the procedure for that KO number If the verification fails again contact Thermo Scientific Figure 5 89 Completing to KO Verification Wizard screen with a pass message Completing the Verification Wizard KO Verification Wizard has completed sucessfully The instrument will be put m Run mede when ihis wizard is finished PEAS TEGH
342. ttons to reach the desired screens Figure 4 9 4 10 Operatine TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 4 SCREENS AND SETTINGS 9 igure 4 F Screens accessible through the Instrument Conditions screen juiod jas Bay juiod jas einsseJd PIS HPF juiod jeg pis ups julod jas 881209 piepuels 10 enjoy 10 55 4 10 U09 1es 49 009 9881200 uonisod quauing 981209 g z Nd duie 19002 g z Nd 1utod map asse00 62 es1e00 g z INd OW eseg 0 g z INd OW Jed OW eseg 7 esieoo s 2 Wd HH eA esreoo Sg 2 Nd 1utod map 1e q G Z Wd duie ssed q quiod jes qulod jas S Z Nd HPA i i MOJJ 8101 ssed g aye1 aS1eOD 62 4 jauueyo jndui Boyeue A yes duie eqni jas eqn G Z Nd XPI juiod yes deo juiod jas duis ase v ndu Jeuueuo Boyeuy Boyeuy
343. ual impactor allowing the TEOM 1405 DF to simultaneously determine the PM 2 5 fine and PM Coarse coatse mass concentrations and by adding the concentrations the PM 10 mass concentration is obtained as well In addition to the dual mass sensors and virtual impactor the TEOM 1405 DF utilizes the FDMS technology on both the fine and coarse channels of the monitor The FDMS allows the TEOM 1405 DF to provide a representative determination of the mass concentrations of both the fine and coarse PM as it exists in the ambient air The FDMS unit automatically determines mass concentration measurements that account for both non volatile and volatile PM components The TEOM 1405 DF Monitor is composed of two major components Figure 1 1 the sample inlet assembly with virtual impactor and the TEOM 1405 DF unit with FDMS system The user enters the system parameters into the TEOM 1405 DF unit using a color touch screen that is located on the front of the unit The instrument s internal storage buffer can store a large amount of data for later viewing or downloading over a network connection A USB connection allows easy downloads to a portable USB flash drive Additionally the system is furnished with software for personal computers to allow the user to download data and update instrument firmware The instrument does not require a dedicated computer to function in the field Analog outputs are available to transmit the measurements to a user s data
344. ue 174 Analog Output 7 Cal High Set 64 Ambient Dew Point 131 Analog Output 4 Raw Value 175 Analog Output 8 Cal High Se 65 Ambient Pressure Raw 132 Analog Output 5 Raw Value 76 Analog Output 1 Cal High Actua 66 Ambient Pressure 133 Analog Output 6 Raw Value 177 Analog Output 2 Cal High Actua 67 Ambient Pressure Offset 134 Analog Output 7 Raw Value 78 Analog Output 3 Cal High Actua 70 Wind Direction 135 Analog Output 8 Raw Value 179 Analog Output 4 Cal High Actua 72 Wind Speed 136 Analog Output 1 Minimum 80 Analog Output 5 Cal High Actua 73 Wind Velocity 137 Analog Output 2 Minimum 181 Analog Output 6 Cal High Actua 74 Average Temperature Setpoint 138 Analog Output 3 Minimum 82 Analog Output 7 Cal High Actua 75 Standard Temperature Setpoint 139 Analog Output 4 Minimum 83 Analog Output 8 Cal High Actua 76 Average Pressure Setpoint 140 Analog Output 5 Minimum 184 Analog Input 1 Raw 77 Standard Pressure Setpoint 141 Analog Output 6 Minimum 85 Analog Input 2 Raw 78 Flow Control 142 Analog Output 7 Minimum 186 Analog Input 3 Raw 79 Mass Conc Reporting 143 Analog Output 8 Minimum 187 Analog Input 4 Raw 89 Bypass Flow Mass 144 Analog Output 1 Maximum 188 Analog Input 1 Constant A 90 Bypass Flow Volumetric 145 Analog Output 2 Maximum 189 Analog Input 2 Constant A 91 Bypass Flow Mass Setpoint 146 Analog Output 3 Maximum 190 Analog Input 3 Constant A 92 Bypass Flow Offset 147 Analog Output 4 Maximum 191 Analog Input 4 Constant A 93 Bypass Flow Span 148 Analog Ou
345. ufacturer s instructions and the pin assignments of the TEOM 1405 Figure 3 38 and Table 3 1 Figure 3 38 1405 USER 1 0 pin assignments User 1 0 USER ANALOG OUTPUT 1 USER ANALOG OUTPUT GROUND USER ANALOG OUTPUT 2 15 USER ANALOG OUTPUT GROUND USER ANALOG OUTPUT 3 USER ANALOG OUTPUT GROUND USER ANALOG OUTPUT 4 USER ANALOG OUTPUT 5 USER ANALOG OUTPUT GROUND USER ANALOG OUTPUT 6 USER ANALOG OUTPUT 7 USER ANALOG OUTPUT GROUND USER ANALOG OUTPUT 8 USER ANALOG INPUT 1 USER ANALOG INPUT GROUND USER ANALOG INPUT 2 USER ANALOG INPUT GROUND USER ANALOG INPUT 3 USER ANALOG INPUT GROUND 3 USER ANALOG INPUT 4 USER ANALOG INPUT GROUND Je O O 0 0 elelelele ol USER DIGITAL OUTPUT 1 USER DIGITAL OUTPUT 1 USER DIGITAL OUTPUT 2 USER DIGITAL OUTPUT 2 9050 0 0 0 ie Table 3 1 1405 USER 1 0 Channel Pin Channel Pin assignments Analog output 1 1 Analog output 1 ground 14 Analog output 2 2 Analog output 2 ground 15 Analog output 3 Analog output 3 ground 16 Analog output 4 Analog output 4 ground 16 N Analog output 5 Analog output 5 ground Analog output 6 18 Analog output 6 ground Analog output 7 6 Analog output 7 ground 19 Analog output 8 7 Analog output 8 ground 19 Analog input 1 20 Analog input 1 ground 8 Analog input 2 21 Analog input 2 ground 9 Analo
346. uipment Not required for this minimum requirement Evaluation If evaluation of the raw data leads to a case where Wom gt Wag which means that the candidate systems is not regarded equivalent to the reference method it is permitted to apply a correction factor or term resulting from the regression equation obtained from the full data set The corrected values shall satisfy the requirements for all data sets or subsets Moreover a correction factor may be applied even for Wem lt Waqo in order to improve the accuracy of the candidate systems Three different cases may occur Slope b not significantly different from 1 b 1 lt 2u b intercept a significantly different from 0 gt 2u a Slope b significantly different from 1 lb 1 gt 2u b intercept a not significantly different from 0 a lt 2u a Slope b significantly different from 1 lb 1 gt 2u b intercept a significantly different from 0 lal gt 2u a With respect to a The value of the intercept a may be used as a correction term to correct all input values according to the following equation Y y The resulting values of Yicor may then be used to calculate the following new terms by linear regression MT Ct dx RSS _ n 2 2 TENET u x d 1 x P u a with u a uncertainty of the original intercept a the value of which has been used to obtain corr Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 87 AGGX5
347. ults for reference method Cologne Winter OW 100 90 4 80 4 70 4 60 4 50 4 40 30 4 Not Outlier Outlier Deleted Outlier Not Deleted 1 to 1 Line 30 40 50 60 70 Reference 1 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Page 50 BUREAU VERITAS Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the 5 TEOM 1405 DF Figure 25 Grubbs test results for the PM reference method Bornheim Summer Wd 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 Outlier Outlier Deleted Outlier Not Deleted 1 to 1 Line 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Reference 1 Figure 26 Grubbs test results for the PM reference method Bornheim Winter 2 OW 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 Not Outlier Outlier Deleted Outlier Not Deleted 1 to 1 Line 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Reference 1 Bureau Veritas Air Quality AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Page 51 le BUREAU VERITAS Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the 5 TEOM 1405 DF Figure 27 Grubbs test results for the PM reference method Teddington Wd 100 90 80 a Not Outlier Outlier Deleted Outlier Not Deleted 1
348. ults of the parallel measurements with the candidates SN 20014 SN 20116 measured component PMi all test sites 1405 DF SN20014 SN20116 All Test Sites Raw data Measured values Regression line y x Candidate 2 ug m 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 Candidate 1 g m7 Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 63 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the and PM TEOM 1405 DF VERITAS Figure 40 Results of the parallel measurements with the candidates SN 20014 SN 20116 measured component test site Teddington 1405 DF SN 20014 SN 20116 Teddington Raw data Measured values Regression line Candidate 2 ug m 1 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 Candidate 1 g m7 Figure 41 Results of the parallel measurements with the candidates SN 20014 SN 20116 measured component test site Cologne Winter 1405 DF SN 20014 SN 20116 Cologne Winter Raw data Measured values Regression line y x Candidate 2 ug m 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 Candidate 1 ug m Bureau Veritas Air Quality Pa
349. ure values to regulate the volumetric flow through the system Refer to the following sections for information on setting flow rates and flow controls THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Operatinc TEOM 1405 DF 4 13 Section 4 SCREENS AND SETTINGS Flow Rates Screen Figure 4 12 Flow Rates screen 4 14 Operatine TEOM 1405 DF Select the Flow Rates button in the Flows screen to display the Flow Rates screen Figure 4 12 This screen allows users to adjust the flow rates for the PM Coarse PM 2 5 and bypass flow channels TEOM 1405 DF Ingirumsent Conditiong gt Flows gt Flow Rates a Maid Hone talus mi CHEE 1555 The Flow Rates screen contains the following controls buttons e PM 2 5 path flow rate This field contains the current value of the PM 2 5 path flow rate l min The default setting is 3 1 min To view or adjust the setpoint select the button to display the keypad Figure 4 3 The current value can not be edited Coarse path flow rate This field contains the current value of the PM Coarse path flow rate 1 min The default setting is 1 67 1 To view or adjust the setpoint select the button to display the keypad Figure 4 3 The current value can not be edited Bypass flow rate This field contains the current value of the bypass flow rate The default setting is 12 l min To view or adjust the setpoint select the button to display the keypad Figure 4 3 The current value
350. ureau Veritas Air Quality Page 60 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the and 5 TEOM 1405 DF VERITAS Figure 34 Results of the parallel measurements with the candidates SN 20014 SN 20116 measured component 5 test site Cologne Winter 1405 DF SN 20014 SN 20116 Cologne Winter Raw data Measured values Regression line Candidate 2 ug m 11 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 Candidate 1 ug m Figure 35 Results of the parallel measurements with the candidates SN 20014 SN 20116 measured component PM 5 test site Bornheim Summer 1405 DF SN 20014 SN 20116 Bornheim Summer Raw data Measured values Regression line Candidate 2 ug m 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 Candidate 1 ug m Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 61 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the and PM TEOM 1405 DF VERITAS tz Figure 36 Results of the parallel measurements with the candidates SN 20014 SN 20116 measured component test site Bornheim Winter 1405 DF SN 20014 SN 20116 Bornheim Winter Raw data Measured values
351. uttons to reach the desired screens Figure 4 18 Note Refer to Section 3 for information on using the Data Storage button to select variables for data storage THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 4 SCREENS AND SETTINGS 18 4 igure F Screens accessible through the Settings button Jequunu jenas ups giuejsuo9 y 10215000 paouenpy Jequinw enas Sjuejsuo 0x ssey 4H XX euin yem 4 Soe qeueA uone naje sse paoueApy jou ueppiu suondo eAnoe pue peKe dsip suondo ojeq 104 6 jeuiroeq Aejdsiq uonooj04d 196 oDe1ols ISI 5 151 1 ejeg uonels PON ZEZSH c csud einsojo sindino Bojeuy t sindino Bojeuy 4 23 Operatine Guine TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 4 SCREENS AND SETTINGS System Screen System screen Figure 4 19 allows users to set the basic configuration Figure 4 19
352. valence of the 5 TEOM 1405 DF List of Figures Figure 1 Schematic set up of the mass transducer sss eene 17 Figure 2 Overview of complete system TEOM 1405 DF Ambient Particulate Monitor including American PM sampling inlet Original style p n 57 000596 000 20 Figure 3 Measuring device TEOM 1405 DF Ambient Particulate Monitor 2 system from left 51 Em 20 Figure 4 Series of the PM concentration ug m3 Candidate SN 20014 Cologne Winter 31 Figure 5 PMss flow rate at candidate SN 20014 Cologne 31 Figure 6 flow rate at candidate SN 20014 Cologne 32 Figure 7 Total flow rate at candidate SN 20014 Cologne Winter 32 Figure 8 Time Series of the PM concentration ug m3 Candidate SN 20116 Cologne Winter 33 Figure 9 PM s flow rate at candidate SN 20116 Cologne 33 Figure 10 PMcoarse flow rate at candidate SN 20116 Cologne 34 Figure 11 Total flow rate at candidate SN 20116 Cologne Winter 34 Figure 12 Time Series of the PM concentrations Reference at the test site Teddington 40 Figure 13 Time Series of the PM concentrations Reference at the test site C
353. valence of the and 5 TEOM 1405 DF 13 Discussion on the number of Reference Methods Used As all of the field tests were conducted before the publication of MCERTS for UK Particulate Matter 31 July 2012 there is no requirement that two collocated reference methods are used for each field test In all four field tests two reference method instruments were used and as such the field tests go beyond the requirements of MCERTS for UK Particulate Matter 14 Discussion on the number of UK Field Tests As all of the field tests were conducted before the publication of MCERTS for UK Particulate Matter 31 July 2012 there is a requirement for there to be only at least one UK field test The TEOM 1405 DF had one UK test and as such meets the requirements of MCERTS for UK Particulate Matter Bureau Veritas Air Quality Page 92 AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Thermo Fisher Scientific W UK Report on the Equivalence of the and 5 TEOM 1405 DF PARTICULATE MATTER POLLUTION CLIMATE EVALUATION 15 Pollution Climate Calculations 15 1 Introduction MCERTS for UK Particulate Matter sets out a mechanism for proving whether field campaigns from other Member States are at a similar Pollution Climate to the UK This is based upon an extensive study of the existing pollution climate within the UK The methodology centres on a number of parameters Primary of these is that it is required to prove that the geometric mean of t
354. wer and remove the jumper If one of the analog input jumpers was used replace it in the original location Close the instrument front panel and turn on the instrument power Operatinc TEOM1405 DF 4 41 Section 4 SCREENS AND SETTINGS 10 Verify the instrument settings were retained including serial number and KO Re enter these values if necessary 11 Thermo Fisher Scientific recommends performing a calibration of the instrument temperatures pressure and flows after a firmware update Refer to Section 5 for calibration instructions Figure 4 34 Interface board 4 42 Operatine TEOM 1405 DF THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Maintenance THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section5 Maintenance and Calibration Procedures Periodic Thermo Scientific recommends the following regular maintenance procedures for the TEOM 1405 DF Replace Refurbish the dryer Replace Refurbish the FDMS dryer once Replace the TEOM filters Replace the 47 mm filters Clean the sample inlet Clean the virtual impactor Replace the in line filters Clean the coolers Clean the switching valve Clean the air inlet system Rebuild the sample pump a year ot as necessary See page 5 3 Replace the PM Coarse and PM 2 5 TEOM filters when the filter loading percentage displayed in the Main screen nears 100 or every 30 days Replace the 47 mm filters every time you replace the TEOM filters every 30 days Clean the sample inl
355. y parking lot summer 07 2011 10 2011 Rural structure influence traffic Bornheim motorway parking lot winter 11 2011 02 2012 Rural structure influence traffic As all of the field tests were conducted before the publication of MCERTS for UK Particulate Matter 31 July 2012 allowances are made for the scope of the field tests 1 It is not necessary that all the field test sites have a similar pollution climate similar to that of the UK though these calculations are presented herein 2 There is a requirement for there to be only at least one UK field test The TEOM 1405 DF had one UK test 3 There is no requirement that two collocated reference methods are used for each field test though two reference methods were used in all four tests 4 There is no requirement for there to be at least 90 data availability though these calculations are presented herein Bureau Veritas Air Quality AGGX5508189 BV DH 2835 Page 24 9 BUREAU VERITAS Thermo Fisher Scientific UK Report on the Equivalence of the and 5 TEOM 1405 DF 3 Conditions for which Equivalence is Claimed The requirements of CEN TS16450 2013 are that measurement ranges are defined as e 0 ug m to 1000 ug m as a 24 hour average value and e 0 ug m to 10000 ug m as a 1 hour average value if applicable At the measuring devices measuring ranges up to a maximum of 0 to 1000000 ug m ca
356. y and virtual impactor 5 22 ObrnariNG Guine TEOM 1405 DF Tools materials required Ammonia based general purpose cleaner O ring grease Phillipsscrewdriver To clean and maintain the virtual impactor 1 Remove the inlet from the top of the system then remove the virtual impactor from the flow splitter coarse sample tube Figures 5 28 2 Remove the 1 1 4 inch sample tube that connects the inlet to the impactor Figures 5 28 3 Remove the four sctews on each cornet of the bottom section of the virtual impactor Separate its body from its base plate Figures 5 29 4 Remove the three screws that hold the top of the virtual impactor to the body Figures 5 28 and 5 29 5 Use water and a mild detergent to wash the inside surfaces of the body top and bottom sections of the impactor A general purpose cleaner can be used if necessary Inlet Sample tube Virtual impactor Flow splitter and coarse sample tube THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC Section 5 MAINTENANCE AND CALIBRATION PROCEDURES 6 Inspect all O rings in each section of the virtual impactor for damage and replace them if necessary Apply a thin coating of O ring lubricant onto the O rings if necessary 7 Install the base to the body using the four screws that were removed in step 3 Figure 5 29 8 Install the top onto the body using the three screws that were removed in step 4 Figure 5 29 9 Install the adapter tube into the top of the virtual

Report 2 - CSA Group

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents